- All categories
Welcome to Wikbeauty
Main menu
-
SHOP All
-
Shop by Category
- Shop by Category
-
Body Contouring & Fat Reduction
-
Facial & Skin Rejuvenation
-
Recovery & Circulation Therapy
-
Bestsellers
Your cart
Product Comparison
Describe you product comparison grid
|
__ __ |
|
|---|---|
| Vendor |
Vendor - __ |
| SKU |
SKU - __ |
| Description |
Description - __ |
| Customizable title |
Customizable title - __ |
| Variant name |
Variant name - __ |
|
|
Compare products ( / )
All Machines
All Machines
Wikbeauty Beauty & Wellness Machines Collection
Discover the ultimate collection of beauty and wellness devices from Wikbeauty, designed to help you achieve professional-grade results from the comfort of your home. Our diverse range of products includes advanced technologies such as RF cavitation, lipo laser, EMS muscle sculpting, HIFU, cryolipolysis, and microneedling. Whether you're looking for body contouring, skin rejuvenation, fat reduction, or muscle toning, our machines are tailored to meet every need. From the Wikbeauty 30K/40K Vacuum RF Cavitation Device and Lipo Laser Machines to the EMSZero Muscle Sculpting Machine and Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine, each device offers a specialized solution for tightening skin, lifting muscles, and enhancing your natural beauty. Our Wikbeauty Morpheus8 RF microneedling and Wetamorph Golden Youth RF Microneedling Machine provide non-invasive skin rejuvenation, while devices like the 15-in-1 Hydra Beauty Skin System Facial Machine and Wikbeauty 7D Face Lifting Body Slimming HIFU Machine cater to your full body and facial needs. Achieve smoother skin, improved muscle tone, and a youthful appearance with our wide array of tools, all crafted with cutting-edge technology for effective and lasting results.
Transform Every Treatment
From fat reduction to facial rejuvenation, our professional-grade equipment is built to elevate every service on your menu, giving clients real results and your business a competitive edge.
53 products
53 products
Sort by:
- Featured
- Most relevant
- Best selling
- Alphabetically, A-Z
- Alphabetically, Z-A
- Price, low to high
- Price, high to low
- Date, old to new
- Date, new to old
$1,199.00
Professional 5-in-1 Body Sculpting and Skin-Rejuvenation System
Ultrasonic Cavitation, Radiofrequency, Vacuum, LED, and Massage Technology
The Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device is a professional 5-in-1 beauty system that combines ultrasonic cavitation, radiofrequency, vacuum therapy, LED light, and massage functions on one platform.
The machine is available with either a 30K or 40K cavitation configuration. Its five specialized treatment handles support customizable body-contouring, skin-tightening, facial-rejuvenation, and vacuum-massage programs.
With adjustable treatment settings, an intelligent touchscreen, pre-programmed protocols, universal 110V–240V power compatibility, and a 30kg professional design, the machine is suitable for beauty salons, spas, and body-contouring clinics.
30K or 40K cavitation | Five beauty technologies | Five specialized handles | Universal voltage | Three-year warranty
Five Professional Technologies on One Platform
Ultrasonic Cavitation
The cavitation function delivers ultrasonic energy to selected body areas as part of a professional body-contouring program.
Customers can choose between:
-
30K cavitation operating at 30,000Hz
-
40K cavitation operating at 40,000Hz
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Waistline treatments
-
Thigh contouring
-
Buttock-area programs
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Localized body-shaping treatments
Radiofrequency
Radiofrequency energy provides controlled thermal stimulation within the selected treatment area. The machine includes different RF handpieces for facial and body applications.
Common applications include:
-
Facial skin tightening
-
Body skin-firming treatments
-
Collagen-remodeling programs
-
Fine-line and wrinkle care
-
Improved skin texture
-
Post-cavitation skin tightening
Vacuum Therapy
The adjustable vacuum function provides controlled suction for professional body massage and contouring programs.
Common applications include:
-
Vacuum massage
-
Tissue mobilization
-
Cellulite-appearance programs
-
Body-contouring support
-
Lymphatic-style beauty treatments
-
Post-treatment massage
LED Light Therapy
Integrated LED light can be incorporated into suitable facial and body-care programs.
Common applications include:
-
Skin-rejuvenation treatments
-
Facial beauty programs
-
Skin-comfort support
-
Combined RF and LED treatments
-
Post-treatment skincare programs
Multipolar RF Massage
Multipolar RF handpieces combine controlled thermal energy with professional massage movements across selected treatment areas.
Common applications include:
-
Facial firming
-
Upper-arm tightening
-
Leg skin treatments
-
Abdomen and waist programs
-
Buttock and thigh treatments
-
General skin-texture improvement
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Body-Contouring Program
Uses the selected 30K or 40K cavitation handpiece for targeted body treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Waistline shaping
-
Thigh treatments
-
Buttock-area contouring
-
Upper-arm programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about localized body areas
-
Clients seeking non-invasive body contouring
-
Clients following balanced wellness programs
Skin-Tightening Program
Uses the appropriate radiofrequency handpiece to provide controlled thermal stimulation.
Recommended applications:
-
Loose-looking body skin
-
Reduced facial firmness
-
Upper-arm skin tightening
-
Abdomen and waist firming
-
General collagen-remodeling programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking firmer-looking skin
-
Clients combining cavitation and RF
-
Clients receiving age-management beauty treatments
Facial-Rejuvenation Program
Uses the smaller tripolar RF handpiece and suitable LED settings for controlled facial treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Facial skin tightening
-
Fine-line care
-
Texture improvement
-
Facial collagen support
-
General anti-aging treatments
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about early signs of aging
-
Clients seeking non-invasive facial care
-
Clients requiring a smaller treatment applicator
Vacuum-Massage Program
Uses adjustable suction and controlled massage movements on suitable body areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Body massage
-
Tissue mobilization
-
Cellulite-appearance programs
-
Lymphatic-style beauty treatments
-
Combined body-contouring services
Recommended for:
-
Clients receiving multi-stage body treatments
-
Clients seeking massage-based body care
-
Clients combining vacuum with cavitation or RF
Adjustable Cavitation, RF, and Vacuum Settings
The machine allows professionals to personalize treatments according to the selected technology, treatment area, and client comfort.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Cavitation Option | 30K or 40K | Selected ultrasonic body-contouring configuration |
| 30K Frequency | 30,000Hz | Professional cavitation treatments |
| 40K Frequency | 40,000Hz | Professional cavitation treatments |
| RF Frequency | 1–10MHz adjustable | Facial and body thermal treatments |
| RF Configurations | Monopolar, tripolar, quadrupolar, and hexapolar | Different treatment areas |
| Vacuum Pressure | Adjustable | Personalized suction and massage |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–40 minutes | Flexible treatment planning |
| Control System | Intelligent touchscreen | Protocol and setting management |
Settings should be adjusted progressively according to client comfort, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen and Waist
The cavitation, RF, vacuum, and massage functions can be incorporated into customized midsection treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Waistline shaping
-
Skin-firming support
-
Vacuum massage
-
Combined cavitation and RF treatment
Buttocks and Thighs
Larger treatment handles support structured lower-body contouring and skin-care programs.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock-area contouring
-
Inner-thigh treatments
-
Outer-thigh treatments
-
Cellulite-appearance programs
-
Skin-firming and massage
Face, Arms, and Legs
Smaller and medium-sized multipolar RF handles support treatments for additional facial and body areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Facial rejuvenation
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Arm skin tightening
-
Leg treatments
-
General skin-texture improvement
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Technology |
|---|---|---|
| Face | Skin tightening and rejuvenation | Tripolar RF and LED |
| Upper Arms | Contouring and skin firming | Cavitation and quadrupolar RF |
| Abdomen | Body contouring and tightening | Cavitation, RF, and vacuum |
| Waist | Contour definition and massage | Cavitation, RF, and vacuum |
| Buttocks | Contouring and skin-firming support | Cavitation and hexapolar RF |
| Thighs | Body contouring and cellulite-appearance care | Cavitation, vacuum, and RF |
| Legs | Skin firming and massage | Quadrupolar RF and vacuum |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, treatment objectives, target areas, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment process and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Technology and Handle Selection
Choose the 30K or 40K cavitation function, appropriate RF handpiece, vacuum setting, LED function, or combined treatment sequence.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Clean the selected treatment area and apply the correct treatment medium when required. Configure the machine according to the area and client comfort.
Step 4: Active Treatment
Move the selected handpiece continuously according to the supplied protocol. Monitor the client’s skin response, temperature, suction level, and comfort throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the treatment medium, inspect and clean the treated area, record the selected settings, and provide appropriate aftercare recommendations.
Designed for Professional Beauty Environments
The Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device combines five complementary beauty technologies within one professional platform.
Key advantages include:
-
Choice of 30K or 40K ultrasonic cavitation
-
Five integrated beauty technologies
-
Five specialized treatment handles
-
Facial and body treatment capability
-
Adjustable 1–10MHz RF frequency
-
Monopolar and multipolar RF configurations
-
Adjustable vacuum pressure
-
Integrated LED light
-
Professional massage function
-
Intelligent touchscreen controls
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
Approximately 20–40-minute sessions
-
30kg professional system
-
Universal 110V–240V power compatibility
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device |
| Technology | Cavitation, radiofrequency, vacuum, LED, and massage |
| Cavitation Options | 30K or 40K |
| 30K Frequency | 30,000Hz |
| 40K Frequency | 40,000Hz |
| RF Frequency Range | 1–10MHz adjustable |
| RF Configurations | Monopolar, tripolar, quadrupolar, and hexapolar |
| Vacuum Pressure | Adjustable |
| Treatment Handles | Five |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–40 minutes |
| Display | Intelligent touchscreen |
| Treatment Programs | Pre-programmed and adjustable |
| Treatment Areas | Face, arms, abdomen, waist, buttocks, thighs, and legs |
| Weight | 30kg |
| Power Supply | 110V–240V |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation main unit
-
1 × 30K or 40K cavitation handpiece
-
1 × Standard RF handpiece
-
1 × Tripolar RF facial handpiece
-
1 × Quadrupolar RF handpiece
-
1 × Hexapolar RF body handpiece
-
Integrated vacuum function
-
Integrated LED light function
-
Intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
1 × Universal 110V–240V power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
The selected 30K or 40K cavitation configuration should be confirmed when placing the order.
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Professional video training
-
30K or 40K cavitation guidance
-
RF handpiece-selection guidance
-
Vacuum-treatment protocols
-
Facial treatment protocols
-
Body-contouring protocols
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use all five technologies safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
30K or 40K cavitation operation
-
Treatment-handpiece selection
-
RF frequency and energy adjustment
-
Vacuum-pressure adjustment
-
LED and massage functions
-
Facial treatment protocols
-
Body-contouring protocols
-
Combined treatment sequences
-
Equipment cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Consumable accessories and components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated according to the supplied instructions and applicable local requirements.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Active cancer or tumors
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Serious liver or kidney conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Reduced or impaired skin sensation
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Cavitation should not be applied over the heart, head, neck, breasts, bones, joints, reproductive organs, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Facial treatments should only use suitable facial handpieces and settings. The cavitation handpiece should not be used on the face.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, handpieces, cables, and accessories before use.
-
Select the correct handpiece for the treatment area.
-
Begin with conservative energy and vacuum settings.
-
Keep cavitation and RF handpieces moving during treatment.
-
Use the correct treatment medium where required.
-
Monitor skin response and client comfort.
-
Avoid prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Do not leave an active handpiece stationary on the skin.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable handpieces after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin reaction occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Beauty salons
-
Medical spas
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Wellness centers
-
Skin-rejuvenation studios
-
Professional spas
-
Aesthetic treatment facilities
-
Home-based beauty businesses
Professional operators should review local licensing, insurance, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device?
Choice of 30K or 40K Cavitation
Businesses can select the cavitation frequency that best matches their preferred treatment protocols and service requirements.
Five Technologies on One Platform
Cavitation, radiofrequency, vacuum, LED, and massage functions support a broad range of facial and body treatments.
Five Specialized Treatment Handles
Different handpiece configurations support treatments for the face, arms, abdomen, waist, thighs, buttocks, and legs.
Customizable Professional Settings
Adjustable RF frequency, vacuum pressure, treatment programs, and different handpiece configurations allow professionals to personalize each session.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes step-by-step training, treatment guidance, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device?
It is a professional 5-in-1 beauty system combining ultrasonic cavitation, radiofrequency, vacuum therapy, LED light, and massage functions.
Can I choose between 30K and 40K cavitation?
Yes. The machine is available with either a 30K or 40K cavitation configuration. The selected option should be confirmed when placing the order.
What is the difference between 30K and 40K?
The specified difference is the ultrasonic frequency. The 30K configuration operates at 30,000Hz, while the 40K configuration operates at 40,000Hz. Treatment selection should follow the appropriate professional training and protocol.
How many treatment handles are included?
The package includes five specialized handles: one selected cavitation handpiece and four RF handpiece configurations.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, upper arms, abdomen, waist, buttocks, thighs, and legs. The correct handpiece and protocol must be selected for each area.
How long does one treatment take?
A typical session takes approximately 20–40 minutes, depending on the treatment area, selected technologies, and treatment sequence.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied information indicates that visible changes may be noticed after three to five sessions. Individual outcomes vary, and the final treatment plan should be personalized following consultation.
Can cavitation and RF be used in the same program?
Yes. Suitable clients may receive cavitation followed by RF as part of a combined body-contouring and skin-firming program.
What does the vacuum function do?
The adjustable vacuum function provides controlled suction and massage for suitable body areas. It can be incorporated into body-care, cellulite-appearance, and combined-treatment programs.
Can the machine be used for facial treatments?
Yes. The smaller tripolar RF handpiece and suitable LED function can support professional facial treatments. The cavitation handpiece should not be used on the face.
What does a treatment feel like?
Cavitation may produce an audible sensation, RF creates controlled warmth, and vacuum produces suction. Settings should remain within a comfortable and professionally monitored range.
Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities following a suitable treatment. Temporary warmth, redness, or sensitivity may occur depending on the selected technology and intensity.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Outcomes vary according to the treatment area, body composition, skin condition, number of sessions, lifestyle, selected settings, and individual response.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers cavitation, RF, vacuum, LED, massage, handpiece selection, treatment protocols, client screening, cleaning, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Professional 5-in-1 Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device enables salons, spas, and beauty clinics to provide customizable body-contouring, facial-rejuvenation, skin-tightening, and vacuum-massage services using one professional platform.
Five key benefits:
-
Choice of 30K or 40K ultrasonic cavitation
-
Five complementary beauty technologies
-
Five specialized facial and body handpieces
-
Adjustable settings with universal 110V–240V power
-
Professional training and a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, cavitation configuration, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
From $2,599.00
Professional 5D Lipo Laser System
Five-Wavelength Technology for Non-Invasive Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty 5D Lipo Laser Machine is a professional body-contouring system developed for beauty studios, wellness centers and qualified independent practitioners.
Combining five laser wavelengths with an adjustable multi-pad design, the system enables trained operators to create customized treatments for the abdomen, waist, thighs, arms, back and other commonly requested body areas.
Available in vertical and portable configurations, the machine provides a practical balance of treatment flexibility, operator control and client comfort.
Five wavelengths | Up to 14 pads | 15 energy levels | Vertical or portable
Advanced Five-Wavelength Technology
The system integrates five laser wavelengths within one professional platform:
-
650 nm
-
780 nm
-
808 nm
-
940 nm
-
980 nm
This multi-wavelength configuration provides greater versatility than a conventional single-wavelength system. Treatment parameters can be adjusted according to the selected area, professional protocol and individual client requirements.
Each treatment pad contains either 20 or 28 diode lasers, depending on the configuration selected, with an output of up to 209 mW per diode.
Key Product Advantages
Multi-Wavelength System
Five available wavelengths provide greater flexibility when developing professional body-contouring protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Parameters
Fifteen energy levels, adjustable pulse timing and continuous or pulsed modes allow the operator to customize each session.
Flexible Pad Configuration
The standard system includes six large pads and two small pads. Compatible configurations can be expanded to a maximum of 14 treatment pads.
Independent Pad Cooling
Each treatment pad features an independent wind-cooling system to support stable performance during operation.
Multiple Equipment Formats
Choose a vertical unit for a permanent treatment room or a portable unit for smaller spaces and more flexible working arrangements.
International Compatibility
The system is available in 110 V and 220 V versions, with US, UK, EU and AU plug options.
Professional Body-Contouring Applications
The 5D Lipo Laser Machine is designed for non-invasive aesthetic treatments focused on improving the appearance of body contours.
Common treatment areas include:
| Treatment area | Typical application |
|---|---|
| Abdomen | Abdominal contouring |
| Waist and flanks | Waistline definition |
| Upper and lower back | Localized body contouring |
| Upper arms | Arm-contouring treatments |
| Inner and outer thighs | Thigh shaping |
| Buttocks | Contour-focused treatments |
| Legs and calves | Localized lower-body treatments |
Treatment suitability, pad placement and operating parameters should be determined by a trained operator following a complete client consultation.
How the System Works
The treatment pads are positioned securely over the selected body area using adjustable straps. The operator then selects the treatment duration, energy level and pulse mode according to the recommended protocol.
The pads deliver controlled low-level laser energy to the treatment area without surgical incisions, injections or anesthesia. Sessions are designed to be comfortable and generally do not require a surgical recovery period.
The system should be used as part of a structured body-contouring program. Individual outcomes vary according to body composition, lifestyle, treatment frequency and the protocol applied.
Configurable Treatment-Pad System
Large Treatment Pads
The six large pads provide wider coverage for areas such as the abdomen, waist, back, thighs and buttocks.
Small Treatment Pads
The two small pads are designed for more targeted placement on areas such as the upper arms and smaller localized zones.
Optional Expansion
Selected machine configurations can support up to 14 pads. This provides additional flexibility when covering larger areas or developing multi-pad protocols.
Additional treatment pads are sold separately. Compatibility should be confirmed before purchase.
Vertical and Portable Options
Vertical Configuration
The vertical model provides a refined, professional presentation for dedicated treatment rooms. Its mobile base allows the equipment to be repositioned within the working area when necessary.
Recommended for:
-
Beauty studios
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Permanent treatment rooms
-
Higher-volume treatment environments
Portable Configuration
The portable model offers a more compact footprint while retaining the core multi-pad functionality of the system.
Recommended for:
-
Independent practitioners
-
Smaller studios
-
Limited treatment spaces
-
Professionals requiring easier storage or transportation
Controlled, Client-Focused Operation
The system offers adjustable parameters to support professional operation and individual client comfort.
-
Energy adjustment from level 1 to 15
-
Pulse-time adjustment from 0.1 to 5 seconds
-
Continuous and pulsed operating modes
-
Adjustable session duration
-
Touchscreen control interface
-
Independent cooling for each pad
-
Secure pad-positioning straps
-
IC-card control system
Treatment duration may range from approximately 15 to 60 minutes, depending on the selected area and treatment protocol.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product type | Professional 5D lipo laser machine |
| Technology | Low-level diode laser |
| Laser wavelengths | 650 nm, 780 nm, 808 nm, 940 nm and 980 nm |
| Diode output | Up to 209 mW per diode |
| Diodes per pad | 28 on big and 3 on a small pad |
| Standard configuration | 6 large pads and 2 small pads |
| Maximum configuration | Up to 14 treatment pads |
| Energy adjustment | Levels 1–15 |
| Pulse-time range | 0.1–5 seconds |
| Operating modes | Continuous and pulsed |
| Treatment duration | Approximately 15–60 minutes |
| Cooling system | Independent wind cooling for each pad |
| Control interface | Touchscreen |
| Additional control | IC-card system |
| Equipment options | Vertical or portable |
| Voltage options | 110 V or 220 V |
| Plug options | US, UK, EU and AU |
Product specifications may vary according to the selected configuration. Confirm the final specification sheet with Wikbeauty before ordering.
Standard Package Contents
The standard package includes:
-
One 5D Lipo Laser main unit
-
Six large treatment pads
-
Two small treatment pads
-
Treatment-pad connection cables
-
Adjustable securing straps
-
Protective eyewear
-
Power cable with selected plug
-
English user manual
-
Setup and operating guidance
Optional pads and accessories can be added according to the selected system configuration.
Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides guidance to help buyers understand:
-
Equipment installation
-
Basic system operation
-
Treatment-parameter selection
-
Pad positioning
-
Routine cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
-
Recommended safety procedures
Intended Users
This system is designed for professional use by:
-
Aesthetic practitioners
-
Body-contouring specialists
-
Beauty-studio owners
-
Wellness professionals
-
Trained independent operators
-
Qualified entrepreneurs establishing a treatment business
- Home Use
Safety and Contraindications
A complete consultation and suitability assessment should be performed before every treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Implanted electronic devices
-
Active cancer
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Active skin infections
-
Open wounds in the treatment area
-
Photosensitivity or the use of photosensitizing medication
-
Other conditions identified in the operating manual
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the supplied user manual, relevant professional standards and applicable local regulations. Clients should seek medical advice when treatment suitability is uncertain.
Why Professionals Choose Wikbeauty
Specialized Beauty-Equipment Supply
Wikbeauty provides professional aesthetic and body-contouring equipment to international buyers.
Configurable Equipment
Select the machine format, voltage, plug and number of treatment pads according to your operating requirements.
International Electrical Options
The system can be prepared for different markets with 110 V or 220 V operation and the appropriate regional plug.
Operating Assistance
Support is available for installation, initial setup, routine operation and basic troubleshooting.
Direct Purchasing
Buy directly from the equipment supplier and receive assistance when confirming the most appropriate configuration.
Frequently Asked Questions
Is this a professional or home-use machine?
This is professional beauty equipment. It should be operated by a trained individual who understands consultation procedures, contraindications, treatment parameters and equipment safety.
What is the standard pad configuration?
The standard system includes six large pads and two small pads. Compatible configurations can be expanded to a maximum of 14 pads.
What is the difference between the large and small pads?
Large pads provide broader coverage for areas such as the abdomen, back and thighs. Small pads enable more targeted placement on the arms and other localized areas.
Should I choose the vertical or portable version?
The vertical model is suitable for a dedicated professional treatment room. The portable model is better suited to smaller spaces or operators who require easier storage and transportation.
How long does a session take?
A session may last approximately 15–60 minutes. Duration varies according to the treatment area, pad configuration, operating parameters and professional protocol.
Is there a recovery period?
The treatment is non-invasive and does not involve surgical incisions. Clients can generally resume normal daily activities after a session, subject to individual circumstances and professional guidance.
Are results guaranteed?
No aesthetic treatment can guarantee identical results for every person. Outcomes may vary depending on the client’s body composition, lifestyle, treatment schedule and the protocol used.
Can I order additional treatment pads?
Additional pads may be purchased for compatible configurations. Confirm the maximum number of supported pads before ordering.
Which voltage should I select?
Select the voltage that matches the electrical standard in your country. If uncertain, contact Wikbeauty before completing your purchase.
Configure Your 5D Lipo Laser System
Select the machine format, voltage, plug and treatment-pad configuration that best suits your professional requirements.
For assistance choosing between the vertical and portable models, contact Wikbeauty before placing your order.
Three-Year Warranty
Your Wikbeauty 5D Lipo Laser Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing additional confidence in your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the warranty terms, coverage includes manufacturing defects and eligible failures involving:
-
Main machine components
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen and control system
-
Treatment-pad connections
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the original machine
Technical Support
If a covered technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty’s support team will help you:
-
Identify the issue through remote technical assessment
-
Complete basic troubleshooting
-
Determine whether a replacement part or repair is required
-
Receive guidance for installing eligible replacement components
Warranty Conditions
The warranty applies to defects arising under normal and proper use. It does not cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse or incorrect operation
-
Unauthorized modification or repair
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of consumable parts and accessories
-
Damage caused during unauthorized transportation
-
Failure to follow the supplied operating instructions
The original order information and machine serial number may be required when requesting warranty service. Full coverage is subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty terms.
Three years of warranty coverage. Professional technical assistance. Long-term confidence in your purchase.
Select Your Configuration and Add to Cart
Explore the complete range of professional lipo laser machines.
Receives in 8 days.
$1,599.00
Professional 7D HIFU Facial and Body Treatment System
Multi-Depth Focused Ultrasound for Skin Tightening, Facial Lifting, and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine is a professional non-invasive aesthetic system developed for facial lifting, wrinkle care, skin tightening, collagen stimulation, and body-contouring treatments.
High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound technology delivers concentrated ultrasound energy at selected tissue depths. Its multi-depth cartridge system supports customized treatments for superficial facial areas, deeper facial structures, and suitable body areas.
With multiple treatment depths from 1.5mm to 16mm, seven treatment cartridges, adjustable energy settings, intelligent touchscreen controls, and a compact portable design, the system is suitable for beauty salons, aesthetic clinics, and professional skincare facilities.
7D HIFU technology | 1.5–16mm treatment depths | Seven cartridges | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
Multi-Depth Focused Ultrasound
The system delivers focused ultrasound energy at selected depths without requiring incisions or injectable products. Different cartridges allow professionals to target superficial, middle, and deeper tissue levels.
Common applications include:
-
Facial skin tightening
-
Fine-line and wrinkle care
-
Jawline contouring
-
Neck and décolletage treatments
-
Body skin-firming programs
-
Professional body-contouring treatments
Facial Lifting and Collagen Stimulation
Facial cartridges are designed to deliver focused ultrasound energy at depths suitable for different layers of facial tissue.
Common applications include:
-
Reduced facial firmness
-
Fine lines and wrinkles
-
Lower-face laxity
-
Jawline definition
-
Double-chin-area treatments
-
Neck skin tightening
Body Contouring and Skin Firming
Deeper cartridge configurations support professional treatments for suitable body areas.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Upper-arm treatments
-
Thigh contouring
-
Buttock-area programs
-
Body skin tightening
-
Cellulite-appearance improvement
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Facial-Rejuvenation Program
Uses suitable facial cartridges and customized energy settings for general facial lifting and skin-rejuvenation treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Fine lines and wrinkles
-
Reduced facial firmness
-
Uneven-looking skin texture
-
Early signs of aging
-
General collagen-stimulation programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking non-invasive facial rejuvenation
-
Clients concerned about visible signs of aging
-
Clients wanting progressive skin-quality improvement
Facial-Lifting and Jawline Program
Uses suitable middle and deeper facial treatment depths to support lower-face tightening and contour definition.
Recommended applications:
-
Lower-face laxity
-
Reduced jawline definition
-
Jowl-area treatments
-
Double-chin concerns
-
Neck skin tightening
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking a firmer-looking lower face
-
Clients concerned about facial contours
-
Clients interested in non-surgical lifting programs
Body-Contouring Program
Uses deeper body cartridges for suitable body areas requiring contouring and skin-firming treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Upper-arm treatments
-
Thigh contouring
-
Buttock-area programs
-
Body skin tightening
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about localized body areas
-
Clients seeking non-invasive body treatments
-
Clients combining treatment with healthy lifestyle habits
Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment following completion of the client’s initial HIFU program.
Recommended applications:
-
Facial-lifting maintenance
-
Skin-firming maintenance
-
Body-contour maintenance
-
Continued collagen-stimulation programs
Recommended for:
-
Returning HIFU clients
-
Clients completing an initial treatment plan
-
Clients seeking periodic professional maintenance
Adjustable Treatment Depths and Energy Settings
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine provides multiple treatment depths for different facial and body applications.
| Treatment Depth | General Treatment Level | Possible Applications |
|---|---|---|
| 1.5mm | Superficial facial tissue | Fine lines, texture, and delicate facial areas |
| 3.0mm | Dermal facial layer | Collagen stimulation and skin tightening |
| 4.5mm | Deeper facial layer | Facial lifting, jawline, and lower-face treatments |
| 6.0mm | Shallow body treatment | Small body areas and skin-firming programs |
| 8.0mm | Medium body treatment | Arms and selected body areas |
| 10.0mm | Deeper body treatment | Abdomen, thighs, and body contouring |
| 13.0mm | Deep body treatment | Larger body areas |
| 16.0mm | Maximum listed body depth | Professional deep body-contouring protocols |
The supplied product information describes a seven-cartridge package while listing treatment depths from 1.5mm to 16mm. The exact included cartridge configuration should be confirmed when placing the order.
Energy settings should be selected according to the cartridge, treatment area, tissue condition, client comfort, and professional protocol.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Face, Chin, and Jawline
Facial cartridges support customized treatments across suitable areas of the face.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Facial lifting
-
Fine-line care
-
Wrinkle reduction
-
Jawline definition
-
Double-chin-area treatment
Neck and Décolletage
Suitable cartridge depths and controlled energy settings can support professional tightening and rejuvenation programs.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Neck skin tightening
-
Reduced appearance of neck lines
-
Improved-looking firmness
-
Décolletage rejuvenation
-
Collagen-stimulation support
Arms, Abdomen, Thighs, and Buttocks
Deeper cartridge configurations support selected body-contouring and skin-firming treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Abdomen treatments
-
Thigh contouring
-
Buttock-area programs
-
Body skin firming
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Depth Category |
|---|---|---|
| Face | Lifting, tightening, and wrinkle care | 1.5mm, 3.0mm, or 4.5mm |
| Chin and Jawline | Contour definition and lower-face tightening | Suitable facial depth |
| Neck | Skin tightening and line care | Suitable facial depth |
| Décolletage | Texture and firmness improvement | Professionally selected depth |
| Upper Arms | Skin firming and contouring | Suitable body depth |
| Abdomen | Body contouring and tightening | Suitable deeper body depth |
| Thighs | Contouring and cellulite-appearance care | Suitable body depth |
| Buttocks | Skin-firming and contouring support | Suitable body depth |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, skin condition, previous aesthetic procedures, target areas, treatment objectives, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment process and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Cartridge Selection
Select the appropriate facial or body cartridge according to the treatment area, target depth, tissue condition, and professional protocol.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Clean the treatment area and apply suitable ultrasound gel. Configure the energy level and treatment parameters according to the selected cartridge and client tolerance.
Step 4: HIFU Treatment
Position the handpiece correctly and deliver focused ultrasound energy according to the mapped treatment plan. Monitor client comfort and tissue response throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the ultrasound gel, inspect and clean the treated area, record the cartridge and settings used, and provide appropriate post-treatment skincare guidance.
Designed for Professional Beauty Environments
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine combines multi-depth facial and body treatment capability with a compact professional design.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional 7D HIFU technology
-
Treatment depths from 1.5mm to 16mm
-
Seven-cartridge package configuration
-
Facial and body treatment capability
-
Adjustable energy settings
-
Intelligent touchscreen controls
-
Approximately 30–60-minute sessions
-
Facial lifting and wrinkle-care programs
-
Jawline and chin contouring
-
Neck and décolletage treatments
-
Body-contouring and skin-firming programs
-
Compact and portable construction
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine |
| Technology | High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound |
| Treatment Package | Seven multi-depth cartridges |
| Listed Treatment Depths | 1.5mm, 3.0mm, 4.5mm, 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm |
| Facial Depths | 1.5mm, 3.0mm, and 4.5mm |
| Body Depths | 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm |
| Primary Functions | Skin tightening, facial lifting, wrinkle care, and body contouring |
| Treatment Areas | Face, neck, chin, jawline, arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30–60 minutes |
| Treatment Frequency | Personalized according to client assessment |
| Energy Settings | Adjustable |
| Display | Intelligent touchscreen |
| Design | Compact and portable |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU main unit
-
1 × Professional HIFU treatment handpiece
-
Seven treatment cartridges according to the selected package
-
Facial treatment cartridge configurations
-
Body treatment cartridge configurations
-
Intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Adjustable energy controls
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
The exact seven-cartridge combination should be confirmed before ordering because the supplied information lists eight available treatment depths.
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Professional video training
-
Cartridge-selection guidance
-
Energy-adjustment guidance
-
Facial treatment protocols
-
Jawline and neck protocols
-
Body-contouring protocols
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Facial and body assessment
-
Treatment-area mapping
-
Cartridge selection
-
Energy-level adjustment
-
Handpiece positioning
-
Facial-lifting protocols
-
Jawline and neck protocols
-
Body-contouring protocols
-
Post-treatment care
-
Equipment cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Cartridges and other components subject to normal use or shot limitations are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable cartridges, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation, health-history review, and skin assessment should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or breastfeeding
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within the treatment area
-
Active skin infection
-
Herpes, open wounds, or sores
-
Active eczema, psoriasis, or dermatitis in the area
-
Severe or recent sunburn
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Recent injectable or aggressive skin treatments
-
Serious cardiovascular or medical conditions
-
Reduced or impaired skin sensation
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients who have recently received fillers, botulinum toxin, chemical peels, or other professional aesthetic procedures should be assessed before treatment. An appropriate waiting period should be determined by a qualified practitioner.
HIFU should not be applied over the eyes, thyroid gland, major nerves, bones, reproductive organs, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, handpiece, cartridges, cables, and accessories before use.
-
Confirm the cartridge and depth before beginning treatment.
-
Map the treatment area carefully.
-
Apply sufficient ultrasound gel.
-
Begin with conservative energy settings.
-
Monitor client comfort and tissue response.
-
Do not deliver energy over prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Do not repeatedly treat the same point outside the protocol.
-
Record the cartridge, depth, energy, and treatment area.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin reaction occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Beauty salons
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Skin-rejuvenation studios
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Professional spas
-
Anti-aging treatment centers
-
Professional skincare facilities
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HIFU treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine?
Multi-Depth HIFU Technology
Treatment depths spanning 1.5mm to 16mm support superficial facial treatments, deeper facial lifting, and selected body applications.
Facial and Body Versatility
One system supports treatments for the face, neck, chin, jawline, arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks.
Adjustable Professional Settings
Interchangeable cartridges and adjustable energy controls allow professionals to customize treatments according to the area and client.
Compact Portable Design
The portable construction and intelligent touchscreen make the machine suitable for different treatment rooms and professional beauty environments.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, cartridge guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine?
It is a professional High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound system developed for facial lifting, skin tightening, wrinkle care, collagen stimulation, and selected body-contouring treatments.
What does 7D HIFU mean?
The product uses a multi-depth HIFU cartridge system designed to treat different facial and body tissue levels. The supplied package is described as containing seven treatment cartridges.
Which treatment depths are available?
The supplied information lists depths of 1.5mm, 3.0mm, 4.5mm, 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm.
How many cartridges are included?
The package is described as including seven cartridges. Because eight treatment depths are listed in the supplied information, the exact included combination should be confirmed before ordering.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, neck, chin, jawline, upper arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks.
How long does one session take?
A standard professional treatment takes approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the treatment area, cartridge, and protocol.
How many treatments are recommended?
The supplied information suggests one to three sessions per year. The final treatment schedule should be personalized according to the client’s condition, objectives, and professional assessment.
When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice an initial tightening effect following treatment. Progressive changes may continue as the skin’s natural collagen response develops. Individual outcomes and timing vary.
How long can results last?
The supplied information indicates a possible duration of 12–18 months. Actual longevity varies according to age, skin condition, treatment settings, lifestyle, and individual response.
Is there downtime?
Many clients can continue normal daily activities after a suitable treatment. Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, or sensitivity may occur.
What does HIFU treatment feel like?
Clients may experience warmth, tingling, pressure, or brief sensitivity as ultrasound energy is delivered. Energy should be adjusted according to professional protocol and client tolerance.
Can this machine be used for body treatments?
Yes. The deeper cartridge configurations support selected treatments for the arms, abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and other suitable body areas.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to age, tissue condition, treatment area, cartridge selection, energy settings, lifestyle, and individual response.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, treatment mapping, cartridge selection, energy adjustment, facial and body protocols, aftercare, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Professional 7D HIFU Treatments to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine enables beauty salons, aesthetic clinics, and skincare professionals to provide customizable facial-lifting, skin-tightening, wrinkle-care, and body-contouring services using one professional platform.
Five key benefits:
-
Multi-depth focused ultrasound treatments from 1.5mm to 16mm
-
Professional facial and body treatment capability
-
Seven-cartridge package with adjustable energy settings
-
Compact portable design with intelligent touchscreen controls
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, exact cartridge configuration, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
From $2,499.00
Professional Muscle Sculpting and Body-Contouring System
Dual-Action Technology for Muscle Stimulation and Targeted Fat Reduction
The Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1 Muscle Sculpting Machine is a professional body-contouring system designed to combine intensive muscle stimulation with targeted fat-reduction treatments.
Advanced electrical muscle stimulation produces powerful involuntary muscle contractions, helping practitioners deliver muscle-conditioning and body-definition programs. Its integrated RF/energy technology simultaneously targets areas of localized fat, supporting a more toned and sculpted appearance.
With four specialized treatment applicators, adjustable frequency settings, intelligent touchscreen controls, and pre-programmed protocols, the EMSZero provides customizable treatments for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, arms, and calves.
2-in-1 muscle and fat treatment | Four applicators | 6000W power | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Technologies on One Platform
Electrical Muscle Stimulation
Advanced EMS technology delivers controlled electrical energy to the targeted muscles, producing repeated involuntary contractions during the treatment.
These contractions activate and engage the underlying muscles without requiring the client to perform conventional exercise during the session.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock toning and shaping
-
Thigh muscle stimulation
-
Arm definition programs
-
Calf muscle conditioning
-
General body-sculpting treatments
Targeted RF/Energy Treatment
The integrated RF/energy function is designed to complement muscle stimulation by targeting areas where clients want to improve the appearance of localized fat and body contours.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Waistline shaping
-
Thigh contouring
-
Buttock definition
-
Upper-arm shaping
-
Targeted body-toning programs
Simultaneous Muscle and Body-Contouring Treatment
EMSZero combines muscle stimulation and targeted fat-reduction energy in a single professional session. This enables practitioners to address both muscle tone and overall body shape using one system.
The combined approach can be incorporated into personalized programs designed to support:
-
Improved muscle definition
-
A firmer-looking body contour
-
Targeted body shaping
-
Enhanced treatment efficiency
-
Customized multi-area programs
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Muscle-Conditioning Program
Designed to focus primarily on repeated muscle contractions and targeted muscle engagement.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock toning
-
Arm muscle stimulation
-
Thigh and calf conditioning
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved muscle definition
-
Busy clients interested in assisted muscle stimulation
-
Clients combining professional treatments with fitness programs
Body-Contouring Program
Focuses on the appearance of localized fat and overall body shape in selected treatment areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Waistline shaping
-
Thigh contouring
-
Upper-arm shaping
Recommended for:
-
Clients with localized body-contouring concerns
-
Clients seeking a firmer-looking silhouette
-
Clients following a balanced wellness program
Combined Muscle and Fat Program
Uses the machine’s dual-action functions to address muscle conditioning and body contouring during the same treatment program.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal sculpting
-
Buttock shaping
-
Thigh definition
-
Arm contouring
-
Full-body sculpting packages
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking a comprehensive body-sculpting program
-
Clients wanting to address muscle tone and body shape together
-
Professional clinics offering premium combined treatments
Maintenance Program
Designed to help clients maintain their body-contouring and muscle-conditioning programs after completing an initial treatment course.
Recommended applications:
-
Muscle-conditioning maintenance
-
Body-contour maintenance
-
Seasonal body-shaping programs
-
Continued wellness support
Recommended for:
-
Returning body-contouring clients
-
Clients who have completed six to eight sessions
-
Clients combining treatment with exercise and healthy lifestyle habits
Customizable Frequency and Treatment Settings
The EMSZero system allows practitioners to personalize treatments according to the selected body area, client comfort, and treatment objective.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Machine Power | 6000W | Professional system performance |
| Frequency Range | 1–100Hz | Customizable muscle-stimulation programs |
| Treatment Applicators | Four | Multi-area body treatments |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30 minutes | Efficient clinic scheduling |
| Recommended Course | Six to eight sessions | Structured body-sculpting program |
| Treatment Frequency | One to two sessions weekly | Progressive treatment planning |
| Control System | Intelligent touchscreen | Protocol and intensity management |
All settings should be selected according to professional consultation, client suitability, and individual tolerance.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen and Waist
The applicators can be positioned over the abdominal area to support muscle conditioning, waistline definition, and a firmer-looking midsection.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle stimulation
-
Waistline shaping
-
Core-area conditioning
-
Improved abdominal definition
Buttocks and Thighs
Treatments can be customized for the buttocks, inner thighs, outer thighs, and front or back of the legs.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock toning
-
Thigh muscle conditioning
-
Lower-body contouring
-
Improved leg definition
Arms and Calves
The specialized applicators can also be used for smaller muscle groups and targeted body areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Biceps and triceps stimulation
-
Calf muscle conditioning
-
Targeted limb definition
Professional Body-Contouring Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Suitable Program |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Muscle conditioning and midsection definition | Muscle or combined program |
| Waist | Improve the appearance of body contours | Body-contouring program |
| Buttocks | Toning, shaping, and muscle stimulation | Muscle or combined program |
| Thighs | Lower-body conditioning and contouring | Combined program |
| Upper Arms | Muscle stimulation and arm shaping | Muscle or combined program |
| Calves | Targeted muscle conditioning | Muscle-conditioning program |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, treatment goals, target areas, and potential contraindications. Explain the treatment experience and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Applicator Placement
Select the appropriate applicators and position them securely over the chosen treatment area. Placement should be adjusted according to the client’s anatomy and treatment objective.
Step 3: Personalized Settings
Select the treatment protocol, frequency, intensity, and session duration. Begin at a comfortable intensity and increase progressively according to client tolerance.
Step 4: Active Treatment
The system delivers controlled muscle stimulation and the selected body-contouring energy for approximately 30 minutes. The client experiences strong, repeated muscle contractions during the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
The system completes the selected program automatically. The applicators are removed, and the practitioner provides any appropriate aftercare or treatment-plan recommendations.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The EMSZero 2-in-1 system combines versatile body-contouring functions with straightforward professional operation.
Key advantages include:
-
Two treatment functions on one platform
-
Four specialized treatment applicators
-
Adjustable 1–100Hz frequency range
-
6000W machine power
-
Intelligent touchscreen controls
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
Automatic intensity control
-
Temperature monitoring
-
Automatic shut-off
-
Universal 110V–240V power compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and technical support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1 Muscle Sculpting Machine |
| Technology | Electrical Muscle Stimulation and RF/energy body contouring |
| Machine Power | 6000W |
| Frequency Range | 1–100Hz adjustable |
| Treatment Applicators | Four specialized applicators |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Six to eight sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | One to two sessions per week |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, waist, buttocks, thighs, arms, and calves |
| Control System | Intelligent touchscreen |
| Treatment Programs | Pre-programmed and customizable protocols |
| Safety Features | Automatic intensity control, temperature monitoring, and automatic shut-off |
| Power Supply | 110V–240V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1 Body Sculpting Machine
-
4 × Specialized treatment applicators
-
1 × Intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Integrated EMS muscle-stimulation function
-
Integrated RF/energy body-contouring function
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
Adjustable 1–150Hz frequency controls
-
1 × Universal 110V–240V power cable
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Operating and safety guide
-
Professional video training
-
Muscle-conditioning protocol guidance
-
Body-contouring protocol guidance
-
Combined-treatment protocol guidance
-
Client consultation materials
-
Treatment-plan templates
-
Service-menu and package guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every EMSZero 2-in-1 Muscle Sculpting Machine includes professional operating guidance to help your team use the equipment confidently and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen and program operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Correct applicator placement
-
Frequency and intensity adjustment
-
Muscle-conditioning protocols
-
Combined body-contouring protocols
-
Treatment safety and contraindications
-
Routine cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1 Muscle Sculpting Machine includes a three-year professional warranty for dependable after-sales protection.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are provided for eligible warranty issues.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history assessment should be completed before every treatment. The machine must be operated according to the supplied manual and applicable local requirements.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants in or near the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Epilepsy or seizure disorders
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Recent surgery in the treatment area
-
Serious muscle or neurological disorders
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients with medical concerns should consult an appropriate healthcare professional before beginning treatment.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1 system is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Medical spas
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Beauty salons
-
Wellness centers
-
Fitness and recovery studios
-
Aesthetic practices
-
Professional treatment facilities
Operators should review local licensing, insurance, and treatment requirements before offering services.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1?
Two Functions on One Platform
The system combines muscle stimulation and targeted body-contouring energy, allowing practitioners to create more comprehensive treatment programs with one machine.
Four Specialized Applicators
Four applicators support flexible placement across different body areas and allow clinics to design personalized treatments.
Customizable Professional Settings
The adjustable 1–100Hz frequency range, intensity controls, and pre-programmed protocols support individualized muscle-conditioning and body-contouring sessions.
Multiple Treatment Areas
One system can be used for the abdomen, waist, buttocks, thighs, upper arms, and calves, expanding the range of services available to clients.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes training, operating documentation, protocol guidance, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the EMSZero 2-in-1 Muscle Sculpting Machine?
It is a professional body-contouring system that combines electrical muscle stimulation with targeted RF/energy technology to support muscle conditioning and body-shaping programs.
How long does one treatment take?
A standard treatment session takes approximately 30 minutes, depending on the target area and selected protocol.
How many applicators are included?
The machine includes four specialized treatment applicators for different body areas and treatment objectives.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, waist, buttocks, inner and outer thighs, upper arms, and calves.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends a course of six to eight sessions, generally scheduled once or twice per week. The final plan should be personalized following professional consultation.
What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. The intensity can be adjusted progressively according to individual tolerance and comfort.
Is the treatment invasive?
No. The system does not require surgery, injections, incisions, or anesthesia.
Can muscle stimulation and body contouring be performed together?
Yes. The dual-action system is designed to combine muscle stimulation and targeted body-contouring energy within one treatment program.
Does the machine have adjustable intensity?
Yes. Practitioners can adjust the treatment intensity and frequency according to the selected body area, protocol, and client comfort.
Can it be offered as a standalone service?
Yes. Clinics can offer EMSZero as a standalone body-sculpting treatment or combine it with compatible wellness and aesthetic services.
Are results the same for every client?
No. Outcomes vary according to body composition, treatment consistency, lifestyle, selected settings, and individual response. Practitioners should provide realistic expectations during consultation.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Operating guidance, treatment protocol instruction, safety training, and ongoing technical support are included.
Add Professional Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1 Muscle Sculpting Machine enables clinics, spas, and wellness centers to provide customizable muscle-conditioning and body-contouring services using one professional platform.
Five key benefits:
-
Dual-action muscle stimulation and body contouring
-
Four specialized treatment applicators
-
Multiple treatment areas and customizable protocols
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
Answer a few quick questions and we'll recommend the right Lipo Laser setup for you.
$1,129.00
Professional 5D 80K RF Cavitation and Vacuum System
Multi-Function Technology for Body Contouring, Skin Tightening, and Facial Rejuvenation
The Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine is a professional beauty system developed for body contouring, skin tightening, facial rejuvenation, vacuum massage, and cellulite-appearance treatments.
The system combines 80K ultrasonic cavitation, 5D multipolar radiofrequency, and adjustable vacuum therapy. Its three specialized treatment handles support customized treatments for the face, neck, waist, abdomen, back, arms, and thighs.
With an intelligent touchscreen, pre-programmed protocols, air-and-water circulation cooling, universal 110V–240V compatibility, and three different handle sizes, the system is suitable for beauty salons, spas, body-contouring clinics, and professional wellness facilities.
80K cavitation | 5D radiofrequency | Vacuum therapy | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Technologies on One Platform
80K Ultrasonic Cavitation
The 80K cavitation function operates at 80,000Hz and delivers ultrasonic energy to suitable body areas as part of a professional contouring program.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Waistline treatments
-
Thigh contouring
-
Upper-arm treatments
-
Buttock-area programs
-
Localized body-shaping treatments
5D Multipolar Radiofrequency
Multipolar RF energy provides controlled thermal stimulation within the selected treatment area. The three handle sizes support facial and body applications.
Common applications include:
-
Facial skin tightening
-
Fine-line and wrinkle care
-
Neck rejuvenation
-
Body skin-firming programs
-
Collagen-remodeling support
-
Post-cavitation tightening treatments
Adjustable Vacuum Therapy
The vacuum function provides controlled suction and massage through the selected RF handle.
Common applications include:
-
Vacuum massage
-
Tissue mobilization
-
Cellulite-appearance programs
-
Body-contouring support
-
Lymphatic-style beauty treatments
-
Muscle-comfort massage
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Body-Contouring Program
Combines suitable cavitation, RF, and vacuum settings for targeted body areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Waistline shaping
-
Thigh treatments
-
Upper-arm programs
-
Buttock-area contouring
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about localized body areas
-
Clients seeking non-invasive body contouring
-
Clients combining treatments with healthy lifestyle habits
Skin-Tightening Program
Uses multipolar RF energy and suitable vacuum settings to support controlled thermal treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Loose-looking body skin
-
Reduced facial firmness
-
Upper-arm skin tightening
-
Abdomen and waist firming
-
General collagen-remodeling programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking firmer-looking skin
-
Clients combining cavitation and RF
-
Clients receiving professional age-management treatments
Facial-Rejuvenation Program
Uses the small vacuum and RF handle for controlled treatments across suitable facial and neck areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Facial skin tightening
-
Fine-line care
-
Wrinkle-appearance treatments
-
Neck rejuvenation
-
General facial firming
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about early signs of aging
-
Clients seeking non-invasive facial care
-
Clients requiring a smaller treatment applicator
Vacuum-Massage Program
Uses adjustable suction and controlled massage movements on suitable body areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Body massage
-
Tissue mobilization
-
Cellulite-appearance programs
-
Lymphatic-style beauty treatments
-
Combined body-contouring services
Recommended for:
-
Clients receiving multi-stage body treatments
-
Clients seeking massage-based body care
-
Clients combining vacuum with RF or cavitation
Adjustable Cavitation, RF, and Vacuum Settings
The Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine allows practitioners to personalize treatments according to the selected area, client comfort, and professional protocol.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Cavitation Frequency | 80,000Hz | Ultrasonic body-contouring treatments |
| RF Technology | 5D multipolar RF | Controlled facial and body heating |
| Vacuum Pressure | Adjustable | Personalized suction and massage |
| Treatment Handles | Three sizes | Face, waist, and larger body areas |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–40 minutes per area | Flexible treatment planning |
| Control System | Intelligent touchscreen | Protocol and setting management |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation | Supports continuous operation |
| Power Supply | 110V–240V | International compatibility |
Settings should be adjusted progressively according to client comfort, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Face and Neck
The small vacuum and RF handle supports controlled treatments for smaller and more delicate areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Facial skin tightening
-
Fine-line care
-
Neck rejuvenation
-
Improved-looking firmness
-
Facial massage
Waist and Ribs
The medium vacuum and RF handle supports contouring and massage across medium-sized body areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Waistline contouring
-
Side-body treatments
-
Vacuum massage
-
Skin-firming support
-
General body shaping
Abdomen, Back, Arms, and Thighs
The large vacuum and RF handle supports treatments across larger body areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Back treatments
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Thigh programs
-
Cellulite-appearance care
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Handle or Technology |
|---|---|---|
| Face | Skin tightening and wrinkle-appearance care | Small vacuum and RF handle |
| Neck | Rejuvenation and skin-firming support | Small vacuum and RF handle |
| Waist and Ribs | Contouring and vacuum massage | Medium vacuum and RF handle |
| Abdomen | Body contouring and skin tightening | Cavitation and large RF/vacuum handle |
| Back | Body treatment and massage | Large vacuum and RF handle |
| Upper Arms | Contouring and skin firming | Cavitation and large RF/vacuum handle |
| Thighs | Contouring and cellulite-appearance care | Cavitation, RF, and vacuum |
| Buttocks | Contouring and skin-firming support | Large vacuum and RF handle |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, treatment objectives, target areas, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment process and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Technology and Handle Selection
Choose the appropriate cavitation, RF, vacuum, or combined treatment sequence. Select the small, medium, or large handle according to the treatment area.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Clean the selected area and apply the appropriate conductive treatment medium. Configure the machine according to the selected technology, treatment area, and client comfort.
Step 4: Active Treatment
Move the treatment handle continuously according to the supplied protocol. Monitor the skin response, temperature, suction level, and client comfort throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the treatment medium, inspect and clean the treated area, document the selected settings, and provide appropriate hydration, skincare, or lifestyle recommendations.
Designed for Professional Beauty Environments
The Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine combines three complementary treatment technologies with specialized facial and body handles.
Key advantages include:
-
80K ultrasonic cavitation
-
5D multipolar radiofrequency
-
Adjustable vacuum therapy
-
Three specialized treatment handles
-
Small handle for the face and neck
-
Medium handle for the waist and ribs
-
Large handle for the abdomen, back, arms, and thighs
-
Facial and body treatment capability
-
Intelligent touchscreen controls
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling
-
Approximately 20–40-minute treatments per area
-
Universal 110V–240V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine |
| Technology | 80K ultrasonic cavitation, 5D multipolar RF, and vacuum therapy |
| Cavitation Frequency | 80,000Hz |
| RF Technology | 5D multipolar radiofrequency |
| Vacuum Pressure | Adjustable |
| Treatment Handles | Three |
| Small Handle | Vacuum and RF for the face and neck |
| Medium Handle | Vacuum and RF for the waist and ribs |
| Large Handle | Vacuum and RF for the abdomen, back, arms, and thighs |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–40 minutes per area |
| Display | Intelligent touchscreen |
| Treatment Programs | Pre-programmed and adjustable |
| Treatment Areas | Face, neck, ribs, waist, abdomen, back, arms, thighs, and buttocks |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation |
| Power Supply | 110V–240V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation main unit
-
1 × Small vacuum and RF handle
-
1 × Medium vacuum and RF handle
-
1 × Large vacuum and RF handle
-
Integrated 80K cavitation function
-
Integrated 5D RF function
-
Integrated adjustable vacuum function
-
Intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
Conductive gel starter supply
-
1 × Universal 110V–240V power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Professional video training
-
80K cavitation guidance
-
RF handle-selection guidance
-
Vacuum-pressure guidance
-
Facial treatment protocols
-
Body-contouring protocols
-
Combined treatment protocols
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use all three technologies safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
80K cavitation operation
-
Treatment-handle selection
-
RF setting adjustment
-
Vacuum-pressure adjustment
-
Facial treatment protocols
-
Waist and body protocols
-
Combined treatment sequences
-
Client monitoring
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Cooling-system maintenance
-
Equipment cleaning
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Conductive gel, handle seals, tubing, filters, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Active cancer or tumors
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Serious liver or kidney conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Reduced or impaired skin sensation
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Cavitation should not be applied over the heart, head, neck, breasts, bones, joints, reproductive organs, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Facial treatments should only use the suitable small facial handle and professionally selected settings. The cavitation function should not be used on the face.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, handles, cables, tubing, and accessories before use.
-
Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation.
-
Select the correct handle for the treatment area.
-
Begin with conservative RF and vacuum settings.
-
Keep active cavitation and RF handles moving during treatment.
-
Use the correct conductive medium.
-
Monitor skin response, temperature, suction, and client comfort.
-
Avoid prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Do not leave an active handle stationary on the skin.
-
Record the treatment area and selected settings.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin reaction occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Beauty salons
-
Medical spas
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Wellness centers
-
Skin-rejuvenation studios
-
Professional spas
-
Aesthetic treatment facilities
-
Home-based beauty businesses
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine?
Three Complementary Technologies
The system combines 80K ultrasonic cavitation, 5D multipolar radiofrequency, and adjustable vacuum therapy.
Three Specialized Treatment Handles
Small, medium, and large handles support customized treatments for facial, waist, and body areas.
Facial and Body Versatility
One system supports facial rejuvenation, skin tightening, body contouring, vacuum massage, and cellulite-appearance programs.
Professional Cooling and Controls
The intelligent touchscreen and air-and-water circulation cooling support efficient professional operation.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine?
It is a professional beauty system combining 80K ultrasonic cavitation, 5D multipolar radiofrequency, and adjustable vacuum therapy.
What does 80K cavitation mean?
The cavitation function operates at an ultrasonic frequency of 80,000Hz and is intended for professional body-contouring programs.
Is 80K automatically better than 30K or 40K?
Different cavitation frequencies have different operating characteristics and treatment protocols. A higher frequency should not automatically be presented as deeper or more effective. Selection should follow the product design and professional training.
How many treatment handles are included?
The machine includes three handles: small for the face and neck, medium for the waist and ribs, and large for broader body areas.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, neck, waist, ribs, abdomen, back, upper arms, thighs, and buttocks.
How long does one treatment take?
A typical treatment takes approximately 20–40 minutes per area, depending on the selected technology and protocol.
Can cavitation, RF, and vacuum be combined?
Yes. Suitable clients may receive these functions as part of a structured treatment sequence. The order and settings should follow professional training.
Can the machine be used for facial treatments?
Yes. The small vacuum and RF handle supports suitable facial and neck treatments. The cavitation function should not be used on the face.
What does treatment feel like?
RF creates controlled warmth, vacuum produces suction and massage, and cavitation may produce an audible sensation. Settings should remain within a comfortable, professionally monitored range.
Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities following a suitable treatment. Temporary warmth, redness, sensitivity, or vacuum marks may occur.
Are results guaranteed?
Outcomes vary according to the treatment area, body composition, skin condition, number of sessions, selected settings, lifestyle, and individual response.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers 80K cavitation, RF, vacuum therapy, handle selection, treatment protocols, client screening, cooling-system maintenance, cleaning, and troubleshooting.
Add Professional 5D 80K Body and Facial Treatments to Your Business
The Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine enables salons, spas, and beauty clinics to provide customizable body-contouring, facial-rejuvenation, skin-tightening, and vacuum-massage treatments.
Five key benefits:
-
80K ultrasonic cavitation for professional body programs
-
5D multipolar RF with adjustable vacuum therapy
-
Three specialized handles for the face, waist, and body
-
Intelligent touchscreen controls with air-and-water cooling
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$499.00
Professional Vacuum BBL Body-Shaping System
Non-Surgical Buttock Lifting, Breast Firming, and Cellulite Care
The Wikbeauty Vacuum Butt and Breast Enlargement Device is a professional, non-invasive body-shaping system designed to lift, firm, and enhance the natural appearance of the buttocks and breasts without surgery or implants.
Using adjustable negative-pressure vacuum therapy and suction massage, the system supports blood circulation, lymphatic drainage, tissue stimulation, and natural contour enhancement. Multiple vacuum cups allow professionals to adapt treatments to different body shapes and treatment areas.
Designed for slimming salons, spas, physiotherapy centers, wellness facilities, and aesthetic clinics, this professional BBL machine supports buttock lifting, breast firming, cellulite reduction, hip shaping, and thigh contouring through comfortable 20–40-minute sessions.
Vacuum Therapy | Multiple Cup Sizes | Buttock and Breast Treatments | CE and ISO Certificates | Three-Year Warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
Vacuum Buttock Lifting
Professional vacuum cups create controlled suction around the buttocks to stimulate the tissue and support a fuller, firmer, and more lifted appearance.
Common applications include:
-
Non-surgical buttock lifting
-
Buttock contour enhancement
-
Improved shape and symmetry
-
Natural-looking volume support
-
Hip and buttock curve definition
Breast Firming and Shaping
Different cup sizes allow professionals to adapt vacuum treatments to the client’s breast shape and treatment objectives. Controlled suction supports circulation and tissue stimulation for a firmer and more defined appearance.
Common applications include:
-
Breast-firming treatments
-
Natural shape enhancement
-
Improved contour and symmetry
-
Tissue-stimulation programs
-
Maintenance treatments
Cellulite and Body-Contouring Therapy
Vacuum massage supports blood flow and lymphatic circulation in areas affected by uneven texture or cellulite. It can also be incorporated into professional thigh, hip, and buttock-contouring programs.
Common applications include:
-
Cellulite-appearance reduction
-
Thigh and hip contouring
-
Skin-texture improvement
-
Lymphatic massage support
-
Smoother-looking body contours
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Buttock Lifting Program
A focused treatment program designed to improve the shape, firmness, symmetry, and lifted appearance of the buttocks.
Recommended applications: Buttocks, lower buttock line, outer hips, and surrounding contour areas.
Recommended for: Clients seeking a non-surgical BBL-style treatment with natural-looking contour improvement.
Breast Firming Program
A controlled vacuum treatment designed to support breast firmness, shape, tissue stimulation, and overall contour.
Recommended applications: Breast area using appropriately sized vacuum cups and carefully selected suction settings.
Recommended for: Suitable clients seeking non-surgical breast-firming and shaping treatments.
Cellulite-Smoothing Program
A suction-massage program focused on improving circulation and reducing the visible appearance of uneven skin texture.
Recommended applications: Buttocks, hips, inner thighs, outer thighs, and other compatible areas affected by cellulite.
Recommended for: Clients seeking smoother-looking skin and improved lower-body contours.
Maintenance and Body-Shaping Program
A flexible follow-up program designed to support previously achieved lifting, firming, and contouring results.
Recommended applications: Buttocks, breasts, hips, and thighs previously treated with vacuum therapy.
Recommended for: Clients who have completed an initial treatment course and want periodic maintenance sessions.
Adjustable Vacuum and Treatment Settings
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Vacuum Intensity | Adjustable negative pressure | Allows suction strength to be adapted to the treatment area and client comfort |
| Treatment Mode | Vacuum therapy and suction massage | Supports lifting, shaping, cellulite care, and circulation-focused treatments |
| Cup Size | Multiple cup sizes | Accommodates different body shapes and treatment objectives |
| Treatment Area | Buttocks, breasts, thighs, and hips | Enables customized body-shaping protocols |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–40 minutes | Supports targeted and comprehensive treatment programs |
| Treatment Course | Approximately 6–10 sessions recommended | Provides a structured course for progressive contouring results |
| Control System | Digital touchscreen or knob controls | Enables convenient adjustment of treatment settings |
| Power Compatibility | 110V/220V | Supports professional use in different international markets |
Vacuum intensity must be selected gradually according to the client’s comfort, skin condition, treatment area, and professional protocol. Excessive suction can cause discomfort or temporary bruising and should be avoided.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Buttock and Hip Areas
Different vacuum cups can be positioned across the buttocks and surrounding hip areas to support a more lifted and balanced silhouette.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock lifting
-
Natural contour enhancement
-
Improved firmness
-
Shape and symmetry support
-
Hip and buttock curve definition
-
Cellulite-appearance reduction
Breast Area
Appropriately sized cups can be used for carefully controlled breast-firming and shaping programs.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Breast-firming support
-
Natural shape enhancement
-
Improved contour
-
Tissue stimulation
-
Symmetry support
-
Maintenance of treatment results
Thigh and Lower-Body Areas
Vacuum massage can be applied to compatible thigh and lower-body areas where cellulite, uneven texture, or reduced definition is present.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Inner- and outer-thigh contouring
-
Cellulite-appearance improvement
-
Smoother-looking skin
-
Circulation and lymphatic support
-
Improved lower-body proportions
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Application | Primary Area | Professional Objective |
|---|---|---|
| Non-Surgical BBL Treatment | Buttocks | Support a fuller, firmer, and more lifted appearance |
| Buttock Contouring | Buttocks and lower buttock line | Improve shape and overall definition |
| Hip Shaping | Hips and outer buttocks | Create smoother and more balanced curves |
| Breast Firming | Breast area | Support firmness and natural contour |
| Breast Shaping | Breast area | Improve the appearance of shape and symmetry |
| Cellulite Care | Buttocks, hips, and thighs | Reduce the visible appearance of uneven texture |
| Thigh Contouring | Inner and outer thighs | Support smoother and more defined contours |
| Vacuum Massage | Compatible body areas | Support circulation and tissue stimulation |
| Lymphatic Support | Buttocks, thighs, and hips | Promote professional drainage-focused treatments |
| Maintenance Treatments | Previously treated areas | Help maintain lifting and shaping results |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s goals, medical history, skin condition, previous procedures, and potential contraindications.
Step 2: Body Assessment
Assess the intended treatment area and select the appropriate vacuum cups, suction level, session duration, and treatment protocol.
Step 3: Cup Placement
Position the selected cups securely over the buttocks or breasts, or prepare the appropriate applicator for cellulite and body-contouring massage.
Step 4: Treatment Configuration
Begin with a low vacuum level and increase the intensity gradually according to client comfort and tissue response. A typical session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes.
Step 5: Aftercare Guidance
Remove the cups carefully, inspect the treated skin, and provide appropriate hydration, lifestyle, massage, and maintenance recommendations.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Vacuum BBL Machine combines adjustable vacuum pressure, multiple cup sizes, and straightforward controls in one professional body-shaping platform.
Key advantages include:
-
Non-surgical body-shaping technology
-
Adjustable negative-pressure suction
-
Multiple cups for different body areas
-
Buttock, breast, thigh, and hip applications
-
Approximately 20–40-minute sessions
-
Customized 6–10-session treatment courses
-
Digital touchscreen or knob operation
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
Professional training and after-sales support
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Vacuum Butt and Breast Enlargement Device |
| Alternative Name | Professional Vacuum BBL Machine |
| Technology | Vacuum therapy and suction massage |
| Primary Functions | Buttock lifting, breast firming and shaping, cellulite reduction, and body contouring |
| Applicators | Multiple vacuum cups in different sizes |
| Treatment Areas | Buttocks, breasts, thighs, and hips |
| Vacuum Level | Adjustable according to treatment area and client comfort |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–40 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Approximately 6–10 sessions |
| Display and Controls | Digital touchscreen or knob controls |
| Power Supply | 110V/220V dual compatibility |
| Certificates | CE and ISO |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| After-Sales Service | Professional training and technical support |
Treatment experiences, session requirements, and visible outcomes may vary according to the client’s anatomy, tissue condition, lifestyle, treatment frequency, selected vacuum settings, and adherence to aftercare recommendations. Results should not be presented as guaranteed or equivalent to surgical enhancement.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty Vacuum Butt and Breast Enlargement Device
-
Multiple vacuum cups in different sizes
-
Compatible vacuum tubing and connectors
-
1 × Compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
1 × Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Setup and operating guide
-
Vacuum-cup placement instructions
-
Treatment-protocol guidance
-
Safety and contraindication information
-
Cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Professional training support
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional operating guidance to help machine owners and treatment providers use the vacuum BBL system correctly and confidently.
Training and support cover:
-
Machine installation and initial setup
-
Vacuum-cup selection
-
Correct cup positioning
-
Vacuum-intensity adjustment
-
Buttock-lifting protocols
-
Breast-firming protocols
-
Cellulite and body-contouring treatments
-
Client consultation and contraindication screening
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Troubleshooting assistance
-
Treatment-course planning
Ongoing after-sales support is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Vacuum Butt and Breast Enlargement Device includes a three-year professional warranty and after-sales technical support.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty provides support for eligible machine components and manufacturing-related faults arising under normal operating conditions. Technical assessment may be required before repair assistance or replacement parts are provided.
Warranty support includes:
-
Remote technical diagnosis
-
Operating and troubleshooting guidance
-
Support for eligible replacement parts
-
Repair instructions
-
Maintenance recommendations
-
After-sales communication during the warranty period
Technical Support Process
-
Contact Wikbeauty with the machine model and order information.
-
Provide a clear description of the technical issue.
-
Submit photos or a short video when requested.
-
Allow the technical team to diagnose the machine.
-
Follow the supplied troubleshooting or repair instructions.
-
Receive eligible replacement-part support when required.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by:
-
Incorrect machine operation
-
Excessive or unsuitable vacuum settings
-
Unauthorized modification or repair
-
Accidental impact or physical damage
-
Improper electrical installation or voltage
-
Water damage or unsuitable storage conditions
-
Failure to follow cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Normal wear of tubing, cups, seals, and other consumable components
-
Shipping or relocation damage occurring after delivery
Safety and Contraindications
A complete client consultation and contraindication assessment should be performed before treatment. The machine must be used only by trained operators following the supplied instructions and applicable local requirements.
Treatment may be unsuitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or breastfeeding
-
Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Blood-clotting or bleeding disorders
-
Current anticoagulant medication
-
Severe varicose veins in the treatment area
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds, rashes, or damaged skin
-
Recent surgery in the intended treatment area
-
Breast implants or other implants without professional clearance
-
Undiagnosed breast lumps or breast-health concerns
-
History of thrombosis
-
Uncontrolled diabetes
-
Reduced skin sensation
-
Severe skin fragility
-
Any medical condition requiring professional clearance
Clients with breast-related concerns, implants, previous surgery, or unexplained symptoms should consult a qualified healthcare professional before treatment.
Operating Precautions
-
Complete a consultation before the client’s first treatment.
-
Inspect the machine, tubing, connectors, and cups before use.
-
Clean and disinfect all reusable applicators properly.
-
Select the correct cup size for the treatment area.
-
Begin treatment at a low vacuum level.
-
Increase suction gradually according to client comfort.
-
Never use excessive suction to accelerate results.
-
Monitor the skin continuously during treatment.
-
Stop treatment if unusual pain, severe redness, dizziness, or discomfort occurs.
-
Do not apply vacuum over open wounds or inflamed skin.
-
Avoid prolonged stationary suction unless specified by the protocol.
-
Do not exceed the recommended session duration.
-
Release the vacuum before removing treatment cups.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Keep accurate treatment records when required.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Vacuum BBL Machine is suitable for:
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Beauty salons
-
Slimming centers
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Wellness centers
-
Day spas and medical spas
-
Physiotherapy centers where locally permitted
-
Professional massage and body-shaping providers
Users should complete appropriate training, follow the supplied operating instructions, and comply with local rules governing aesthetic and vacuum-therapy equipment.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Vacuum BBL Machine?
1. Multi-Application Vacuum Therapy
One professional platform supports buttock lifting, breast firming, cellulite care, thigh contouring, and hip shaping.
2. Multiple Vacuum Cup Sizes
Different cup sizes help professionals accommodate varying body shapes and create more customized treatment programs.
3. Adjustable Treatment Intensity
The vacuum level can be adapted according to the treatment area, tissue condition, and client comfort.
4. Non-Surgical Body Shaping
The system offers a non-invasive alternative for suitable clients seeking natural-looking contour enhancement without implants or surgical downtime.
5. Certified Quality and Professional Support
The machine is supplied with CE and ISO certificates, professional operating guidance, after-sales technical support, and a three-year warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How does the Wikbeauty Vacuum BBL Machine work?
The system uses vacuum cups and controlled negative pressure to stimulate the treatment area, support circulation, mobilize tissue, and improve the appearance of firmness and shape.
Q: What treatments can the machine provide?
The machine supports buttock lifting, breast firming and shaping, cellulite care, hip contouring, thigh treatments, and vacuum massage.
Q: Is this a surgical BBL procedure?
No. This is a non-surgical vacuum body-shaping treatment. It does not involve fat transfer, anesthesia, incisions, or implants.
Q: Can vacuum therapy produce the same results as surgery?
No. Vacuum therapy may support temporary, natural-looking lifting and contour improvement, but it should not be presented as producing the same degree or permanence of change as surgery.
Q: Is the treatment painful?
Clients generally experience a pulling or suction-massage sensation. Comfort varies, and the vacuum intensity must be adjusted according to the client’s tolerance.
Q: How long does one session take?
A typical treatment lasts approximately 20–40 minutes, depending on the selected area and protocol.
Q: How many sessions are recommended?
A professional treatment course generally includes approximately 6–10 sessions. The final recommendation should be based on the client’s condition and goals.
Q: When can clients expect visible changes?
Some clients may notice a temporary lifting or plumping effect after a session. More developed contouring results generally require a structured treatment course, and individual outcomes vary.
Q: Which areas can be treated?
The primary treatment areas are the buttocks, breasts, thighs, and hips.
Q: Can the machine help improve the appearance of cellulite?
Yes. Vacuum massage can support circulation and improve the appearance of uneven skin texture on the buttocks, hips, and thighs.
Q: Can different cup sizes be used?
Yes. The machine includes multiple vacuum cups designed to accommodate different body areas, shapes, and treatment requirements.
Q: Is there downtime after treatment?
Most suitable clients do not require a formal recovery period. Temporary redness, tenderness, or mild bruising may occur depending on suction intensity and individual sensitivity.
Q: How long do the results last?
Result duration varies. Maintenance sessions, regular exercise, balanced nutrition, hydration, and stable body weight may help support the appearance of the treated areas.
Q: Is the treatment suitable for clients with breast implants?
Clients with breast implants or previous breast surgery should obtain clearance from a qualified healthcare professional before treatment.
Q: Can two areas be treated during the same appointment?
Compatible areas may be incorporated into the same appointment when supported by the machine configuration and professional protocol.
Q: Is vacuum therapy suitable for every client?
No. Each client must complete a consultation and contraindication screening before treatment.
Q: Does the machine support 110V and 220V power?
Yes. The supplied specifications include 110V and 220V dual-voltage compatibility.
Q: What certificates are included?
The machine is supplied with CE and ISO certificates.
Q: Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine setup, cup selection, applicator placement, treatment settings, safety, contraindications, cleaning, and basic maintenance.
Q: What warranty is provided?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with after-sales technical support.
Q: What is included in the package?
The package includes the main machine, multiple vacuum cups, compatible tubing and connectors, a power cable, operating documentation, training guidance, standard accessories, and a warranty card.
Add Professional Vacuum BBL Treatments to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Vacuum Butt and Breast Enlargement Device gives salons, spas, wellness facilities, and aesthetic clinics a versatile platform for non-surgical buttock lifting, breast firming, cellulite care, and lower-body contouring.
Five key benefits:
-
Professional vacuum therapy and suction massage
-
Multiple cup sizes for customized treatments
-
Adjustable intensity for different body areas
-
Buttock, breast, hip, and thigh applications
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, ordering information, training details, and professional support.
Receives in 8 days.
$2,599.00
Professional Four-Handle HIEMT PRO Body-Sculpting System
Dual-Client Electromagnetic Technology for Muscle Conditioning and Multi-Area Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO is a professional body-sculpting system developed for simultaneous muscle conditioning, body contouring, and improved definition across multiple treatment areas.
Advanced High-Intensity Electromagnetic Technology produces approximately 30,000 supramaximal muscle contractions during a 20–30-minute session. Its four-handle configuration supports multi-area treatment for one client or simultaneous treatment for two suitable clients.
With adjustable energy settings, a 12-inch intelligent touchscreen, dual-client operation, and combined air-and-water cooling, the PRO system is designed for premium clinics, medical spas, body-sculpting studios, fitness centers, resort spas, and high-volume wellness facilities.
Advanced HIEMT | Four ergonomic handles | Dual-client operation | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
HIEMT technology delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing powerful involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Thigh muscle conditioning
-
Upper-arm toning
-
Waistline definition
-
Professional fitness treatments
Multi-Area Body Contouring
Four applicators can be positioned across suitable muscle groups according to the client’s anatomy, treatment objectives, and selected protocol.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen and thigh treatments
-
Arms and abdomen treatments
-
Buttocks and thighs
-
Waistline and abdomen
-
Bilateral muscle stimulation
-
Customized four-area programs
Dual-Client Operation
The four-handle configuration can be arranged to treat one client across multiple areas or two suitable clients simultaneously.
Common benefits include:
-
Single-client multi-area treatments
-
Simultaneous dual-client sessions
-
Flexible applicator allocation
-
Improved treatment-room efficiency
-
Customized treatment programs
-
High-volume clinic operation
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Abdominal-Conditioning Program
Uses suitable applicator placement to stimulate the abdominal muscles and support improved midsection definition.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Core-area stimulation
-
Midsection definition
-
Waistline sculpting
-
General abdominal programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved abdominal tone
-
Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation
-
Clients following healthy lifestyle programs
Buttock and Thigh Program
Positions multiple applicators over suitable buttock and thigh muscle areas for bilateral lower-body treatment.
Recommended applications:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatments
-
Shape-enhancement programs
-
Lower-body definition
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved buttock or thigh tone
-
Clients combining treatment with exercise
-
Clients receiving comprehensive lower-body programs
Multi-Area Body Program
Uses all four applicators for one client across multiple suitable treatment areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen and thighs
-
Abdomen and arms
-
Buttocks and thighs
-
Waistline and abdomen
-
Customized four-area treatment
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking comprehensive body conditioning
-
Clients with multiple treatment objectives
-
Premium body-sculpting clients
Dual-Client Program
Divides the four applicators between two appropriately screened clients.
Recommended applications:
-
Two-client abdomen programs
-
Simultaneous lower-body treatments
-
Independent client protocols
-
High-volume treatment scheduling
-
Professional dual-client services
Recommended for:
-
Clinics with appropriate staffing
-
High-volume body-sculpting facilities
-
Premium spas and wellness centers
Each client must receive an individual consultation, screening, treatment plan, applicator placement, and continuous professional monitoring.
Adjustable Energy and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO allows practitioners to customize treatments according to the selected body areas, client tolerance, and professional protocol.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Technology | Advanced HIEMT | Focused electromagnetic muscle stimulation |
| Treatment Handles | Four | Multi-area or dual-client treatments |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 30,000 | Intensive muscle activation |
| Treatment Capacity | One or two suitable clients | Flexible professional operation |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes | Efficient treatment scheduling |
| Treatment Course | Four to six sessions | Structured body-sculpting program |
| Treatment Frequency | Commonly twice weekly | Progressive muscle conditioning |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable | Personalized client comfort |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation | Supports continuous operation |
Settings should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen and Waistline
Multiple handles can be positioned over suitable abdominal and waist muscle groups for focused or combined midsection treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle activation
-
Core-area conditioning
-
Waistline definition
-
Improved abdominal tone
-
Multi-zone midsection treatment
Buttocks and Thighs
The applicators support balanced lower-body treatments across suitable buttock and thigh muscle groups.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatments
-
Improved-looking definition
-
Lower-body sculpting
Arms and Multiple Body Areas
Four handles allow professionals to create customized upper- and lower-body treatment combinations.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Arm definition
-
Simultaneous arm and abdomen treatment
-
Simultaneous thigh and buttock treatment
-
Customized multi-area programs
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Configuration |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Muscle conditioning and midsection definition | Two or more handles |
| Waistline | Contouring and core-area stimulation | Targeted or combined placement |
| Buttocks | Toning and shape-enhancement support | Bilateral handle placement |
| Inner Thighs | Lower-body conditioning | Bilateral treatment |
| Outer Thighs | Thigh definition and muscle stimulation | Bilateral treatment |
| Upper Arms | Arm muscle stimulation and definition | Bilateral treatment |
| Multiple Areas | Comprehensive body-sculpting program | Up to four handles |
| Dual Clients | Simultaneous independent treatment programs | Handles divided between two clients |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review each client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Applicator Placement
Select the treatment areas and position the applicators securely over suitable muscle groups. During dual-client operation, each client must receive individually assessed applicator placement.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate treatment program and begin with conservative energy levels. Adjust the settings according to the body area, client comfort, and muscle response.
Step 4: HIEMT Treatment
The system delivers focused electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor every client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO combines multi-area and dual-client performance with professional controls and continuous-operation cooling.
Key advantages include:
-
Advanced HIEMT technology
-
Four ergonomic treatment handles
-
Approximately 30,000 contractions per session
-
Single-client multi-area capability
-
Simultaneous dual-client capability
-
Focused and bilateral treatment configurations
-
Treatments for the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline
-
Adjustable energy intensity
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling
-
Approximately 20–30-minute sessions
-
Four- to six-session treatment programs
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO |
| Designation | PRO professional configuration |
| Technology | High-Intensity Electromagnetic Technology |
| Treatment Handles | Four ergonomic applicators |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 30,000 |
| Treatment Capacity | One client across multiple areas or two suitable clients |
| Supplied Performance Figures | Up to 15–20% muscle growth and 20–25% fat reduction |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline |
| Treatment Configuration | Focused, simultaneous, bilateral, or dual-client |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Four to six sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | Commonly twice weekly |
| Results Timeline | Supplied estimate: visible changes in 2–4 weeks and progressive changes over 6–12 weeks |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation |
| Display | 12-inch intelligent touchscreen |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
Performance figures and timelines are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO main unit
-
4 × Ergonomic HIEMT treatment applicators
-
Applicator connection cables
-
Applicator-positioning accessories
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Adjustable energy controls
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling system
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Professional video training
-
Applicator-placement guidance
-
Energy-adjustment guidance
-
Single-client multi-area protocols
-
Dual-client treatment guidance
-
Abdominal treatment protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Treatment-area assessment
-
Correct applicator placement
-
Single-client multi-area operation
-
Dual-client treatment setup
-
Energy-level adjustment
-
Abdominal and waistline protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Multi-client monitoring
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Cooling-system maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review must be completed for every client before treatment. The system should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within or near the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Cardiac rhythm disorders
-
Epilepsy or seizure disorders
-
Active muscle injury
-
Severe inflammation
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Serious neurological or muscular conditions
-
Reduced or impaired sensation
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment.
Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use.
-
Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation.
-
Complete separate screening for every client.
-
Remove metal objects from each treatment area.
-
Confirm correct applicator placement before activation.
-
Secure all handles according to the supplied instructions.
-
Begin with conservative energy levels.
-
Increase intensity progressively according to client comfort.
-
Continuously monitor every client during dual-client operation.
-
Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Record treatment areas, duration, and energy settings.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Premium body-sculpting clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Luxury wellness facilities
-
Resort spas
-
Aesthetic salons
-
Fitness centers
-
Slimming centers
-
High-volume treatment facilities
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, staffing, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HIEMT or dual-client treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO?
Advanced HIEMT Technology
The system provides approximately 30,000 electromagnetic muscle contractions during a professional treatment session.
Four Ergonomic Applicators
Four handles support focused, bilateral, multi-area, and suitable dual-client treatment programs.
Flexible Dual-Client Operation
The applicators can be divided between two appropriately screened clients, providing additional scheduling flexibility for high-volume facilities.
Professional Cooling and Controls
The 12-inch touchscreen and combined air-and-water cooling system support efficient professional operation.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes machine training, dual-client guidance, applicator-placement protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO?
It is a professional HIEMT body-sculpting system developed for electromagnetic muscle stimulation, multi-area body conditioning, and suitable dual-client operation.
What does the PRO designation mean?
PRO identifies this product as the supplied advanced four-handle configuration with approximately 30,000 contractions, a 12-inch touchscreen, dual-client capability, and air-and-water cooling.
How many applicators are included?
The package includes four ergonomic HIEMT treatment handles.
Can all four handles be used on one client?
Yes. All four handles can be positioned across suitable treatment areas according to the client’s individual treatment plan.
Can two clients be treated simultaneously?
Yes. The four handles can be divided between two suitable clients. Each client requires individual screening, settings, applicator placement, documentation, and continuous monitoring.
Which areas can be treated?
Common treatment areas include the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline.
How long does one session take?
A standard session takes approximately 20–30 minutes.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends four to six sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments.
What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy levels can be increased progressively according to individual comfort and muscle response.
Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced after exercise may occur.
Can HIEMT replace regular exercise?
HIEMT treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits.
When may clients notice changes?
The supplied information indicates that visible changes may begin within two to four weeks and continue developing over six to twelve weeks. Individual results vary.
What performance figures are supplied?
The supplied product information lists potential muscle-growth figures of 15–20% and fat-reduction figures of 20–25%. These figures are not guaranteed outcomes.
How long can results last?
The supplied information indicates a possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, treatment consistency, energy settings, diet, exercise, and individual response.
What cooling system does the machine use?
The system uses combined air-and-water circulation cooling to support continuous professional operation.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, multi-handle placement, dual-client protocols, energy adjustment, safety, cooling-system maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Advanced Dual-Client HIEMT Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO enables premium clinics, resort spas, wellness centers, and body-sculpting professionals to provide multi-area or simultaneous dual-client muscle-conditioning treatments.
Five key benefits:
-
Advanced HIEMT with approximately 30,000 contractions per session
-
Four ergonomic handles for multi-area treatment
-
Flexible single-client or dual-client operation
-
A 12-inch touchscreen with air-and-water cooling
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$3,999.00
Professional Cryolipolysis Fat-Freezing System
Controlled Cooling Technology for Non-Invasive Fat Reduction and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine is a professional body-contouring system developed for controlled fat-freezing treatments across multiple body areas.
Cryolipolysis uses precisely controlled cooling to target suitable subcutaneous fat tissue. The treated fat cells undergo a gradual biological response and are processed by the body over the weeks following treatment.
With adjustable temperatures from 5°C to −15°C, multiple applicator sizes, intelligent touchscreen controls, real-time temperature monitoring, and universal 110V–240V compatibility, the machine is suitable for slimming clinics, beauty salons, medical spas, and wellness centers.
Controlled cryolipolysis | 5°C to −15°C cooling | Multiple applicators | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
Controlled Cryolipolysis Cooling
The machine delivers controlled cooling to suitable areas of subcutaneous fat while the skin is protected by an antifreeze membrane.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen treatments
-
Waist and flank contouring
-
Upper-arm treatments
-
Inner- and outer-thigh programs
-
Back-fat treatments
-
Suitable submental-area treatments
Vacuum Applicator Technology
The treatment applicator uses suction to draw suitable tissue into the cooling chamber and maintain consistent contact during treatment.
Common benefits include:
-
Secure tissue positioning
-
Targeted cooling delivery
-
Different applicator sizes
-
Customized anatomical coverage
-
Stable treatment contact
-
Professional treatment consistency
Intelligent Temperature and Safety Control
The machine combines adjustable cooling with real-time monitoring and automatic protection features.
Common features include:
-
Adjustable cooling temperature
-
Real-time temperature monitoring
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
Automatic shut-off
-
Antifreeze membrane protection
-
Intelligent touchscreen controls
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Abdomen and Waist Program
Uses an appropriately sized applicator for suitable abdominal, waist, or flank tissue.
Recommended applications:
-
Upper-abdomen treatments
-
Lower-abdomen treatments
-
Waistline contouring
-
Flank and love-handle areas
-
General midsection programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients with suitable pinchable subcutaneous fat
-
Clients seeking non-invasive midsection contouring
-
Clients with stable and realistic treatment goals
Arms and Back Program
Uses a small or medium applicator for suitable upper-arm, underarm, back, or bra-line tissue.
Recommended applications:
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Underarm-area treatments
-
Upper-back treatments
-
Lower-back contouring
-
Bra-line programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about localized upper-body areas
-
Clients suitable for controlled cooling
-
Clients seeking targeted body contouring
Thigh and Buttock Program
Uses an appropriate applicator for suitable inner-thigh, outer-thigh, or lower-buttock areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Inner-thigh contouring
-
Outer-thigh treatments
-
Upper-leg body contouring
-
Lower-buttock fold treatments
-
Bilateral lower-body programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients with suitable thigh-area tissue
-
Clients seeking lower-body contouring
-
Clients receiving bilateral treatment plans
Submental and Maintenance Program
Uses a suitable small applicator for professionally assessed submental areas or provides additional treatments following reassessment.
Recommended applications:
-
Double-chin-area contouring
-
Small localized areas
-
Follow-up treatment after assessment
-
Multi-area treatment planning
-
Long-term body-contouring support
Recommended for:
-
Clients with suitable submental tissue
-
Clients completing an initial treatment
-
Clients requiring professionally assessed follow-up care
Adjustable Cooling and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine allows practitioners to personalize treatments according to the applicator, body area, tissue condition, and client tolerance.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Technology | Controlled cryolipolysis | Non-invasive fat-freezing treatment |
| Cooling Range | 5°C to −15°C | Adjustable treatment temperature |
| Applicators | Multiple sizes | Different body and submental areas |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30–60 minutes per area | Customized treatment planning |
| Treatment Course | Commonly one to three sessions per area | Progressive body-contouring program |
| Treatment Interval | Approximately four to six weeks | Allows professional reassessment |
| Temperature Monitoring | Real-time | Treatment safety and consistency |
| Control System | Intelligent touchscreen | Protocol and parameter management |
Temperature, suction, and treatment duration should be selected according to the applicator, tissue thickness, skin condition, client response, and supplied protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen, Waist, and Flanks
Different applicator sizes support controlled cooling across suitable midsection areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-abdomen contouring
-
Lower-abdomen contouring
-
Waistline definition
-
Love-handle treatments
-
General midsection shaping
Arms, Back, and Buttocks
Suitable applicators can be selected for localized upper-body and posterior body areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Bra-line treatments
-
Upper- and lower-back areas
-
Lower-buttock fold treatments
-
Localized body shaping
Thighs, Legs, and Double Chin
Small, medium, or specialized applicators support professionally assessed lower-body and submental treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Inner-thigh contouring
-
Outer-thigh treatments
-
Upper-leg shaping
-
Double-chin-area contouring
-
Bilateral body treatments
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Applicator |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Localized midsection contouring | Medium or large applicator |
| Waist and Flanks | Waistline and love-handle treatment | Suitable curved applicator |
| Upper Arms | Localized arm contouring | Small or medium applicator |
| Back and Bra Line | Targeted back-area treatment | Suitable medium applicator |
| Inner Thighs | Lower-body contouring | Small or medium applicator |
| Outer Thighs | Thigh-area body contouring | Suitable applicator |
| Buttock Fold | Localized contouring | Small or curved applicator |
| Double Chin | Submental-area treatment | Specialized small applicator |
Applicator availability and final configuration depend on the selected machine package.
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, body-contouring objectives, target areas, previous procedures, skin condition, and possible contraindications. Confirm that the selected area contains suitable tissue for cryolipolysis.
Step 2: Area and Applicator Selection
Mark the treatment area and select the applicator that best matches the tissue size, shape, and anatomical location.
Step 3: Skin Protection and Placement
Apply an approved antifreeze membrane correctly over the complete treatment area. Position the applicator and adjust the suction according to the supplied protocol.
Step 4: Controlled Cooling Treatment
Begin the selected cooling program for approximately 30–60 minutes. Monitor the temperature, applicator seal, skin condition, and client comfort throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the applicator and protective membrane, inspect the skin, and perform the recommended post-treatment massage when appropriate. Document the settings and provide aftercare guidance.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine combines adjustable cooling, multiple applicator options, and intelligent safety controls.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional cryolipolysis technology
-
Adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C
-
Multiple applicator sizes
-
Treatments for several body areas
-
Intelligent digital touchscreen
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
Real-time temperature monitoring
-
Antifreeze membrane protection
-
Automatic shut-off
-
Approximately 30–60-minute sessions
-
Universal 110V–240V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine |
| Technology | Controlled cryolipolysis fat freezing |
| Cooling Range | 5°C to −15°C adjustable |
| Treatment Applicators | Multiple sizes, package-dependent |
| Primary Function | Non-invasive fat reduction and body contouring |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, waist, flanks, arms, thighs, back, buttocks, and double chin |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30–60 minutes per area |
| Recommended Course | Commonly one to three sessions per area |
| Treatment Interval | Approximately four to six weeks |
| Results Timeline | Progressive changes over approximately four to sixteen weeks |
| Display | Intelligent digital touchscreen |
| Treatment Programs | Pre-programmed and adjustable |
| Temperature Monitoring | Real-time |
| Safety Features | Antifreeze membranes and automatic shut-off |
| Power Supply | 110V–240V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
The supplied product information lists potential fat-reduction figures of 20–40% per treated area. These figures should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes because individual results vary.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis main unit
-
Multiple cooling applicators according to the selected package
-
Applicator connection hoses
-
Applicator-positioning accessories
-
Intelligent digital touchscreen
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
Antifreeze membranes and gel starter supply
-
1 × Universal 110V–240V power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
The exact number, size, and shape of included applicators should follow the selected machine configuration.
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Professional video training
-
Applicator-selection guidance
-
Cooling-temperature guidance
-
Suction-adjustment guidance
-
Body-area treatment protocols
-
Submental-treatment guidance
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Aftercare instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Tissue and treatment-area assessment
-
Applicator selection
-
Correct antifreeze membrane placement
-
Suction adjustment
-
Cooling-temperature selection
-
Treatment-duration selection
-
Body and submental protocols
-
Client monitoring
-
Post-treatment massage
-
Aftercare guidance
-
Equipment cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Antifreeze membranes, gels, applicator seals, hoses, filters, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, cold injury caused by incorrect membrane placement or operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A detailed consultation and health-history review must be completed before every treatment. Cryolipolysis should only be performed by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or breastfeeding
-
Cryoglobulinemia
-
Cold agglutinin disease
-
Paroxysmal cold hemoglobinuria
-
Severe cold sensitivity or cold urticaria
-
Raynaud’s disease or serious circulation disorders
-
Active hernia within or near the treatment area
-
Active infection or open wounds
-
Severe skin conditions within the treatment area
-
Reduced or impaired sensation
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Serious liver or kidney conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
The system is intended for suitable subcutaneous fat and should not be presented as a treatment for obesity or as a replacement for weight management.
Cryolipolysis carries risks, including cold injury, prolonged numbness, contour irregularity, pain, and rare paradoxical adipose hyperplasia. Clients must receive appropriate risk information and provide informed consent.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, applicators, hoses, seals, and accessories before use.
-
Confirm client suitability before every treatment.
-
Select the correct applicator for the treatment area.
-
Use a new, approved antifreeze membrane for every application.
-
Ensure the membrane covers the complete cooling area.
-
Begin with professionally selected cooling and suction settings.
-
Monitor temperature, applicator contact, skin condition, and client comfort.
-
Do not treat prohibited or unsuitable anatomical areas.
-
Never reuse a single-use antifreeze membrane.
-
Record applicator, temperature, suction, duration, and treatment area.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin changes occur.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Slimming clinics
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Medical spas
-
Beauty salons
-
Wellness centers
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Professional spas
-
Weight-management facilities
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before providing cryolipolysis treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine?
Adjustable Controlled Cooling
The system provides adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C for professionally selected body-contouring protocols.
Multiple Applicator Options
Different applicator sizes support customized treatments for the abdomen, waist, arms, thighs, back, buttocks, and suitable submental areas.
Intelligent Safety Controls
Real-time temperature monitoring, antifreeze membranes, pre-programmed protocols, and automatic shut-off support professional operation.
Multiple Treatment Areas
One system can support customized body-contouring programs across several suitable anatomical areas.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, applicator guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine?
It is a professional controlled-cooling system developed for non-invasive fat-reduction and body-contouring treatments.
How does cryolipolysis work?
Controlled cooling targets suitable subcutaneous fat tissue. The treated fat cells undergo a gradual biological response and are processed by the body over the following weeks.
What cooling temperatures are available?
The machine provides adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, waist, flanks, upper arms, thighs, back, buttock fold, and suitable double-chin areas.
How long does one treatment take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 30–60 minutes per area, depending on the applicator and selected protocol.
How many sessions are recommended?
One to three sessions per area, commonly spaced four to six weeks apart. The final plan should follow professional reassessment.
When may clients notice changes?
Early changes may appear within two to four weeks, with progressive changes developing over approximately eight to sixteen weeks.
Is the treatment painful?
Clients commonly experience strong cooling, suction, pulling, and temporary numbness. Some clients may experience discomfort during or after treatment.
Is there downtime?
Many clients can resume normal activities following treatment. Temporary redness, swelling, bruising, tenderness, tingling, or numbness may occur.
Are treated fat cells permanently removed?
Fat cells processed after treatment do not regenerate in the same way. However, remaining fat cells can enlarge with weight gain, and individual contour changes are not guaranteed to be permanent.
Is cryolipolysis a weight-loss treatment?
No. Cryolipolysis is intended for localized body contouring and is not a treatment for obesity or a replacement for balanced nutrition and exercise.
What results are supplied for this machine?
The supplied product information lists potential fat-reduction figures of 20–40% per treated area. These figures are not guaranteed and vary by client and protocol.
What is an antifreeze membrane?
It is a protective barrier applied between the skin and cooling applicator. Correct placement and full coverage are essential to reduce the risk of cold injury.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to tissue thickness, applicator fit, treatment settings, number of sessions, body composition, lifestyle, and individual response.
What certificates are included?
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, applicator selection, membrane placement, cooling and suction settings, treatment protocols, aftercare, cleaning, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Professional Cryolipolysis to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine enables slimming clinics, medical spas, and body-contouring professionals to provide controlled fat-freezing treatments across multiple suitable body areas.
Five key benefits:
-
Adjustable controlled cooling from 5°C to −15°C
-
Multiple applicators for different treatment areas
-
Intelligent touchscreen with real-time temperature monitoring
-
Antifreeze membrane protection and automatic shut-off
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, applicator configuration, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
Buy 2+ machines and save up to 15% — get a personalized quote within 24 hours.
$999.00
Professional Vibration Massage and Recovery System
Four Treatment Heads for Muscle Relaxation and Professional Wellness Programs
The Wikbeauty G8 Vibration Massage Machine is a professional percussion and oscillation therapy system developed for spas, wellness centers, gyms, recovery studios and physiotherapy clinics.
Its adjustable 5Hz–100Hz frequency range and customizable intensity settings allow trained operators to create different protocols for muscle relaxation, post-workout recovery, circulation support and general wellness.
Four treatment-head options allow the operator to select the size and treatment pattern that best match the target area and professional service.
Four treatment heads | 5Hz–100Hz adjustable frequency | Full-body applications | Three-year warranty
Four Treatment Heads on One Professional Platform
Small Treatment Head
The small treatment head is designed for precise applications and smaller muscle areas.
Its concentrated treatment pattern allows the operator to work accurately on localized areas requiring controlled vibration.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Forearms
-
Hands
-
Feet
-
Calves
-
Small shoulder areas
-
Localized muscle groups
Medium Treatment Head
The medium treatment head is designed for general massage and recovery treatments.
It provides balanced coverage for common muscle groups and medium-sized treatment areas.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Arms
-
Shoulders
-
Neck muscles
-
Lower legs
-
Upper back
-
General muscle groups
Large Treatment Head
The large treatment head provides broader coverage for larger muscle areas.
It is suitable for professional treatments requiring efficient vibration across wide treatment zones.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Back
-
Thighs
-
Gluteal muscles
-
Hamstrings
-
Quadriceps
-
Larger body areas
Flexible Treatment Head
The flexible treatment head is designed to adapt to body contours and areas requiring a more adaptable treatment surface.
Common treatment applications include:
-
Curved body areas
-
General relaxation
-
Broad muscle groups
-
Body-contour massage
-
Wellness treatments
-
Customized full-body protocols
The appropriate treatment head should be selected according to the target area, muscle condition, client comfort and professional protocol.
Select the Right Treatment Head for Each Service
The system supports four treatment heads. The appropriate option should be selected according to the size of the treatment area, required intensity and intended wellness application.
Option 1: Small Treatment Head
A precision-focused attachment for localized muscle groups and smaller treatment areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Localized muscle tension
-
Hands and feet
-
Calves and forearms
-
Precision recovery treatments
Recommended for:
-
Targeted wellness protocols
-
Smaller muscle areas
-
Detailed massage services
-
Localized vibration treatments
Option 2: Medium Treatment Head
A versatile attachment for general massage, relaxation and recovery programs.
Recommended applications:
-
Arms and shoulders
-
Upper-back treatments
-
Lower-leg treatments
-
General muscle relaxation
Recommended for:
-
Spa massage services
-
Wellness programs
-
General recovery treatments
-
Regular maintenance sessions
Option 3: Large Treatment Head
A broad-coverage attachment for larger muscle groups and body areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Back treatments
-
Thigh and leg treatments
-
Gluteal muscles
-
Athletic recovery programs
Recommended for:
-
Gyms and recovery centers
-
Sports-wellness businesses
-
Full-body massage services
-
High-volume professional treatments
Option 4: Flexible Treatment Head
An adaptable attachment for curved body areas and customized wellness protocols.
Recommended applications:
-
Contoured body areas
-
Broad relaxation treatments
-
Flexible full-body protocols
-
General massage services
Recommended for:
-
Professional spas
-
Wellness centers
-
Customized treatment programs
-
Businesses offering varied massage services
Adjustable Frequency for Customized Vibration Treatments
The G8 Vibration Massage Machine provides an adjustable frequency range from 5Hz to 100Hz. Each frequency and intensity setting should be selected according to the treatment area, client comfort and professional objective.
| Frequency Setting | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Lower Frequency | Gentle relaxation and comfort-focused treatments |
| Moderate Frequency | General muscle massage and wellness programs |
| Higher Frequency | Muscle stimulation and recovery-oriented treatments |
| Customized Frequency | Professional protocols for specific muscle groups |
The adjustable settings give trained operators greater control over treatment intensity and client comfort.
New clients should begin with a lower frequency and intensity before either setting is increased gradually.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Different treatment heads and frequency settings support different professional applications.
Upper-Body Treatments
-
Back
-
Shoulders
-
Arms
-
Forearms
-
Suitable neck muscles
-
Upper-body recovery programs
Lower-Body Treatments
-
Thighs
-
Hamstrings
-
Quadriceps
-
Calves
-
Gluteal muscles
-
Feet
Full-Body Wellness Treatments
-
General muscle relaxation
-
Post-workout recovery
-
Circulation support
-
Fatigue-relief programs
-
Stress-reduction services
-
Maintenance-oriented wellness sessions
Professional Recovery and Wellness Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected treatment head, frequency, intensity and professional protocol.
| Treatment Area | Applicable Treatment Head | Intended Wellness Application |
|---|---|---|
| Back | Large or flexible head | Broad muscle relaxation |
| Shoulders | Small or medium head | Localized tension support |
| Arms and forearms | Small or medium head | General massage and recovery |
| Thighs and legs | Medium or large head | Post-workout recovery |
| Calves | Small or medium head | Tired-muscle relaxation |
| Gluteal muscles | Large or flexible head | Broad recovery treatment |
| Hands and feet | Small head | Targeted relaxation |
| Full body | Multiple heads | Customized wellness program |
Treatment suitability and expected responses vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every professional treatment.
How a Professional Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, medical history, target muscle groups, comfort level and treatment goals. The appropriate treatment head, frequency and intensity are then selected.
2. System Preparation
The selected treatment head is installed according to the operating manual. The operator confirms that the attachment is secure before beginning the session.
3. Parameter Selection
Frequency, intensity, session duration and treatment pattern are selected according to the target area and professional protocol.
4. Treatment Application
The operator applies the treatment head to the selected muscle groups using light to moderate pressure and controlled movement. A typical session lasts approximately 15–20 minutes.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the client receives suitable hydration, recovery and aftercare guidance.
Some clients may return to their normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary tenderness, sensitivity, tingling or muscle fatigue may occur.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines digital controls with adjustable percussion and oscillation technology for streamlined use in professional settings.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Digital control display
-
Adjustable 5Hz–100Hz frequency range
-
Customizable intensity settings
-
Four treatment-head options
-
Percussion and oscillation technology
-
Full-body treatment capability
-
Quiet operation below 70dB
-
Lightweight and portable design
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty G8 Vibration Massage Machine |
| Product Type | Professional vibration massage and recovery system |
| Technology | Percussion and oscillation vibration therapy |
| Frequency Range | 5Hz–100Hz adjustable |
| Power Output | 50W–150W |
| Treatment Heads | Small, medium, large and flexible |
| Session Duration | Approximately 15–20 minutes |
| Treatment Areas | Back, legs, arms, shoulders, neck muscles, feet and other suitable muscle groups |
| Control Interface | Digital frequency and intensity controls |
| Noise Level | Less than 70dB |
| Safety Features | Automatic shut-off, temperature control, intensity limits and overload protection |
| Power Supply | 110V–240V |
| Portability | Lightweight design with cordless option available |
| Warranty | Three-year parts and labor warranty |
| Support | Professional training and lifetime technical support |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, four treatment heads and the required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One G8 Vibration Massage Machine
-
One small treatment head
-
One medium treatment head
-
One large treatment head
-
One flexible treatment head
-
Treatment-head connection components
-
Power cable
-
Rechargeable battery where included with the selected model
-
English user manual
-
Operating guidance
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Remote professional training
-
Machine setup guidance
-
Treatment-head installation instructions
-
Frequency-selection guidance
-
Intensity-adjustment guidance
-
Treatment-protocol information
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Treatment-head installation
-
Digital-control operation
-
Frequency adjustment
-
Intensity selection
-
Treatment-area planning
-
Client positioning
-
Basic wellness and recovery protocols
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
A professional training certificate is provided after completion.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty G8 Vibration Massage Machine is supported by a three-year parts and labor warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Digital display and control system
-
Original treatment heads
-
Treatment-head connection components
-
Original power components
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect treatment-head operation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of treatment heads and external components
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional vibration-massage equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Active or suspected blood clots
-
Severe cardiovascular conditions
-
Acute inflammation or infection
-
Open wounds in the treatment area
-
Recent fractures
-
Recent surgery
-
Severe osteoporosis
-
Bleeding disorders
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Severe nerve impairment
-
Reduced sensation
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
The machine should not be applied directly over the front or side of the neck, eyes, head, spine, kidneys, open wounds, recent injuries or other prohibited areas.
The selected frequency, intensity and pressure must remain comfortable throughout the session.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Beauty salons
-
Professional spas
-
Wellness centers
-
Gyms and fitness facilities
-
Sports-recovery centers
-
Physiotherapy clinics
-
Massage professionals
-
Corporate wellness providers
-
Trained independent practitioners
-
Businesses expanding their recovery services
This machine is not intended for unsupervised use by untrained individuals.
Why Choose the G8 Vibration Massage Machine?
Select the Appropriate Treatment Head
Four treatment-head options allow practitioners to select the appropriate coverage and treatment pattern for different muscle groups and body areas.
Treat Multiple Body Areas
The system supports professional treatments for the back, shoulders, arms, legs, thighs, calves, feet and other suitable muscle groups.
Customize Every Session
The adjustable 5Hz–100Hz frequency range and customizable intensity settings allow treatments to be adapted to client comfort and professional objectives.
Expand Your Service Menu
The machine can support muscle-relaxation services, athletic-recovery programs, general wellness treatments and suitable add-on massage services.
Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts and labor warranty, professional training, a training certificate and lifetime technical support.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is vibration massage therapy?
Vibration massage uses controlled percussion and oscillation movements to stimulate selected muscle groups. The frequency and intensity can be adjusted according to the treatment area and client comfort.
What is the adjustable frequency range?
The G8 Vibration Massage Machine provides an adjustable frequency range from 5Hz to 100Hz.
What is the difference between the four treatment heads?
The small head supports precise treatments, the medium head supports general massage, the large head provides broad coverage, and the flexible head adapts to curved body areas.
Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable treatment areas include the back, shoulders, arms, forearms, thighs, legs, calves, gluteal muscles, hands and feet.
How long does a treatment take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 15–20 minutes. Treatment time varies according to the target area, frequency, intensity and professional protocol.
Is vibration massage uncomfortable?
The frequency and intensity are adjustable. Clients should feel controlled vibration and muscle stimulation without pain. The operator should reduce the settings or stop treatment if discomfort occurs.
Can the machine support athletic recovery programs?
Yes. The G8 Machine can be incorporated into professionally planned pre-workout activation, post-workout relaxation and general sports-recovery programs.
Can it be offered as an add-on service?
Yes. Short vibration-massage sessions may be added to suitable massage, body-care, fitness and wellness services.
Is training included?
Remote professional training and operating guidance are included. A professional training certificate is provided after completion.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts and labor warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included.
Add Professional Vibration Massage to Your Business
The Wikbeauty G8 Vibration Massage Machine combines:
-
Four professional treatment heads
-
Adjustable 5Hz–100Hz frequency
-
Percussion and oscillation technology
-
Full-body recovery and wellness applications
-
Three-year warranty and lifetime support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its treatment heads, frequency settings and professional training.
Order Your G8 Vibration Massage Machine and Request a Quote
Receives in 8 days.
$1,699.00
Professional RF Microneedling Skin Rejuvenation System
Four Cartridge Options for Professional Facial and Body Treatments
The Wikbeauty Morpheus 8 RF Microneedling Machine is a professional fractional radiofrequency system developed for aesthetic clinics, medical spas, dermatology practices and professional beauty centers.
The system combines controlled microneedling with radiofrequency energy to support skin tightening, collagen remodeling, wrinkle reduction, acne-scar improvement and body-contouring treatments.
Four cartridge options and an adjustable needle depth from 0.2mm to 7.0mm allow trained practitioners to create customized protocols for different facial zones, body areas and skin concerns.
Four cartridge options | 0.2–7.0mm adjustable depth | Face and body applications | Three-year warranty
Four Cartridge Options on One Professional Platform
12-Pin Cartridge
The 12-pin cartridge is designed for precise treatments and smaller facial areas.
Its concentrated treatment pattern makes it suitable for detailed skin-rejuvenation protocols and localized concerns.
Common treatment applications include:
-
Fine-line treatments
-
Localized acne scars
-
Under-eye areas
-
Small facial zones
-
Detailed texture-refinement protocols
-
Precision collagen-remodeling treatments
24-Pin Cartridge
The 24-pin cartridge is a versatile option for general facial rejuvenation.
It provides balanced treatment coverage for common facial skin concerns and medium-sized treatment areas.
Common treatment applications include:
-
Facial skin tightening
-
Wrinkle treatments
-
Uneven skin texture
-
Enlarged-looking pores
-
Mild facial laxity
-
General collagen-remodeling protocols
40-Pin Cartridge
The 40-pin cartridge provides broader treatment coverage for larger facial and body areas.
Its wider treatment pattern helps practitioners perform efficient treatments across areas requiring greater coverage.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Abdomen
-
Thighs
-
Buttocks
-
Upper arms
-
Neck and décolletage
-
Larger facial areas
Nano Cartridge
The Nano cartridge is designed for superficial skin-rejuvenation and texture-refinement treatments.
It supports surface-focused protocols without the deeper penetration provided by the pin cartridges.
Common treatment applications include:
-
Superficial skin refinement
-
Uneven-looking texture
-
Enlarged-looking pores
-
Skin-tone improvement
-
Maintenance-oriented treatments
-
Overall skin-quality programs
The appropriate cartridge should be selected according to the treatment area, skin condition and professional protocol.
Select the Right Cartridge for Each Treatment
The system supports four cartridge options. The appropriate cartridge should be selected according to the size of the treatment area, required coverage and intended skin-rejuvenation protocol.
Option 1: 12-Pin Cartridge
A precision-focused cartridge for smaller treatment areas and localized skin concerns.
Recommended applications:
-
Fine lines
-
Localized acne scars
-
Detailed facial treatments
-
Small or delicate treatment zones
Recommended for:
-
Precision facial protocols
-
Targeted scar treatments
-
Localized collagen remodeling
-
Clinics offering detailed facial services
Option 2: 24-Pin Cartridge
A versatile cartridge for general facial rejuvenation and medium-sized areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Facial skin tightening
-
Wrinkle treatments
-
Uneven skin texture
-
Enlarged-looking pores
Recommended for:
-
General facial rejuvenation
-
Full-face treatment programs
-
Skin-texture improvement
-
Collagen-stimulation protocols
Option 3: 40-Pin Cartridge
A broader-coverage cartridge for larger facial and body areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen treatments
-
Thigh treatments
-
Buttock treatments
-
Upper-arm treatments
Recommended for:
-
Body skin-firming programs
-
Larger treatment areas
-
Efficient body protocols
-
Clinics expanding into face and body treatments
Option 4: Nano Cartridge
A superficial cartridge for skin refinement and maintenance-oriented treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Surface texture refinement
-
Skin-tone improvement
-
Enlarged-looking pores
-
Superficial rejuvenation
Recommended for:
-
Gentle skin-quality treatments
-
Maintenance protocols
-
Surface-focused facial services
-
Clients requiring superficial applications
Precision Depth Control for Customized RF Microneedling
The system offers an adjustable needle depth from 0.2mm to 7.0mm. Each depth should be selected according to the treatment area, tissue thickness, cartridge type and professional protocol.
| Depth Range | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| 0.2–1.0mm | Superficial skin-refinement and delicate-area protocols |
| 1.0–2.0mm | General facial rejuvenation and fine-line treatments |
| 2.0–4.0mm | Deeper facial skin tightening and scar-remodeling protocols |
| 4.0–7.0mm | Appropriately selected body areas and deeper professional applications |
The adjustable depth gives trained operators greater control over treatment placement and protocol customization.
The correct depth must be selected following consultation and assessment of the intended treatment area.
Adjustable Treatment Depths
Different needle depths support different professional treatment requirements.
Superficial Depths
-
0.2mm to 1.0mm
-
Surface-focused skin-refinement protocols
-
Fine-line appearance
-
Delicate facial zones
-
Maintenance-oriented treatments
Mid-Depth Treatments
-
1.0mm to 3.0mm
-
General facial rejuvenation
-
Skin-tightening protocols
-
Uneven texture
-
Acne-scar appearance
-
Collagen-remodeling treatments
Deeper Treatments
-
3.0mm to 7.0mm
-
Appropriately selected body areas
-
Abdomen, thighs, buttocks and upper arms
-
Body skin-firming protocols
-
Deeper professional treatment programs
Professional Face and Body Applications
The available treatments depend on the cartridge, needle depth and professional protocol selected.
| Treatment Area | Applicable Cartridge | Intended Aesthetic Application |
|---|---|---|
| Under-eye area | 12-pin | Delicate skin-firming and fine-line protocols |
| Face and cheeks | 12-pin or 24-pin | Facial rejuvenation and texture improvement |
| Jawline and lower face | 24-pin | Skin tightening and contour refinement |
| Neck and décolletage | 24-pin or 40-pin | Firming and texture-improvement protocols |
| Acne scars | 12-pin or 24-pin | Targeted collagen-remodeling treatments |
| Abdomen | 40-pin | Body skin firming and texture improvement |
| Thighs and buttocks | 40-pin | Body rejuvenation and firming protocols |
| Superficial facial areas | Nano | Texture, tone and skin-quality improvement |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment.
How a Professional Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s skin concerns, medical history, previous treatments, treatment goals and suitability. The appropriate cartridge, needle depth and RF parameters are then selected.
2. System Preparation
The selected cartridge is installed according to the operating manual. The operator confirms that the handpiece and cartridge are correctly connected before beginning treatment.
3. Parameter Selection
Needle depth, RF energy, frequency and other available settings are selected according to the treatment area, skin condition and professional protocol.
4. Treatment Application
The operator applies the treatment handpiece to the selected area using the appropriate technique. Session duration varies according to the cartridge, treatment depth, area size and protocol.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the area is cleaned and the client receives appropriate aftercare instructions.
Temporary redness, sensitivity, swelling, dryness, pinpoint marks or other expected skin responses may occur following RF microneedling treatment.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines a 10.4-inch control screen with adjustable RF microneedling technology for streamlined use in professional settings.
Key operating advantages include:
-
10.4-inch control screen
-
Four interchangeable cartridge options
-
Adjustable needle depth from 0.2mm to 7.0mm
-
Face and body treatment capability
-
Adjustable 1–15MHz RF frequency
-
Specialized 6MHz thermal RF mode
-
Maximum 500W output power
-
Compact vertical professional design
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Morpheus 8 RF Microneedling Machine |
| Product Type | Professional fractional RF microneedling system |
| Technology | Fractional radiofrequency microneedling |
| Maximum Output Power | 500W |
| Input Voltage | 100V / 110V / 220V |
| Control Interface | 10.4-inch control screen |
| RF Frequency | 1–15MHz adjustable |
| Thermal RF Mode | 6MHz |
| Cartridge Options | 12-pin, 24-pin, 40-pin and Nano |
| Adjustable Needle Depth | 0.2–7.0mm |
| Treatment-Area Sizes | 1.1 × 1.1cm, 1.6 × 1.6cm, 1.6 × 1.5cm and 2 × 2cm |
| Machine Dimensions | 40 × 36 × 81cm |
| Machine Weight | 13.3kg |
| Package Dimensions | 49 × 46 × 102cm |
| Package Weight | 28.4kg |
| Intended Applications | Skin tightening, wrinkle reduction, acne-scar improvement, texture refinement and body treatments |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Lifetime technical support |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
What Is Included?
Package contents include the main equipment, treatment handpiece, cartridge options and professional operating guidance.
Standard Equipment
-
One RF microneedling main unit
-
One professional treatment handpiece
-
12-pin cartridge
-
24-pin cartridge
-
40-pin cartridge
-
Nano cartridge
-
Treatment-handle connection components
-
Power cable
-
English user manual
-
Operating guidance
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Remote professional training
-
Machine setup guidance
-
Cartridge installation guidance
-
Needle-depth selection training
-
RF-parameter guidance
-
Facial and body treatment guidance
-
Safety and operating instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Training certificate after completion
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Treatment-handpiece operation
-
Cartridge installation
-
Cartridge selection
-
Needle-depth adjustment
-
Control-interface operation
-
RF-parameter selection
-
Facial and body treatment protocols
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
A professional training certificate is provided after completion.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Morpheus 8 RF Microneedling Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Control screen and operating system
-
Original treatment handpiece
-
Handpiece-connection components
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect treatment-handpiece operation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of cartridges and consumable items
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional RF microneedling equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Implanted electronic devices
-
Active cancer
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds in the treatment area
-
Severe skin disorders
-
Recent isotretinoin use
-
Recent surgery in the proposed treatment area
-
Conditions affecting normal healing
-
A history of abnormal or keloid scarring
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
RF microneedling cartridges must be handled according to professional hygiene and infection-control requirements.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Dermatology practices
-
Professional beauty centers
-
Skin-rejuvenation professionals
-
Trained independent practitioners
-
Businesses expanding their facial and body treatment services
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose This RF Microneedling System?
Select the Appropriate Cartridge
Four cartridge options allow practitioners to select the appropriate coverage pattern for different facial zones, body areas and skin concerns.
Treat the Face and Body
The system supports professional protocols for the face, jawline, neck, décolletage, abdomen, thighs, buttocks and upper arms.
Work at Adjustable Treatment Depths
The adjustable 0.2–7.0mm depth range supports superficial, mid-depth and deeper professional applications.
Expand Your Service Menu
One professional platform can support facial rejuvenation, skin tightening, wrinkle treatments, acne-scar protocols, texture refinement and body skin-firming services.
Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, professional training, a training certificate and lifetime technical support.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the difference between the four cartridges?
The 12-pin cartridge supports precise and localized treatments. The 24-pin cartridge is suitable for general facial rejuvenation. The 40-pin cartridge provides broader coverage for larger face and body areas. The Nano cartridge supports superficial skin-refinement protocols.
How is RF microneedling different from traditional microneedling?
Traditional microneedling creates controlled microchannels without delivering radiofrequency energy. This system combines microneedling with RF energy to support thermal collagen remodeling, skin tightening and texture improvement.
What is the adjustable needle-depth range?
The needle depth can be adjusted from 0.2mm to 7.0mm. The appropriate depth should be selected according to the treatment area, tissue thickness, cartridge and professional protocol.
Which cartridge is best for facial treatments?
The 12-pin and 24-pin cartridges are suitable for many professional facial protocols. The final selection depends on the treatment area, skin condition and required coverage.
Which cartridge is best for body treatments?
The 40-pin cartridge provides broader coverage for larger body areas such as the abdomen, thighs, buttocks and upper arms.
How long does a treatment take?
A typical session takes approximately 30–60 minutes. Treatment time varies according to the selected area, cartridge, depth and professional protocol.
How quickly will clients see results?
Results vary according to the treatment area, skin condition, treatment parameters and individual biological response. Progressive improvement may develop as the skin-remodeling process continues.
Is there downtime?
Temporary redness, sensitivity, swelling, dryness or pinpoint marks may occur after treatment. The duration varies according to treatment depth, RF settings and individual response.
Is training included?
Remote professional training and operating guidance are included. A professional training certificate is provided after completion.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects in approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included.
Add Professional RF Microneedling to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Morpheus 8 RF Microneedling Machine combines:
-
Four professional cartridge options
-
Adjustable 0.2–7.0mm needle depth
-
A 10.4-inch control screen
-
Professional face and body applications
-
Three-year parts warranty and lifetime support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its cartridges, treatment applications and professional training.
Order Your RF Microneedling Machine and Request a Quote
Receives in 8 days.
$3,999.00
Professional Four-Handle NEO EMShape Body-Sculpting System
Straight and Curved Electromagnetic Applicators for Muscle Conditioning and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine is a professional body-sculpting system developed for electromagnetic muscle conditioning, body contouring, and improved definition across multiple body areas.
The machine combines advanced EMShape technology with four ergonomic applicators: two straight handles for conventional placement and two curved handles designed for improved contact across contoured body areas.
With approximately 20,000 muscle contractions per session, adjustable treatment settings, a 12-inch intelligent touchscreen, air-and-water cooling, and a professional vertical design, the system is suitable for body-sculpting clinics, medical spas, slimming centers, fitness facilities, and wellness studios.
EMShape technology | Two straight and two curved handles | Vertical tower design | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
EMShape Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
EMShape technology delivers high-intensity electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing repeated involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Thigh muscle conditioning
-
Upper-arm toning
-
Waistline definition
-
Calf muscle stimulation
Straight and Curved Applicator Treatment
The system includes two straight and two curved applicators for different body shapes and placement requirements.
Common benefits include:
-
Conventional straight-handle placement
-
Improved contact on contoured body areas
-
Focused muscle stimulation
-
Bilateral treatment capability
-
Multi-area treatment flexibility
-
Customized applicator positioning
Multi-Area Body Contouring
Four applicators can be positioned across suitable muscle groups according to the client’s anatomy and treatment objectives.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen and thigh treatments
-
Arms and abdomen
-
Buttocks and thighs
-
Waistline and love-handle areas
-
Bilateral calf treatments
-
Customized multi-area programs
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Abdominal and Waistline Program
Uses suitable straight or curved applicators to stimulate abdominal muscles and support midsection definition.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Core-area stimulation
-
Waistline sculpting
-
Love-handle-area programs
-
General midsection definition
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved abdominal tone
-
Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation
-
Clients following healthy lifestyle programs
Buttock and Thigh Program
Positions multiple applicators over suitable buttock and thigh muscle areas for lower-body treatment.
Recommended applications:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatments
-
Shape-enhancement programs
-
Lower-body definition
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved buttock or thigh tone
-
Clients combining treatment with exercise
-
Clients receiving comprehensive lower-body programs
Arm and Calf Program
Uses suitable applicators for upper-arm and calf muscle-conditioning treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Biceps and triceps conditioning
-
Calf muscle stimulation
-
Bilateral limb treatments
-
Improved-looking muscle definition
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved arm or calf tone
-
Fitness and body-contouring clients
-
Clients requiring smaller-area applicator placement
Multi-Area Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment following completion of the client’s initial NEO EMSlim course.
Recommended applications:
-
Muscle-tone maintenance
-
Body-contour maintenance
-
Multi-area conditioning
-
Fitness-program support
-
Seasonal body-sculpting treatments
Recommended for:
-
Returning NEO EMSlim clients
-
Clients completing six to eight initial sessions
-
Clients combining treatment with regular exercise
Adjustable Energy and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine allows practitioners to customize treatments according to applicator type, body area, client tolerance, and professional protocol.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Technology | EMShape electromagnetic stimulation | Muscle-conditioning treatments |
| Treatment Handles | Four | Multi-area treatment capability |
| Straight Handles | Two | Conventional and precise placement |
| Curved Handles | Two | Contoured and ergonomic placement |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 20,000 | Intensive muscle activation |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes | Efficient treatment scheduling |
| Treatment Course | Six to eight sessions | Structured body-sculpting program |
| Treatment Frequency | Commonly twice weekly | Progressive muscle conditioning |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable | Personalized client comfort |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation | Supports continuous operation |
Settings should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen and Waistline
Straight or curved handles can be positioned over suitable abdominal and waist muscle groups for focused or combined treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle activation
-
Core-area conditioning
-
Waistline definition
-
Love-handle-area treatment
-
Multi-zone midsection sculpting
Buttocks and Thighs
Curved and straight applicators support customized placement across suitable lower-body areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatment
-
Improved-looking definition
-
Lower-body sculpting
Arms and Calves
The applicator selection supports suitable upper-arm and lower-leg treatment programs.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Arm definition
-
Calf muscle conditioning
-
Bilateral limb treatment
-
Customized smaller-area programs
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Applicator Configuration |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Muscle conditioning and midsection definition | Straight or curved handles |
| Waistline | Contouring and core-area stimulation | Curved-handle placement |
| Love Handles | Side-body conditioning | Curved-handle placement |
| Buttocks | Toning and shape-enhancement support | Bilateral curved or straight handles |
| Inner and Outer Thighs | Lower-body conditioning | Suitable bilateral placement |
| Upper Arms | Arm muscle stimulation and definition | Straight handles |
| Calves | Lower-leg muscle conditioning | Suitable straight or curved handles |
| Multiple Areas | Comprehensive body-sculpting program | Up to four handles |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Applicator Selection and Placement
Select straight or curved handles according to the treatment area and client anatomy. Position and secure the applicators over suitable muscle groups.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate program and begin with conservative energy settings. Adjust the intensity according to the body area, client comfort, and muscle response.
Step 4: EMShape Treatment
The system delivers electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor the client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine combines EMShape technology with straight and curved applicator options.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional EMShape technology
-
Four ergonomic treatment handles
-
Two straight applicators
-
Two curved applicators
-
Approximately 20,000 contractions per session
-
Focused, bilateral, and multi-area configurations
-
Treatments for the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, and calves
-
Vertical professional design
-
Adjustable energy intensity
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling
-
Approximately 20–30-minute sessions
-
Six- to eight-session treatment programs
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine |
| Technology | HI-EMT with EMShape technology |
| Design | Vertical tower |
| Treatment Handles | Four ergonomic applicators |
| Straight Handles | Two |
| Curved Handles | Two |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 20,000 |
| Primary Functions | Muscle conditioning and body contouring |
| Supplied Performance Figures | Up to 30% increased muscle definition and 20% fat reduction |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves |
| Treatment Configuration | Focused, bilateral, or multi-area |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Six to eight sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | Commonly twice weekly |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation |
| Display | 12-inch intelligent touchscreen |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
Performance figures are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim main unit
-
2 × Straight EMShape treatment applicators
-
2 × Curved EMShape treatment applicators
-
Applicator connection cables
-
Applicator-positioning accessories
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Adjustable energy controls
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling system
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Professional video training
-
Straight-handle placement guidance
-
Curved-handle placement guidance
-
Energy-adjustment guidance
-
Abdominal and waistline protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Calf-treatment protocols
-
Multi-area treatment guidance
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Treatment-area assessment
-
Straight-handle placement
-
Curved-handle placement
-
Applicator selection by body area
-
Energy-level adjustment
-
Abdominal and waistline protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Calf-treatment protocols
-
Multi-area treatment planning
-
Client monitoring
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Cooling-system maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within or near the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Cardiac rhythm disorders
-
Epilepsy or seizure disorders
-
Active muscle injury
-
Severe inflammation
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Serious neurological or muscular conditions
-
Reduced or impaired sensation
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment.
Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use.
-
Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation.
-
Remove metal objects from each treatment area.
-
Select the correct straight or curved applicator.
-
Confirm correct applicator placement before activation.
-
Secure all handles according to the supplied instructions.
-
Begin with conservative energy levels.
-
Increase intensity progressively according to client comfort.
-
Monitor muscle response and client condition throughout treatment.
-
Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Record applicator type, treatment area, duration, and energy settings.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Premium body-sculpting clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Slimming centers
-
Aesthetic salons
-
Fitness facilities
-
Gyms
-
Wellness centers
-
Professional body-contouring studios
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering EMShape or HI-EMT treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine?
Straight and Curved Applicators
Two straight and two curved handles support customized placement across different body shapes and treatment areas.
Professional EMShape Technology
The system provides approximately 20,000 electromagnetic muscle contractions during a professional treatment session.
Multiple Treatment Areas
One machine supports customized programs for the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves.
Professional Cooling and Controls
The 12-inch touchscreen and combined air-and-water cooling system support efficient professional operation.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, straight- and curved-handle guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine?
It is a professional electromagnetic body-sculpting system with two straight and two curved applicators.
What is EMShape technology?
EMShape is the supplied electromagnetic muscle-stimulation technology used by this system to produce repeated involuntary muscle contractions.
What is different about the curved handles?
The curved applicators are designed to improve placement and contact across suitable contoured body areas. Correct selection depends on the client’s anatomy and treatment area.
Do curved handles guarantee deeper muscle engagement?
No. Treatment depth and response depend on electromagnetic output, applicator position, client anatomy, settings, and individual response.
How many applicators are included?
The package includes four handles: two straight applicators and two curved applicators.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves.
Can all four handles be used simultaneously?
The four-handle system supports suitable multi-area operation according to the selected protocol and machine configuration.
How long does one session take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 20–30 minutes.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends six to eight sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments.
What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy levels can be increased progressively according to individual comfort and muscle response.
Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced after exercise may occur.
Can EMShape replace regular exercise?
EMShape treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits.
When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice increased muscle activation during the initial sessions. Visible changes vary and may develop progressively during and after the treatment course.
What performance figures are supplied?
Muscle-definition improvement of up to 30% and fat reduction of up to 20%. These figures are not guaranteed outcomes.
How long can results last?
A possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, applicator selection, treatment consistency, energy settings, diet, exercise, and individual response.
What cooling system does the machine use?
The machine uses combined air-and-water circulation cooling to support continuous professional operation.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, straight- and curved-handle placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, safety, cooling-system maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Curved-Handle EMShape Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine enables body-sculpting clinics, medical spas, and wellness professionals to provide customized electromagnetic muscle-conditioning treatments using straight and curved applicators.
Five key benefits:
-
Professional EMShape electromagnetic technology
-
Two straight and two curved ergonomic applicators
-
Approximately 20,000 contractions per session
-
A 12-inch touchscreen with air-and-water cooling
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, applicator details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
From $2,399.00
Professional Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine
Dual-Technology Muscle Building, Fat Reduction, and Skin-Firming System
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine is a professional body-contouring system that combines high-intensity focused electromagnetic technology with radiofrequency energy.
HI-EMT energy stimulates powerful supramaximal muscle contractions, while controlled RF heating supports fat metabolism, collagen production, and firmer-looking skin. This combination enables professionals to address muscle tone, localized fat, and skin quality within one treatment program.
The system includes four ergonomic applicators with straight and curved options, a 12-inch intelligent touchscreen, adjustable energy levels, and air-and-water circulation cooling. It is designed for slimming clinics, aesthetic centers, gyms, wellness facilities, physiotherapy centers where locally permitted, and professional body-contouring businesses.
HI-EMT and Radiofrequency | Four Ergonomic Applicators | Dual-Client Capability | CE and ISO Certificates | Three-Year Warranty
Three Professional Technologies on One Platform
HI-EMT Muscle Stimulation
High-intensity focused electromagnetic energy stimulates repeated supramaximal muscle contractions that cannot normally be maintained through voluntary exercise alone.
The supplied product specification states that one 30-minute session can generate approximately 20,000–30,000 muscle contractions. These contractions support muscle activation, conditioning, firmness, and improved definition.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle toning
-
Gluteal muscle stimulation
-
Thigh conditioning
-
Upper-arm definition
-
Core-strengthening support
-
Improved muscle firmness
Radiofrequency Fat and Tissue Heating
Controlled RF energy heats the underlying tissue while the electromagnetic function activates the muscles. This thermal action supports fat metabolism, collagen stimulation, and improved skin firmness.
Common applications include:
-
Localized fat-reduction support
-
Waistline contouring
-
Abdominal shaping
-
Thigh and arm treatments
-
Skin-firming programs
-
Smoother-looking body contours
Four-Applicator Multi-Area Treatment
The system includes four ergonomic applicators with straight and curved options. The different handle shapes help professionals position applicators securely over a variety of body contours and muscle groups.
Depending on the machine configuration and treatment protocol, the applicators can support multi-area treatments or sessions for two suitable clients simultaneously.
Common applications include:
-
Simultaneous treatment of compatible body areas
-
Abdomen and waistline programs
-
Buttock and thigh treatments
-
Arm and abdominal combinations
-
Two-client treatment workflows
-
High-volume professional scheduling
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Muscle-Building and Toning Program
A focused HI-EMT program designed to stimulate powerful muscle contractions and improve the appearance of tone, strength, and definition.
Recommended applications: Abdomen, buttocks, thighs, and upper arms.
Recommended for: Clients seeking stronger-looking muscles, improved definition, and enhanced body tone.
Fat-Reduction and Skin-Firming Program
A combined HI-EMT and RF protocol designed to support localized fat reduction while improving the appearance of skin firmness.
Recommended applications: Abdomen, waistline, thighs, buttocks, and arms.
Recommended for: Clients with localized fat deposits and reduced skin firmness in compatible treatment areas.
Complete Body-Sculpting Program
A dual-technology program that addresses muscle tone, localized fat, skin quality, and body shape within one structured treatment course.
Recommended applications: Abdomen and waist, buttocks and thighs, or other compatible treatment combinations.
Recommended for: Clients seeking comprehensive body-contouring benefits instead of a single-function treatment.
Maintenance and Conditioning Program
A follow-up program designed to support previously achieved muscle tone, definition, and body-contouring results.
Recommended applications: Previously treated muscle groups and body areas.
Recommended for: Clients who have completed an initial 4–6-session course and want periodic maintenance treatments.
Adjustable Electromagnetic and RF Treatment Settings
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| HI-EMT Intensity | Adjustable electromagnetic energy | Adapts muscle stimulation to the treatment area and client tolerance |
| RF Energy | Adjustable controlled heating | Supports fat metabolism and skin-firming treatments |
| Applicator Configuration | Four ergonomic handles | Enables flexible single-area, multi-area, or dual-client treatment |
| Applicator Shape | Straight and curved options | Supports secure positioning across different body contours |
| Treatment Time | Approximately 20–30 minutes | Allows efficient professional treatment scheduling |
| Treatment Course | Approximately 4–6 sessions | Provides a structured program for progressive body-contouring results |
| Treatment Frequency | Approximately twice per week | Allows recovery time between muscle-stimulation sessions |
| Control Interface | 12-inch intelligent touchscreen | Provides convenient program selection and energy adjustment |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation | Supports temperature control during continuous professional operation |
| Power Supply | 110V/220V compatibility | Supports operation in different international markets |
HI-EMT and RF intensity should begin at a comfortable level and be increased gradually according to the client’s physical condition, treatment area, muscle response, skin sensation, and professional protocol.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdominal and Waist Areas
The abdominal and waist areas are suitable for combined muscle-stimulation, fat-reduction, and skin-firming programs.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle activation
-
Improved abdominal definition
-
Core-conditioning support
-
Waistline contouring
-
Localized fat-reduction support
-
Firmer-looking abdominal skin
Arms and Upper-Body Areas
Straight or curved applicators can be positioned over compatible upper-body muscle groups according to the client’s anatomy.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Biceps and triceps stimulation
-
Upper-arm toning
-
Improved muscle definition
-
Localized contouring
-
Firmer-looking skin
-
Better upper-body proportions
Buttocks and Thigh Areas
Curved applicators can follow compatible lower-body contours to stimulate the gluteal and thigh muscles.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock lifting and toning
-
Gluteal muscle stimulation
-
Thigh conditioning
-
Inner- and outer-thigh contouring
-
Localized fat-reduction support
-
Improved lower-body definition
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Application | Primary Area | Professional Objective |
|---|---|---|
| Abdominal Muscle Toning | Abdomen | Stimulate the abdominal muscles and improve definition |
| Core Conditioning | Abdomen and core | Support muscle activation and core firmness |
| Waistline Contouring | Waist and sides | Improve the appearance of waistline shape |
| Buttock Toning | Buttocks | Stimulate gluteal muscles and support a firmer appearance |
| Thigh Sculpting | Inner and outer thighs | Improve muscle tone and lower-body contours |
| Arm Definition | Biceps and triceps | Support upper-arm conditioning and definition |
| Localized Fat Reduction | Compatible body areas | Support the reduction of stubborn fat deposits |
| Skin-Firming Treatment | Abdomen, arms, thighs, and buttocks | Improve the appearance of skin firmness and texture |
| Multi-Area Sculpting | Compatible area combinations | Address more than one body zone within a treatment plan |
| Maintenance Treatment | Previously treated areas | Help maintain muscle tone and body-contouring results |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s body-contouring goals, medical history, physical condition, previous procedures, implanted devices, and possible contraindications.
Step 2: Body and Muscle Assessment
Assess the selected treatment area, identify the target muscle groups, and determine the most appropriate applicator shape and placement.
Step 3: Applicator Placement
Position the straight or curved applicators securely over the selected muscle groups. Confirm that all straps and connections are correctly fitted before starting treatment.
Step 4: Treatment Configuration
Select the treatment time, HI-EMT intensity, and RF level through the 12-inch touchscreen. Begin at a comfortable setting and increase the energy gradually. A typical session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes.
Step 5: Aftercare Guidance
Remove the applicators, inspect the treated areas, and provide hydration, stretching, physical activity, nutrition, and maintenance recommendations. Mild temporary muscle soreness may occur.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine combines dual-technology performance, flexible applicator positioning, and intelligent controls for professional body-contouring environments.
Key advantages include:
-
Combined HI-EMT and radiofrequency technology
-
Four ergonomic treatment applicators
-
Straight and curved handle options
-
Multi-area treatment capability
-
Dual-client workflow capability
-
Approximately 20–30-minute sessions
-
Structured 4–6-session treatment courses
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Adjustable treatment intensity
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
Professional training and after-sales support
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine |
| Technology | HI-EMT and radiofrequency heating |
| Treatment Handles | Four ergonomic applicators |
| Applicator Options | Straight and curved handles |
| Primary Functions | Muscle building, muscle toning, fat-reduction support, skin firming, and body contouring |
| Muscle Contractions | Approximately 20,000–30,000 supramaximal contractions per 30-minute session |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, waistline, thighs, buttocks, and arms |
| Multi-Area Capability | Compatible body areas may be treated simultaneously |
| Dual-Client Capability | Supports two-client treatment workflows when permitted by the machine configuration and protocol |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Approximately 4–6 sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | Approximately twice per week with suitable recovery intervals |
| Results Duration | Supplied estimate of 6–12 months with an appropriate lifestyle and maintenance |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation |
| Display and Controls | 12-inch intelligent touchscreen |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable according to the body area and client tolerance |
| Power Supply | 110V/220V dual compatibility |
| Certificates | CE and ISO |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| After-Sales Service | Professional training and technical support |
The stated contraction count, result timeline, and result duration are supplied product-performance estimates. Individual experiences and outcomes vary according to body composition, physical condition, diet, activity level, treatment settings, treatment frequency, and maintenance.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine
-
4 × Ergonomic treatment applicators
-
Straight and curved applicator options
-
Compatible applicator straps
-
Standard handle connections
-
1 × Compatible power cable
-
Standard operating accessories
-
1 × Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Machine setup guide
-
Touchscreen operating instructions
-
Applicator-placement guidance
-
HI-EMT and RF treatment protocols
-
Contraindication and safety guidance
-
Cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Professional operator training
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional operating guidance to help machine owners and treatment providers use the EMSlim RF system correctly and confidently.
Training and support cover:
-
Machine installation and initial setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Straight and curved applicator selection
-
Correct applicator positioning
-
HI-EMT energy adjustment
-
RF intensity adjustment
-
Multi-area treatment planning
-
Dual-client workflow guidance
-
Client consultation and contraindication screening
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Troubleshooting assistance
-
Treatment-course planning
Ongoing after-sales support is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine includes a three-year professional warranty and after-sales technical support.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty provides support for eligible machine components and manufacturing-related faults occurring under normal professional operating conditions. Technical assessment may be required before replacement parts or repair assistance are supplied.
Warranty support includes:
-
Remote technical diagnosis
-
Operating and troubleshooting assistance
-
Support for eligible replacement parts
-
Repair instructions
-
Maintenance recommendations
-
After-sales communication during the warranty period
Technical Support Process
-
Contact Wikbeauty with the machine model and order information.
-
Provide a detailed description of the technical issue.
-
Submit clear photographs or a short video when requested.
-
Allow the technical team to diagnose the problem.
-
Follow the provided troubleshooting or repair instructions.
-
Receive eligible replacement-part support when required.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by:
-
Incorrect machine operation
-
Unauthorized modification or repair
-
Accidental impact or physical damage
-
Improper voltage or electrical installation
-
Operation without the required cooling conditions
-
Water damage or unsuitable storage
-
Failure to follow maintenance instructions
-
Normal wear of straps, cables, connectors, and consumable components
-
Shipping or relocation damage occurring after delivery
Safety and Contraindications
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before every initial treatment. The machine should only be operated by trained professionals following the supplied instructions and applicable local regulations.
Treatment may be unsuitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or plans to become pregnant
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants in or near the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Epilepsy or seizure disorders
-
Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment
-
Active muscle injury or severe inflammation
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Uncontrolled diabetes
-
Open wounds or damaged skin
-
Recent surgery in the intended treatment area
-
Abdominal or inguinal hernia
-
Reduced sensation in the treatment area
-
Any medical condition requiring professional clearance
Clients with implanted devices, metal implants, serious medical conditions, or recent surgery should consult a qualified healthcare professional before treatment.
Operating Precautions
-
Complete a detailed health screening before treatment.
-
Assess the client’s physical condition and body-contouring goals.
-
Ensure the client is adequately hydrated.
-
Advise clients to avoid heavy meals shortly before treatment.
-
Remove metal jewelry and accessories from the treatment area.
-
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and cooling system.
-
Position applicators only over suitable muscle groups.
-
Secure all applicators before activating the system.
-
Begin with a low HI-EMT and RF intensity.
-
Increase energy gradually according to client tolerance.
-
Monitor muscle response, skin warmth, and client comfort continuously.
-
Stop treatment if the client experiences pain, dizziness, or abnormal discomfort.
-
Do not place applicators over the head, heart, chest, or injured tissue.
-
Do not exceed the recommended treatment time.
-
Allow appropriate recovery time between sessions.
-
Clean and disinfect applicators after every client.
-
Follow all cooling-system and maintenance requirements.
-
Keep accurate client and treatment records when required.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine is suitable for:
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Beauty salons
-
Slimming clinics
-
Medical spas where locally permitted
-
Wellness centers
-
Gyms and fitness studios
-
Physiotherapy centers where locally permitted
-
Professional muscle-conditioning providers
Operators should complete appropriate training and comply with local requirements governing electromagnetic, radiofrequency, and body-contouring treatments.
Why Choose the Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine?
1. Combined HI-EMT and RF Technology
The system combines powerful muscle stimulation with controlled RF tissue heating, allowing professionals to address muscle tone, localized fat, and skin firmness in one treatment program.
2. Four Ergonomic Applicators
Four straight and curved applicators support customized positioning across the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline.
3. Multi-Area and Dual-Client Capability
The four-handle configuration supports efficient multi-area treatments and can accommodate dual-client workflows when permitted by the machine configuration and treatment protocol.
4. Intelligent Professional Operation
A 12-inch touchscreen, adjustable energy settings, and air-and-water cooling support convenient operation in high-demand professional environments.
5. Certified Quality and Professional Support
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates, professional training, after-sales technical support, and a three-year warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How does the EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine work?
The system combines HI-EMT muscle stimulation with radiofrequency heating. HI-EMT generates powerful muscle contractions, while RF energy heats the underlying tissue to support fat metabolism and skin firmness.
Q: What is the difference between EMSlim RF and a standard electromagnetic machine?
A standard electromagnetic system primarily focuses on muscle stimulation. This system adds RF heating to support fat-reduction and skin-firming treatments alongside muscle conditioning.
Q: How many applicators are included?
The machine includes four ergonomic applicators with straight and curved options.
Q: Why are straight and curved applicators provided?
Different applicator shapes help professionals position the handles over various muscle groups and natural body contours.
Q: Can the machine treat two clients simultaneously?
The four-handle configuration can support two-client treatment workflows when permitted by the control configuration, professional protocol, and local operating requirements.
Q: Can multiple body areas be treated during one appointment?
Yes. Compatible body areas may be treated simultaneously when supported by the machine configuration and professional protocol.
Q: Which areas can be treated?
Compatible treatment areas include the abdomen, waistline, buttocks, thighs, and upper arms.
Q: How long does one session take?
A typical treatment lasts approximately 20–30 minutes.
Q: How many sessions are recommended?
A standard starting course generally includes approximately 4–6 sessions.
Q: How frequently should sessions be scheduled?
Treatments are commonly scheduled approximately twice per week with suitable recovery time between sessions.
Q: How many muscle contractions occur during a session?
The supplied product specification states that a 30-minute session can generate approximately 20,000–30,000 supramaximal muscle contractions.
Q: Is the contraction count equal to completing 20,000–30,000 exercises?
The number is a product-performance comparison describing repeated muscle stimulation. It should not be interpreted as an exact replacement for conventional exercise.
Q: Is the treatment painful?
Clients generally experience strong muscle contractions and warmth from the RF energy. Intensity should be increased gradually and adjusted according to individual comfort.
Q: Is there any downtime?
Most suitable clients can return to normal activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to the feeling after exercise may occur.
Q: When can clients expect results?
Some clients may notice early changes after several sessions. Muscle definition, body contour, and skin firmness may continue developing during the weeks following a completed treatment course.
Q: How long can results last?
The supplied estimate is approximately 6–12 months with an appropriate lifestyle and maintenance plan. Individual result duration varies.
Q: Are maintenance treatments recommended?
Periodic maintenance sessions may help support muscle tone and body-contouring results. Frequency should be determined according to the client’s response and goals.
Q: Does the machine replace exercise?
EMSlim RF treatments should complement regular physical activity, balanced nutrition, hydration, and a healthy lifestyle.
Q: Is the machine suitable for every client?
No. Every client must complete a consultation and contraindication screening before treatment.
Q: Can clients with metal implants receive treatment?
Clients with metal implants in or near the treatment area should not receive treatment without clearance from a qualified healthcare professional.
Q: What cooling system does the machine use?
The machine uses air-and-water circulation cooling to support temperature management during professional operation.
Q: Does the machine support 110V and 220V power?
Yes. The supplied specifications include 110V and 220V dual-voltage compatibility.
Q: What certificates are included?
The machine is supplied with CE and ISO certificates.
Q: Is professional training included?
Yes. Training includes machine setup, touchscreen operation, applicator placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, safety, cleaning, and maintenance.
Q: What warranty is provided?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with after-sales technical support.
Add EMSlim RF Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine gives clinics, salons, gyms, wellness centers, and body-contouring professionals a versatile solution for muscle building, fat-reduction support, skin firming, and multi-area body sculpting.
Five key benefits:
-
Combined HI-EMT and radiofrequency technology
-
Four ergonomic straight and curved applicators
-
Multi-area and dual-client treatment capability
-
Intelligent 12-inch touchscreen with air-and-water cooling
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, ordering information, training details, and professional support.
Receives in 8 days.
$2,500.00
Professional 360° Cryolipolysis Fat-Freezing System
Surround Cooling Technology for Dual-Area Fat Reduction and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine is a professional body-contouring system developed for controlled fat-freezing treatments across multiple body areas.
Its 360° applicators distribute cooling around the treatment chamber rather than limiting cooling to two contact surfaces. This design supports consistent temperature distribution across suitable tissue held inside the applicator.
With adjustable temperatures from 5°C to −15°C, dual-handle operation, multiple applicator sizes, real-time temperature monitoring, and a 10–12-inch intelligent touchscreen, the system is suitable for slimming clinics, beauty salons, medical spas, and wellness centers.
360° surround cooling | Dual-handle operation | 5°C to −15°C range | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
360° Surround Cooling
The applicator delivers controlled cooling around suitable subcutaneous tissue held within the treatment chamber.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen treatments
-
Waist and flank contouring
-
Upper-arm programs
-
Inner- and outer-thigh treatments
-
Back and bra-line treatments
-
Suitable submental-area treatments
Dual-Handle Cryolipolysis
Two handles can operate during the same appointment, supporting simultaneous treatment of two suitable areas.
Common benefits include:
-
Two-area treatment capability
-
Bilateral body treatments
-
Customized applicator combinations
-
Improved clinic scheduling
-
Flexible body-contouring programs
-
Efficient professional operation
Intelligent Temperature and Safety Control
The system combines adjustable cooling with real-time monitoring and skin-protection measures.
Common features include:
-
Adjustable cooling temperature
-
Real-time temperature monitoring
-
Intelligent treatment protocols
-
Antifreeze membrane protection
-
Automatic safety controls
-
Touchscreen parameter management
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Abdomen and Waist Program
Uses appropriately sized applicators for suitable abdominal, waist, or flank tissue.
Recommended applications:
-
Upper-abdomen treatments
-
Lower-abdomen treatments
-
Waistline contouring
-
Flank and love-handle areas
-
General midsection programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients with suitable pinchable subcutaneous fat
-
Clients seeking non-invasive midsection contouring
-
Clients with stable and realistic treatment goals
Arms and Back Program
Uses suitable small or medium applicators for upper-arm, underarm, back, or bra-line areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Underarm-area treatments
-
Upper-back programs
-
Lower-back contouring
-
Bra-line treatments
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about localized upper-body areas
-
Clients suitable for controlled cooling
-
Clients seeking targeted body contouring
Thigh and Buttock Program
Uses suitable applicators for professionally assessed inner-thigh, outer-thigh, or lower-buttock areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Inner-thigh contouring
-
Outer-thigh treatments
-
Upper-leg body contouring
-
Lower-buttock fold treatments
-
Bilateral lower-body programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients with suitable thigh-area tissue
-
Clients seeking lower-body contouring
-
Clients receiving bilateral treatment plans
Submental and Follow-Up Program
Uses a suitable small applicator for professionally assessed submental areas or provides additional treatment after reassessment.
Recommended applications:
-
Double-chin-area contouring
-
Small localized areas
-
Follow-up treatments
-
Multi-area treatment planning
-
Long-term body-contouring support
Recommended for:
-
Clients with suitable submental tissue
-
Clients completing an initial treatment
-
Clients requiring professionally assessed follow-up care
Adjustable Cooling and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine allows practitioners to personalize treatments according to the applicator, body area, tissue condition, and client tolerance.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Technology | 360° surround cryolipolysis | Controlled fat-freezing treatment |
| Cooling Range | 5°C to −15°C | Adjustable treatment temperature |
| Handle Operation | Dual handle | Simultaneous two-area treatment |
| Applicators | Multiple sizes | Different body and submental areas |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30–60 minutes per area | Customized treatment planning |
| Treatment Course | Commonly one to three sessions per area | Progressive body-contouring program |
| Temperature Monitoring | Real-time | Treatment safety and consistency |
| Control System | 10–12-inch touchscreen | Protocol and parameter management |
Temperature, suction, and treatment duration should be selected according to the applicator, tissue thickness, skin condition, client response, and supplied protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen, Waist, and Flanks
Different applicator sizes support controlled cooling across suitable midsection areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-abdomen contouring
-
Lower-abdomen contouring
-
Waistline definition
-
Love-handle treatments
-
General midsection shaping
Arms, Back, and Buttocks
Suitable applicators can be selected for localized upper-body and posterior body areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Bra-line treatments
-
Upper- and lower-back areas
-
Lower-buttock fold treatments
-
Localized body shaping
Thighs and Double Chin
Small, medium, or specialized applicators support professionally assessed lower-body and submental treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Inner-thigh contouring
-
Outer-thigh treatments
-
Upper-leg shaping
-
Double-chin-area contouring
-
Bilateral body treatments
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Applicator |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Localized midsection contouring | Medium or large applicator |
| Waist and Flanks | Waistline and love-handle treatment | Suitable curved applicator |
| Upper Arms | Localized arm contouring | Small or medium applicator |
| Back and Bra Line | Targeted back-area treatment | Suitable medium applicator |
| Inner Thighs | Lower-body contouring | Small or medium applicator |
| Outer Thighs | Thigh-area body contouring | Suitable applicator |
| Buttock Fold | Localized contouring | Small or curved applicator |
| Double Chin | Submental-area treatment | Specialized small applicator |
Applicator availability and final configuration depend on the selected machine package.
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, body-contouring objectives, target areas, previous procedures, skin condition, and possible contraindications. Confirm that the selected areas contain suitable tissue for cryolipolysis.
Step 2: Area and Applicator Selection
Mark one or two treatment areas and select applicators that match the tissue size, shape, and anatomical location.
Step 3: Skin Protection and Placement
Apply a new approved antifreeze membrane correctly over each complete treatment area. Position the applicators and adjust suction according to the supplied protocol.
Step 4: Controlled Cooling Treatment
Begin the selected cooling program for approximately 30–60 minutes. Monitor temperature, applicator seals, skin condition, and client comfort throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the applicators and protective membranes, inspect the skin, and perform the recommended post-treatment massage when appropriate. Document the settings and provide aftercare guidance.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine combines surround cooling, dual-handle operation, and intelligent safety controls.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional 360° cryolipolysis technology
-
Surround cooling within the applicator chamber
-
Adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C
-
Dual-handle operation
-
Simultaneous two-area treatment
-
Multiple applicator sizes
-
Treatments for several body areas
-
10–12-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Real-time temperature monitoring
-
Antifreeze membrane protection
-
Approximately 30–60-minute sessions
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine |
| Technology | 360° surround cooling cryolipolysis |
| Cooling Range | 5°C to −15°C adjustable |
| Handle Operation | Dual handle |
| Treatment Applicators | Multiple sizes, package-dependent |
| Primary Functions | Non-invasive fat reduction and body contouring |
| Treatment Areas | Double chin, arms, waist, abdomen, thighs, back, and buttocks |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30–60 minutes per area |
| Recommended Course | Commonly one to three sessions per area |
| Treatment Interval | Approximately four to six weeks |
| Results Timeline | Progressive changes over approximately three to twelve weeks |
| Display | 10–12-inch intelligent touchscreen |
| Temperature Monitoring | Real-time |
| Safety Features | Antifreeze membrane protection and intelligent controls |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
The supplied product information lists potential fat-reduction figures of 20–40% per treated area. These figures should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes because individual results vary.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis main unit
-
Multiple 360° cooling applicators according to the selected package
-
Dual-handle connection system
-
Applicator connection hoses
-
Applicator-positioning accessories
-
10–12-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Real-time temperature-monitoring system
-
Antifreeze membranes and gel starter supply
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
The exact number, size, and shape of included applicators should follow the selected machine configuration.
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Professional video training
-
360° applicator-selection guidance
-
Dual-handle operation guidance
-
Cooling-temperature guidance
-
Suction-adjustment guidance
-
Body-area treatment protocols
-
Submental-treatment guidance
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Aftercare instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Tissue and treatment-area assessment
-
Applicator selection
-
Dual-handle treatment planning
-
Correct antifreeze membrane placement
-
Suction adjustment
-
Cooling-temperature selection
-
Treatment-duration selection
-
Body and submental protocols
-
Client monitoring
-
Post-treatment massage
-
Aftercare guidance
-
Equipment cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Antifreeze membranes, gels, applicator seals, hoses, filters, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, cold injury caused by incorrect membrane placement or operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A detailed consultation and health-history review must be completed before every treatment. Cryolipolysis should only be performed by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or breastfeeding
-
Cryoglobulinemia
-
Cold agglutinin disease
-
Paroxysmal cold hemoglobinuria
-
Severe cold sensitivity or cold urticaria
-
Raynaud’s disease or serious circulation disorders
-
Active hernia within or near the treatment area
-
Active infection or open wounds
-
Severe skin conditions within the treatment area
-
Reduced or impaired sensation
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Serious liver or kidney conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
The system is intended for suitable subcutaneous fat and should not be presented as a treatment for obesity or as a replacement for weight management.
Cryolipolysis carries risks, including cold injury, prolonged numbness, bruising, contour irregularity, pain, and rare paradoxical adipose hyperplasia. Clients must receive appropriate risk information and provide informed consent.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, applicators, hoses, seals, and accessories before use.
-
Confirm client suitability before every treatment.
-
Select the correct applicator for each treatment area.
-
Use a new approved antifreeze membrane for every applicator.
-
Ensure each membrane covers the complete cooling area.
-
Begin with professionally selected cooling and suction settings.
-
Monitor temperature, applicator contact, skin condition, and client comfort.
-
Continuously monitor both areas during dual-handle operation.
-
Do not treat prohibited or unsuitable anatomical areas.
-
Never reuse a single-use antifreeze membrane.
-
Record applicators, temperatures, suction, duration, and treatment areas.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin changes occur.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Slimming clinics
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Medical spas
-
Beauty salons
-
Wellness centers
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Professional spas
-
Physiotherapy and recovery centers
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before providing cryolipolysis treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine?
360° Surround Cooling
The applicator distributes controlled cooling around suitable tissue held within the treatment chamber.
Dual-Handle Operation
Two applicators can support simultaneous treatment of two suitable areas during one professionally monitored appointment.
Multiple Applicator Options
Different applicator sizes support customized treatments for the abdomen, waist, arms, thighs, back, buttocks, and suitable submental areas.
Intelligent Safety Controls
Real-time temperature monitoring, antifreeze membranes, touchscreen settings, and intelligent protection features support professional operation.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, applicator guidance, dual-handle protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine?
It is a professional controlled-cooling system with 360° applicators, dual-handle operation, and multiple applicator sizes for non-invasive body-contouring treatments.
How does 360° cryolipolysis differ from two-sided cooling?
A 360° applicator distributes cooling around the tissue held inside its treatment chamber, while a traditional applicator may cool primarily from limited contact surfaces.
Does 360° cooling guarantee better results?
No. Treatment outcomes depend on applicator fit, tissue suitability, temperature, duration, membrane placement, number of sessions, and individual response.
Can two areas be treated simultaneously?
Yes. The dual-handle system supports treatment of two suitable areas during the same appointment. Both areas require correct membrane placement and continuous monitoring.
What cooling temperatures are available?
The machine provides adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, waist, flanks, upper arms, thighs, back, buttock fold, and suitable double-chin areas.
How long does one treatment take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 30–60 minutes per area, depending on the applicator and selected protocol.
How many sessions are recommended?
One to three sessions per area, commonly spaced four to six weeks apart. The final plan should follow professional reassessment.
When may clients notice changes?
Thet visible changes may begin after approximately three to four weeks, with progressive changes developing over eight to twelve weeks.
Is the treatment painful?
Clients commonly experience suction, strong cooling, pulling, and temporary numbness. Some clients may experience temporary discomfort during or after treatment.
Is there downtime?
Many clients can resume normal activities after treatment. Temporary redness, swelling, bruising, tenderness, tingling, cramping, or numbness may occur.
Are treated fat cells permanently removed?
Fat cells processed after treatment do not regenerate in the same way. However, remaining fat cells can enlarge with weight gain, and individual contour changes are not guaranteed to be permanent.
Is cryolipolysis a weight-loss treatment?
No. Cryolipolysis is intended for localized body contouring and is not a treatment for obesity or a replacement for balanced nutrition and exercise.
What results are supplied for this machine?
The supplied information lists potential fat-reduction figures of 20–40% in treated areas. These figures are not guaranteed and vary by client and protocol.
What is an antifreeze membrane?
It is a protective barrier applied between the skin and cooling applicator. Correct placement and complete coverage are essential to reduce the risk of cold injury.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to tissue thickness, applicator fit, treatment settings, number of sessions, body composition, lifestyle, and individual response.
What certificates are included?
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, applicator selection, dual-handle use, membrane placement, cooling and suction settings, aftercare, cleaning, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Professional 360° Cryolipolysis to Your Business
The Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine enables slimming clinics, medical spas, and body-contouring professionals to provide dual-area controlled fat-freezing treatments.
Five key benefits:
-
360° surround cooling applicator technology
-
Dual-handle operation for simultaneous two-area treatment
-
Adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C
-
Real-time temperature monitoring and antifreeze membrane protection
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, applicator configuration, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
From $600.00
Professional HIFEM and Radiofrequency Body Sculpting System
Four Treatment Handles for Muscle Stimulation and Body-Contouring Programs
The EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine is a professional dual-technology platform developed for fitness centers, medical spas, wellness clinics and body-sculpting studios.
The system combines High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic technology with controlled radiofrequency energy. HIFEM produces repeated contractions in selected muscle groups, while RF provides controlled thermal energy for suitable body-care and skin-firming protocols.
Four treatment handles support individual or simultaneous multi-area programs for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, upper arms, calves and obliques. The system can be upgraded to six or eight handles.
HIFEM and RF technology | Four treatment handles | 7-Tesla magnetic field | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Functions on One Body-Sculpting Platform
HIFEM Technology
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic technology delivers programmed electromagnetic pulses to selected muscle groups.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle stimulation
-
Gluteal muscle programs
-
Thigh conditioning
-
Upper-arm stimulation
-
Calf-muscle programs
-
General body conditioning
Radiofrequency Energy
The RF function provides controlled heating across suitable treatment areas.
Common applications include:
-
Skin-firming support
-
Body-contour refinement
-
Abdomen treatments
-
Thigh treatments
-
Upper-arm programs
-
General body-care services
Repeated Muscle Contractions
The system produces repeated contractions in the targeted muscle group during a treatment session.
Common applications include:
-
Core-conditioning support
-
Muscle-activation programs
-
Muscle-toning services
-
Fitness-oriented treatments
-
Body-sculpting programs
-
Maintenance sessions
Four-Handle Multi-Area Treatment
Four handles allow practitioners to create individual or simultaneous treatment protocols.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen and obliques
-
Left and right thighs
-
Buttocks and thighs
-
Upper arms
-
Calves
-
Customized multi-area programs
The appropriate handle placement, HIFEM intensity, RF temperature and session duration should be selected according to the muscle group, client condition and professional protocol.
Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client
The system supports customized HIFEM and RF programs for different body areas.
Program 1: Abdomen and Core
A muscle-conditioning program for suitable abdominal and deep-core muscle areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle stimulation
-
Core-conditioning support
-
Abdomen contour programs
-
Oblique muscle stimulation
Recommended for:
-
Fitness enthusiasts
-
Body-sculpting clients
-
Busy professionals
-
Appropriately assessed post-pregnancy clients
Program 2: Buttocks and Gluteal Muscles
A targeted program for suitable gluteal muscle groups.
Recommended applications:
-
Gluteal muscle stimulation
-
Buttock-conditioning programs
-
Muscle-tone support
-
Lower-body contour care
Recommended for:
-
Fitness clients
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Wellness-center members
-
Clients seeking lower-body conditioning
Program 3: Thighs and Calves
A lower-body program for suitable thigh and calf muscle groups.
Recommended applications:
-
Quadriceps stimulation
-
Hamstring programs
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Calf-muscle activation
Recommended for:
-
Athletes
-
Fitness enthusiasts
-
Lower-body conditioning programs
-
Professional wellness services
Program 4: Upper Arms
A targeted program for suitable biceps, triceps and forearm areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Biceps stimulation
-
Triceps stimulation
-
Forearm conditioning
-
Upper-arm contour support
Recommended for:
-
Fitness-center clients
-
Upper-body programs
-
Body-sculpting services
-
Customized muscle-conditioning plans
Adjustable Energy for Customized Treatments
The EMSlim HIEMT Machine provides adjustable HIFEM intensity and radiofrequency settings for different body areas and client tolerance levels.
| Treatment Setting | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Lower Intensity | First-time clients and initial muscle activation |
| Moderate Intensity | General professional muscle-conditioning programs |
| Higher Intensity | Appropriately selected experienced clients |
| Customized HIFEM and RF | Muscle-specific protocols based on professional assessment |
The adjustable controls give trained practitioners greater flexibility over contraction intensity, RF energy and client comfort.
New clients should begin with conservative HIFEM and RF settings before treatment intensity is increased gradually.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Four treatment handles support professional programs across multiple body areas.
Core and Upper-Body Treatments
-
Abdomen
-
Core muscles
-
Obliques
-
Biceps
-
Triceps
-
Forearms
Lower-Body Treatments
-
Buttocks
-
Quadriceps
-
Hamstrings
-
Inner thighs
-
Outer thighs
-
Calves
Combined Body Programs
-
Abdomen and obliques
-
Abdomen and thighs
-
Buttocks and thighs
-
Left and right upper arms
-
Customized multi-area courses
-
Maintenance-oriented programs
Professional Muscle and Body-Contouring Applications
The available treatments depend on handle placement, HIFEM intensity, RF settings, session duration and professional protocol.
| Treatment Area | Applicable Technology | Intended Fitness or Aesthetic Application |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | HIFEM and RF | Core stimulation and contour support |
| Obliques | HIFEM and RF | Side-body muscle conditioning |
| Buttocks | HIFEM | Gluteal muscle stimulation |
| Thighs | HIFEM and RF | Lower-body conditioning |
| Upper arms | HIFEM and RF | Biceps and triceps stimulation |
| Calves | HIFEM | Calf-muscle activation |
| Multiple areas | Four-handle operation | Simultaneous professional treatment |
| Maintenance | Customized program | Ongoing muscle and body-care support |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete health and fitness consultation should be performed before every treatment course.
How a Professional Treatment Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s health history, fitness level, treatment objectives, previous procedures and contraindications.
2. Handle Placement
The selected treatment areas are prepared. Conductive gel is applied where required, and the treatment handles are positioned and secured according to the operating protocol.
3. Parameter Selection
The practitioner selects the HIFEM intensity, RF settings, treatment program and session duration according to the muscle group and client tolerance.
4. HIFEM and RF Treatment
The system delivers programmed electromagnetic pulses and controlled RF energy through the selected handles. A typical treatment lasts approximately 30 minutes.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the handles are removed and the treatment areas are cleaned. The client receives suitable hydration, activity and recovery guidance.
Temporary warmth, muscle fatigue, tightness, soreness or cramping may occur after treatment.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines HIFEM and RF technologies with four treatment handles and professional cooling for continuous operation.
Key operating advantages include:
-
HIFEM electromagnetic stimulation
-
Controlled radiofrequency energy
-
7-Tesla magnetic field
-
Four treatment handles
-
Upgradeable six- or eight-handle configurations
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
Water-cooling system
-
110V–240V power compatibility
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine |
| Product Type | Professional HIFEM and RF body-sculpting system |
| Technology | High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic stimulation and radiofrequency |
| Electromagnetic Field | 14 Tesla |
| Treatment Handles | Four, upgradeable to six or eight |
| Programmed Contractions | More than 20,000 to 30000 per session |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30 minutes |
| Suggested Protocol | Approximately 4–6 sessions, one or two times per week |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, obliques, buttocks, thighs, arms and calves |
| Control Interface | Touchscreen with pre-programmed protocols |
| Cooling System | Water-cooled for continuous professional operation |
| Power Supply | 110V–240V |
| Warranty | Three-year comprehensive warranty |
| Support | Customer support by email, telephone and WhatsApp |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, four treatment handles and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One EMSlim HIEMT main unit
-
Four HIFEM and RF treatment handles
-
Handle-positioning straps
-
Handle-connection components
-
One starter bottle of conductive gel
-
Power cable
-
English user manual
-
Operating guidance
-
Treatment table when included with the selected order
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Two-hour video training
-
Machine installation guidance
-
Treatment-handle setup
-
Handle-placement guidance
-
HIFEM-intensity adjustment
-
RF-setting guidance
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
Client-positioning guidance
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Setup assistance
-
Certificate of Authenticity
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen navigation
-
Treatment-handle installation
-
Handle placement by muscle group
-
HIFEM-intensity adjustment
-
RF parameter selection
-
Abdomen and core programs
-
Gluteal muscle programs
-
Thigh and leg programs
-
Upper-arm programs
-
Multi-handle operation
-
Client-comfort monitoring
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
A two-hour training video and dedicated setup assistance are included.
Three-Year Warranty
The EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine is supported by a three-year comprehensive warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen and control system
-
HIFEM energy components
-
Radiofrequency components
-
Water-cooling system
-
Original treatment handles
-
Handle cables and connectors
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Warranty-eligibility review
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect handle placement or operation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of straps, cables and consumable items
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional high-intensity electromagnetic and radiofrequency equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants in or near the treatment area
-
Active cancer
-
Epilepsy or uncontrolled seizure disorders
-
Severe neurological conditions
-
Active or suspected blood clots
-
Hernia in the treatment area
-
Recent surgery
-
Open wounds or severe skin conditions
-
Acute inflammation
-
Severe muscle injury
-
Reduced sensation
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
Post-pregnancy clients require appropriate medical clearance. Abdominal separation, recent delivery, cesarean recovery and pelvic-floor condition should be assessed before treatment.
RF temperature and HIFEM intensity must remain within the client’s tolerance throughout the session.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Fitness centers
-
Medical spas
-
Wellness clinics
-
Body-sculpting studios
-
Beauty salons
-
Sports and recovery centers
-
Trained independent practitioners
-
Qualified aesthetic professionals
-
Businesses expanding their body-conditioning services
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose the EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine?
Combine HIFEM and RF
The system combines electromagnetic muscle stimulation with controlled radiofrequency energy in one professional platform.
Treat Multiple Body Areas
Four handles support professional programs for the abdomen, obliques, buttocks, thighs, upper arms and calves.
Customize Every Session
Adjustable HIFEM intensity, RF settings and pre-programmed protocols allow treatments to be adapted to different muscle groups and client tolerance.
Expand the System
The standard four-handle configuration can be upgraded to six or eight handles for greater treatment capacity.
Protect Your Investment
The machine includes a three-year comprehensive warranty, professional training, setup assistance and ongoing customer support.
Frequently Asked Questions
How does the EMSlim HIEMT Machine work?
The machine combines HIFEM electromagnetic pulses with controlled radiofrequency energy. HIFEM produces repeated contractions in selected muscles, while RF provides controlled heating for suitable body-care protocols.
What is the 14-Tesla electromagnetic field?
The supplied specification describes a 14-Tesla magnetic-field output used to deliver high-intensity electromagnetic stimulation through the treatment handles.
What does the four-handle design provide?
Four handles allow practitioners to treat individual or multiple suitable body areas during one session. The system can also be upgraded to six or eight handles.
Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the abdomen, obliques, buttocks, thighs, biceps, triceps, forearms and calves.
How long does a treatment take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 30 minutes.
How many sessions are recommended?
A typical professional course may include approximately 4–6 sessions, commonly scheduled one or two times per week. The final protocol depends on the client’s condition and professional assessment.
Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Clients feel repeated muscle contractions and warmth from RF. The intensity and RF settings should remain within the client’s tolerance.
Can muscle soreness occur?
Yes. Temporary muscle fatigue, tightness or soreness may occur, similar to the response after physical exercise.
Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue, soreness, warmth or redness may occur.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The comprehensive warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Add HIFEM and RF Body Sculpting to Your Business
The EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine combines:
-
High-intensity focused electromagnetic stimulation
-
Controlled radiofrequency energy
-
Four treatment handles with upgrade options
-
Professional multi-area body-conditioning programs
-
Three-year comprehensive warranty and ongoing support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its handle configurations, treatment protocols and professional training.
Order Your EMSlim HIEMT Machine and Request Pricing
Receives in 8 days.
From $1,699.00
Professional High-Intensity Electromagnetic Body Sculpting System
Adjustable Muscle Stimulation for Customized Body-Conditioning Programs
The Emslim Gold Magnetic is a professional high-intensity electromagnetic muscle-stimulation platform developed for fitness centers, medical spas, wellness clinics and body-sculpting studios.
The system delivers programmed electromagnetic pulses that produce repeated contractions in selected muscle groups. Adjustable intensity settings allow trained practitioners to create customized programs for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, upper arms and calves.
Professional treatment courses can be incorporated into muscle-conditioning, body-contouring and fitness-support services.
Electromagnetic muscle stimulation | Adjustable intensity | Multiple body areas | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Functions on One Body-Sculpting Platform
Electromagnetic Pulse Delivery
The system delivers high-intensity electromagnetic pulses through treatment applicators positioned over suitable muscle groups.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen treatments
-
Gluteal muscle programs
-
Thigh treatments
-
Upper-arm stimulation
-
Calf-muscle programs
-
General body conditioning
Repeated Muscle Contractions
Programmed electromagnetic energy produces repeated contractions in the targeted muscle group during a treatment session.
Common applications include:
-
Muscle-activation programs
-
Core-conditioning support
-
Muscle-toning services
-
Fitness-oriented treatments
-
Body-sculpting programs
-
Maintenance sessions
Muscle-Conditioning Support
Repeated contractions can be incorporated into professionally planned programs intended to support muscle tone and definition.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal conditioning
-
Gluteal muscle stimulation
-
Thigh-muscle programs
-
Upper-arm conditioning
-
Calf-muscle stimulation
-
General fitness support
Body-Contour Support
The machine can be incorporated into broader body-contouring programs for appropriately selected clients.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen and waist programs
-
Buttock-contour support
-
Thigh treatments
-
Upper-arm programs
-
Post-weight-management body care
-
Combination fitness services
The appropriate applicator placement, intensity and session duration should be selected according to the muscle group, client condition and professional protocol.
Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client
The system supports customized electromagnetic muscle-stimulation programs for different body areas.
Program 1: Abdomen and Core
A muscle-conditioning program for suitable abdominal and core-muscle areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle stimulation
-
Core-conditioning support
-
Abdomen contour programs
-
General muscle-toning services
Recommended for:
-
Fitness enthusiasts
-
Body-sculpting clients
-
Busy professionals
-
Appropriately assessed post-pregnancy clients
Program 2: Buttocks and Gluteal Muscles
A targeted program for suitable gluteal muscle groups.
Recommended applications:
-
Gluteal muscle stimulation
-
Buttock-conditioning programs
-
Muscle-tone support
-
Lower-body body-sculpting services
Recommended for:
-
Fitness clients
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Wellness-center members
-
Clients seeking lower-body conditioning
Program 3: Thighs and Legs
A lower-body program for suitable thigh and calf muscle groups.
Recommended applications:
-
Quadriceps stimulation
-
Hamstring programs
-
Thigh conditioning
-
Calf-muscle activation
Recommended for:
-
Athletes
-
Fitness enthusiasts
-
Lower-body conditioning programs
-
Professional wellness services
Program 4: Upper Arms
A targeted program for suitable biceps and triceps areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Biceps stimulation
-
Triceps stimulation
-
Upper-arm conditioning
-
Muscle-tone support
Recommended for:
-
Fitness-center clients
-
Upper-body programs
-
Body-sculpting services
-
Customized muscle-conditioning plans
Adjustable Intensity for Customized Muscle Stimulation
The Emslim Gold Magnetic provides adjustable electromagnetic intensity for different muscle groups and client tolerance levels.
| Intensity Setting | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Lower Intensity | First-time clients and initial muscle activation |
| Moderate Intensity | General professional conditioning programs |
| Higher Intensity | Appropriately selected experienced clients |
| Customized Program | Muscle-specific settings based on professional assessment |
The adjustable controls give trained practitioners greater flexibility over contraction intensity and client comfort.
New clients should begin with a lower intensity before the setting is increased gradually.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Multiple treatment applicators support professional muscle-stimulation programs across several body areas.
Core and Upper-Body Treatments
-
Abdomen
-
Core muscles
-
Biceps
-
Triceps
-
Other suitable upper-body muscle groups
Lower-Body Treatments
-
Buttocks
-
Quadriceps
-
Hamstrings
-
Thighs
-
Calves
-
Other suitable lower-body muscle groups
Combined Body Programs
-
Abdomen and buttocks
-
Abdomen and thighs
-
Buttocks and thighs
-
Upper arms
-
Customized multi-area courses
-
Maintenance-oriented programs
Professional Muscle and Body-Conditioning Applications
The available treatments depend on applicator placement, intensity, session duration and professional protocol.
| Treatment Area | Applicable Program | Intended Fitness Application |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Core Program | Abdominal muscle stimulation |
| Deep core | Customized Program | Core-conditioning support |
| Buttocks | Gluteal Program | Gluteal muscle stimulation |
| Thighs | Lower-Body Program | Quadriceps and hamstring conditioning |
| Upper arms | Arm Program | Biceps and triceps stimulation |
| Calves | Lower-Leg Program | Calf-muscle activation |
| Multiple areas | Customized Course | Comprehensive body-conditioning support |
| Maintenance | Lower-Intensity Program | Ongoing muscle-stimulation services |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete health and fitness consultation should be performed before every treatment course.
How a Professional Treatment Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s health history, fitness level, treatment goals, recent procedures and contraindications.
2. Applicator Placement
The appropriate treatment applicators are positioned and secured over the selected muscle groups according to the operating protocol.
3. Parameter Selection
The practitioner selects the treatment program, electromagnetic intensity and session duration according to the muscle group and client tolerance.
4. Electromagnetic Treatment
The system delivers programmed electromagnetic pulses that produce repeated contractions in the selected muscles. A typical session lasts approximately 30 minutes per treatment area.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the applicators are removed and the client receives suitable hydration, activity and recovery guidance.
Temporary muscle fatigue, tightness, soreness or cramping may occur following treatment.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines adjustable electromagnetic technology with intuitive controls and professional treatment applicators.
Key operating advantages include:
-
High-intensity electromagnetic stimulation
-
Programmed repeated contractions
-
Adjustable treatment intensity
-
Multiple body-area applicators
-
30-minute treatment programs
-
LCD control interface
-
Automatic safety controls
-
Dual-voltage compatibility
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Emslim Gold Magnetic |
| Product Type | Professional electromagnetic muscle-stimulation system |
| Technology | High-intensity electromagnetic muscle stimulation |
| Programmed Contractions | Up to approximately 20,000–30,000 contractions per session |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30 minutes per treatment area |
| Intensity Levels | Adjustable |
| Treatment Applicators | Multiple handles for different muscle groups |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, buttocks, thighs, upper arms and calves |
| Control Interface | LCD screen with professional controls |
| Power Supply | 110V and 220V |
| Safety Features | Automatic shut-off, client-safety sensors and overload protection |
| Design | Professional clinic and salon system |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and customer assistance |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, electromagnetic treatment applicators and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One Emslim Gold Magnetic main unit
-
Professional electromagnetic treatment applicators
-
Applicator-positioning straps
-
Handle-connection components
-
Required treatment cables
-
Power cable
-
English user manual
-
Operating guidance
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Remote professional training
-
Machine installation guidance
-
Treatment-applicator setup
-
Applicator-placement guidance
-
Intensity-adjustment instructions
-
Muscle-group treatment programs
-
Client-positioning guidance
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
LCD control operation
-
Applicator installation
-
Applicator placement by muscle group
-
Intensity adjustment
-
Abdomen and core programs
-
Gluteal muscle programs
-
Thigh and leg programs
-
Upper-arm programs
-
Client-comfort monitoring
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion.
Three-Year Warranty
The Emslim Gold Magnetic is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
LCD control system
-
Electromagnetic energy components
-
Original treatment applicators
-
Applicator cables and connectors
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Warranty-eligibility review
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect applicator placement or operation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of straps, cables and external components
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional high-intensity electromagnetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants in or near the treatment area
-
Active cancer
-
Epilepsy or uncontrolled seizure disorders
-
Severe neurological conditions
-
Active or suspected blood clots
-
Hernia in the treatment area
-
Recent surgery
-
Open wounds or severe skin conditions
-
Acute inflammation
-
Severe muscle injury
-
Reduced sensation
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
Post-pregnancy clients require appropriate medical clearance. Abdominal separation, recent delivery, cesarean recovery and pelvic-floor condition should be professionally assessed before treatment.
The selected intensity must remain within the client’s tolerance throughout the session.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Fitness centers
-
Medical spas
-
Wellness clinics
-
Body-sculpting studios
-
Beauty salons
-
Sports and recovery centers
-
Trained independent practitioners
-
Qualified aesthetic professionals
-
Businesses expanding their muscle-conditioning services
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose the Emslim Gold Magnetic?
Provide Intensive Muscle Stimulation
The system delivers programmed electromagnetic pulses that produce repeated contractions in selected muscle groups.
Treat Multiple Body Areas
Professional applicators support programs for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, upper arms and calves.
Customize Every Session
Adjustable intensity settings allow treatments to be adapted to different muscle groups, fitness levels and client tolerance.
Expand Your Service Menu
The system supports core-conditioning, gluteal, thigh, upper-arm, calf and comprehensive body-sculpting programs.
Protect Your Investment
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and customer support.
Frequently Asked Questions
How does Emslim Gold Magnetic work?
The system delivers high-intensity electromagnetic pulses through treatment applicators positioned over selected muscle groups. These pulses produce repeated muscle contractions during the session.
What are supramaximal contractions?
The term describes intense, externally induced muscle contractions produced by electromagnetic stimulation. The contraction level depends on applicator placement and selected intensity.
How many contractions occur during a session?
The supplied specification describes approximately 20,000–30,000 programmed contractions during a 30-minute session.
Which areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, biceps, triceps and calves.
How long does a session take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 30 minutes per treatment area.
How many sessions are recommended?
A professional treatment course may include approximately 6–8 sessions over 3–4 weeks. The final schedule depends on the client’s condition and professional assessment.
Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Clients feel repeated muscle contractions that can become intense as the setting increases. The intensity should remain within the client’s tolerance.
Can muscle soreness occur?
Yes. Temporary muscle fatigue, tightness or soreness may occur, similar to the response after physical exercise.
Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness may occur.
Is professional training included?
Professional training covers machine setup, applicator placement, intensity adjustment, body-area programs, safety, cleaning and maintenance. A training certificate is provided.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included.
Add Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation to Your Business
The Emslim Gold Magnetic combines:
-
High-intensity electromagnetic stimulation
-
Programmed repeated muscle contractions
-
Adjustable treatment intensity
-
Professional multi-area body-conditioning programs
-
Three-year parts warranty and customer support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its treatment applicators, muscle programs and professional training.
Order Your Emslim Gold Magnetic and Request Pricing
Receives in 8 days.
From $2,450.00
Professional RF and EMS Body Sculpting System
Four Treatment Handles for Simultaneous Muscle Stimulation and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova is a dual-technology body-sculpting platform developed for fitness clinics, medical spas, aesthetic centers and professional beauty salons.
The system combines radiofrequency energy with electromagnetic muscle stimulation. Four treatment handles allow trained operators to create customized protocols for the abdomen, waist, flanks, upper arms, thighs, back and gluteal areas.
Adjustable RF energy and EMS intensity provide treatment flexibility for different body areas, muscle groups, fitness levels and professional objectives.
RF and EMS technology | Four treatment handles | Multiple body areas | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Functions on One Body Sculpting Platform
Radiofrequency Energy
The RF function delivers controlled thermal energy to suitable body tissue while supporting professional skin-firming and contour-refinement programs.
Common applications include:
-
Skin-firming treatments
-
Body-contour refinement
-
Abdomen treatments
-
Waist and flank programs
-
Thigh treatments
-
General body-care services
Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
The EMS function produces controlled muscle contractions in the selected treatment area.
Common applications include:
-
Muscle-stimulation programs
-
Core-activation treatments
-
Muscle-toning support
-
Fitness-oriented services
-
Body-conditioning programs
-
Maintenance sessions
Simultaneous RF and EMS Treatment
The system combines adjustable RF energy and electromagnetic stimulation within one professional platform.
Common applications include:
-
Combined body-sculpting programs
-
Muscle stimulation with skin-firming support
-
Abdomen and core treatments
-
Thigh and gluteal programs
-
Multi-session fitness packages
-
Customized body-care services
Four-Handle Multi-Area Treatment
Four treatment handles allow the operator to work on multiple suitable body areas during one session.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen and flanks
-
Left and right thighs
-
Upper arms
-
Back areas
-
Gluteal muscles
-
Customized multi-area programs
The appropriate handle placement, RF setting, EMS intensity and session duration should be selected according to the treatment area, muscle group, client condition and professional protocol.
Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Body Area
The system supports customizable body-sculpting programs. The appropriate program should be selected following consultation and client assessment.
Program 1: Abdomen and Core
A body-sculpting program designed for the abdomen and suitable core-muscle areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle stimulation
-
Core-activation support
-
Abdomen skin-firming programs
-
Central body-contour refinement
Recommended for:
-
Fitness clinics
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Post-weight-management clients
-
Clients seeking improved abdominal definition
Program 2: Waist and Flanks
A targeted program for suitable areas around the waist and sides of the body.
Recommended applications:
-
Waist-contour refinement
-
Flank treatments
-
Side-body muscle stimulation
-
Skin-firming support
Recommended for:
-
Waist-sculpting programs
-
Multi-area packages
-
Fitness-oriented treatments
-
Aesthetic body-care services
Program 3: Arms and Thighs
A customizable program for suitable upper-arm and thigh areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Thigh-conditioning programs
-
Skin-firming support
-
General limb contouring
Recommended for:
-
Arm-toning services
-
Lower-body programs
-
Fitness-clinic clients
-
Professional body-sculpting packages
Program 4: Glutes and Back
A targeted program for suitable gluteal muscles and back areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Gluteal muscle stimulation
-
Buttock-conditioning support
-
Back muscle programs
-
Body-contour refinement
Recommended for:
-
Glute-focused treatments
-
Fitness and conditioning programs
-
Multi-area body services
-
Clinics expanding their treatment menu
Dual-Energy Control for Customized Body Sculpting
The RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova provides adjustable RF energy and customizable EMS intensity. Each setting should be selected according to the treatment area, muscle group, client tolerance and professional objective.
| Treatment Setting | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Lower RF and EMS Settings | First-time clients and comfort-focused programs |
| Moderate RF and EMS Settings | General body-sculpting and muscle-stimulation treatments |
| Higher EMS Intensity | Appropriately selected fitness-oriented muscle programs |
| Customized Dual Technology | Combined RF and EMS protocols for specific body areas |
The adjustable controls give trained operators greater flexibility over thermal energy, muscle-stimulation intensity and client comfort.
New clients should begin with lower settings before RF energy or EMS intensity is increased gradually.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Four treatment handles support individual and simultaneous multi-area protocols.
Upper-Body Treatments
-
Upper arms
-
Suitable back areas
-
Flanks
-
Side body
-
Other professionally assessed areas
Core and Lower-Body Treatments
-
Abdomen
-
Core muscles
-
Waist
-
Thighs
-
Gluteal muscles
Multi-Area Treatments
-
Abdomen and flanks
-
Left and right thighs
-
Upper arms
-
Glutes and thighs
-
Customized four-handle placement
-
Professional full-body programs
Professional Body Sculpting Applications
The available treatments depend on handle placement, RF energy, EMS intensity, session duration and professional protocol.
| Treatment Area | Applicable Technology | Intended Aesthetic Application |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | RF and EMS | Core stimulation and contour support |
| Waist and flanks | RF and EMS | Waist-contour refinement |
| Upper arms | RF and EMS | Muscle stimulation and skin-firming support |
| Thighs | RF and EMS | Lower-body conditioning |
| Gluteal muscles | EMS with adjustable RF | Muscle-stimulation and contour programs |
| Back | RF and EMS | Muscle-conditioning and body-care support |
| Multiple body areas | Four-handle operation | Simultaneous professional treatment |
| Fitness clients | Customized dual technology | Body-conditioning programs |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment.
How a Professional Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s health history, fitness level, treatment objectives and contraindications. Suitable treatment areas are then identified.
2. Handle Preparation
The required treatment areas are prepared according to the operating protocol. Conductive gel is applied where required, and the treatment handles are positioned and secured correctly.
3. Parameter Selection
The operator selects the RF energy, EMS intensity, treatment duration and available preset program according to the treatment area and client tolerance.
4. RF and EMS Treatment
The system delivers controlled RF energy and electromagnetic muscle stimulation through the selected handles. A typical treatment session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After the session, the handles are removed and the treatment areas are cleaned. The client receives suitable hydration, activity and aftercare guidance.
Temporary warmth, redness, muscle fatigue, tingling or soreness may occur following treatment.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines intelligent touchscreen controls with four RF and EMS treatment handles for efficient professional operation.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Four RF and EMS treatment handles
-
Simultaneous multi-area operation
-
Adjustable RF energy
-
Customizable EMS intensity
-
Intelligent digital touchscreen
-
Preset treatment protocols
-
20–30-minute sessions
-
110V–240V power compatibility
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova |
| Product Type | Professional RF and EMS body-sculpting system |
| Technology | Radiofrequency and electromagnetic muscle stimulation |
| Treatment Handles | Four RF and EMS handles |
| Functions | Muscle stimulation, skin-firming support and body-contour refinement |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, waist, flanks, arms, thighs, back and glutes |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes |
| Suggested Treatment Course | Approximately 6–12 sessions according to professional assessment |
| RF Energy | Adjustable |
| EMS Intensity | Customizable for different muscle groups and fitness levels |
| Control Interface | Intelligent digital touchscreen |
| Treatment Programs | Preset and adjustable professional protocols |
| Safety Features | Automatic shut-off, temperature monitoring and stimulation limits |
| Power Supply | 110V–240V |
| Warranty | Three-year parts and labor warranty |
| Support | Professional training and lifetime technical support |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, four treatment handles and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova control system
-
Four RF and EMS treatment handles
-
Handle-connection components
-
Handle-positioning accessories
-
Starter conductive gel
-
Power cable
-
English user manual
-
Operating guidance
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Remote professional training
-
Machine installation guidance
-
Treatment-handle setup instructions
-
Handle-placement guidance
-
RF-energy selection
-
EMS-intensity selection
-
Body-treatment protocols
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen navigation
-
Treatment-handle connections
-
Handle placement and securing
-
RF-energy adjustment
-
EMS-intensity adjustment
-
Treatment-program selection
-
Multi-area protocols
-
Client positioning
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
A professional training certificate is provided after completion.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova is supported by a three-year parts and labor warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Intelligent touchscreen
-
Original treatment handles
-
Handle-connection components
-
RF and EMS control components
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect handle placement or operation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of cables and external components
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional RF and electromagnetic muscle-stimulation equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants in or near the treatment area
-
Active cancer
-
Severe cardiovascular conditions
-
Epilepsy
-
Active or suspected blood clots
-
Open wounds or active infections
-
Severe skin conditions in the treatment area
-
Recent surgery
-
Abdominal or inguinal hernia
-
Severe muscle or nerve disorders
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
Treatment handles must not be positioned over the head, front or side of the neck, heart, implanted devices or other prohibited areas.
RF temperature, EMS intensity and client comfort must be monitored throughout the session.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Fitness clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Professional beauty salons
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Gyms and wellness centers
-
Trained body-sculpting practitioners
-
Qualified healthcare professionals
-
Businesses expanding their fitness services
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova?
Combine Two Technologies
The system combines adjustable radiofrequency energy and electromagnetic muscle stimulation in one professional platform.
Treat Multiple Body Areas
Four treatment handles support individual or simultaneous protocols for the abdomen, flanks, arms, thighs, back and gluteal areas.
Customize Every Session
Adjustable RF energy, EMS intensity and preset treatment programs allow sessions to be adapted to different body areas and client fitness levels.
Expand Your Service Menu
The system can support muscle-stimulation programs, skin-firming services, body-contour treatments and fitness-oriented packages.
Protect Your Investment
The machine includes a three-year parts and labor warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and lifetime technical support.
Frequently Asked Questions
How does the RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova work?
The system combines controlled radiofrequency energy with electromagnetic stimulation. RF supports thermal body-care and skin-firming programs, while EMS produces controlled contractions in selected muscle groups.
How is this system different from an EMS-only machine?
An EMS-only machine provides muscle stimulation. The EMSlim Nova combines EMS with adjustable radiofrequency energy in one system for integrated muscle and body-care protocols.
What does the four-handle design provide?
Four handles allow operators to treat multiple suitable body areas during one session. Handle placement depends on the selected protocol and client assessment.
Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the abdomen, waist, flanks, upper arms, thighs, gluteal muscles and selected back areas.
How long does a treatment take?
A typical session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes. The exact duration depends on the treatment area, handle placement, selected program and professional protocol.
How many sessions are recommended?
A professional treatment course may include approximately 6–12 sessions. The final number and frequency depend on the client’s condition, goals and response.
Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Clients commonly feel warmth from RF energy and controlled muscle contractions from EMS. Settings should be adjusted to remain within the client’s tolerance.
Can muscle soreness occur?
Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness may occur after treatment, particularly during the first sessions or when higher EMS intensity is used.
Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary warmth, redness, fatigue or muscle soreness may occur.
Is professional training included?
Remote professional training covers system setup, handle placement, RF settings, EMS intensity, treatment protocols, cleaning, maintenance and safety. A training certificate is provided.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts and labor warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included.
Add RF and EMS Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova combines:
-
Radiofrequency and EMS technology
-
Four simultaneous treatment handles
-
Adjustable energy and intensity controls
-
Professional multi-area body applications
-
Three-year warranty and lifetime support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its treatment handles, professional protocols and training support.
Order Your RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova and Request a Quote
Receives in 8 days.
$2,169.00
Professional Six-Handle Cryolipolysis and Cavitation System
Dual-Technology Platform for Multi-Area Fat Reduction and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine is a professional body-contouring system that combines 360° fat-freezing technology with 40K–80K ultrasonic cavitation.
Its six-handle configuration supports simultaneous treatment across multiple suitable body areas. Small, medium, large, chin, arm, and thigh applicators allow professionals to create customized programs for different anatomical areas and client objectives.
With adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C, 40K–80K cavitation, optional RF and vacuum functions, real-time temperature monitoring, and a 12-inch intelligent touchscreen, the system is designed for premium body-contouring clinics, medical spas, slimming centers, and high-volume wellness facilities.
360° cryolipolysis | 40K–80K cavitation | Six-handle operation | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
360° Cryolipolysis Cooling
The cryolipolysis function delivers controlled cooling around suitable subcutaneous tissue held within the applicator chamber.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen treatments
-
Waist and flank contouring
-
Upper-arm programs
-
Inner- and outer-thigh treatments
-
Back and bra-line treatments
-
Suitable submental-area treatments
40K–80K Ultrasonic Cavitation
The cavitation function delivers ultrasonic energy to suitable body areas as part of a professional contouring program.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Waistline treatments
-
Thigh programs
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Buttock-area treatments
-
Cellulite-appearance programs
Optional Radiofrequency and Vacuum
Available RF and vacuum functions can support skin-firming, tissue-massage, and combined body-care programs.
Common applications include:
-
Body skin-firming treatments
-
Vacuum massage
-
Tissue mobilization
-
Cellulite-appearance care
-
Post-cavitation RF treatments
-
Combined body-contouring programs
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Cryolipolysis Fat-Freezing Program
Uses the appropriate 360° cooling applicator for targeted treatment of suitable subcutaneous tissue.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Waist and flank treatments
-
Back and bra-line programs
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Thigh-area treatments
Recommended for:
-
Clients with suitable pinchable subcutaneous fat
-
Clients seeking localized body contouring
-
Clients with stable and realistic treatment goals
Ultrasonic Cavitation Program
Uses the selected 40K–80K cavitation configuration for professional body-contouring treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen and waist programs
-
Upper-arm treatments
-
Thigh contouring
-
Buttock-area treatments
-
Cellulite-appearance care
Recommended for:
-
Clients suitable for ultrasonic body treatments
-
Clients seeking non-invasive contouring
-
Clients combining treatment with healthy lifestyle habits
Combined Cryolipolysis and Cavitation Program
Incorporates both technologies within a professionally planned treatment course or suitable sequence.
Recommended applications:
-
Multi-stage body contouring
-
Abdomen and thigh programs
-
Waist and flank treatments
-
Cellulite-appearance care
-
Comprehensive body-shaping programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients suitable for both technologies
-
Clients with several treatment objectives
-
Clinics offering advanced combination services
Multi-Area Treatment Program
Uses the six-handle configuration to treat several suitable areas during the same professionally monitored appointment.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen and thighs
-
Arms and waist
-
Bilateral thigh treatment
-
Back and flank programs
-
Customized multi-area treatments
Recommended for:
-
Clients requiring several treatment areas
-
High-volume professional facilities
-
Clients receiving comprehensive body-contouring programs
Adjustable Cooling, Cavitation, and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine allows practitioners to personalize treatments according to the selected technology, applicator, treatment area, and client tolerance.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Cryolipolysis Technology | 360° surround cooling | Controlled fat-freezing treatment |
| Cooling Range | 5°C to −15°C | Adjustable cooling temperature |
| Cavitation Frequency | 40K–80K | Ultrasonic body-contouring programs |
| Treatment Handles | Six | Multi-area treatment capability |
| Optional Functions | RF and vacuum | Skin-firming and massage support |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30–60 minutes | Customized treatment planning |
| Treatment Course | Commonly one to three sessions per area | Progressive body-contouring program |
| Control System | 12-inch touchscreen | Protocol and parameter management |
Cooling temperature, suction, cavitation frequency, treatment duration, and technology sequence should follow the supplied protocols and professional assessment.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen, Waist, and Flanks
Different applicator sizes and treatment technologies support customized midsection programs.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-abdomen contouring
-
Lower-abdomen contouring
-
Waistline definition
-
Love-handle treatments
-
General midsection shaping
Arms, Back, and Buttocks
Suitable handles can be selected for localized upper-body and posterior body areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Bra-line treatments
-
Upper- and lower-back programs
-
Buttock-area treatments
-
Cellulite-appearance care
Thighs and Double Chin
Specialized applicators support professionally assessed lower-body and submental treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Inner-thigh contouring
-
Outer-thigh treatments
-
Upper-leg shaping
-
Double-chin-area contouring
-
Bilateral lower-body programs
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Technology or Applicator |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Localized midsection contouring | Cryolipolysis or cavitation |
| Waist and Flanks | Waistline and love-handle treatment | Suitable cryolipolysis applicator |
| Upper Arms | Localized arm contouring | Arm applicator or cavitation |
| Back and Bra Line | Targeted back-area treatment | Suitable cryolipolysis applicator |
| Inner Thighs | Lower-body contouring | Thigh applicator |
| Outer Thighs | Thigh contouring and texture care | Cryolipolysis or cavitation |
| Buttocks | Contouring and cellulite-appearance care | Cavitation and optional RF |
| Double Chin | Submental-area treatment | Specialized chin applicator |
The exact applicator and technology should be selected according to client suitability and the supplied professional protocols.
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, body-contouring objectives, target areas, previous procedures, implants, skin condition, and possible contraindications for cryolipolysis, cavitation, RF, and vacuum.
Step 2: Technology and Applicator Selection
Select cryolipolysis, cavitation, or a suitable combination. Choose applicators that match the tissue size, shape, and anatomical location.
Step 3: Skin Protection and Setup
For cryolipolysis, apply a new approved antifreeze membrane over each complete treatment area. For cavitation or RF, apply the appropriate conductive treatment medium.
Step 4: Active Treatment
Begin the selected program for approximately 30–60 minutes. Monitor temperature, applicator contact, suction, skin response, and client comfort throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the applicators and treatment medium, inspect the skin, and perform the recommended massage when appropriate. Document the settings and provide aftercare guidance.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine combines dual-technology body contouring with simultaneous multi-area capability.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional 360° cryolipolysis technology
-
40K–80K ultrasonic cavitation
-
Six-handle configuration
-
Simultaneous multi-area treatment
-
Adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C
-
Small, medium, large, chin, arm, and thigh applicators
-
Optional RF and vacuum functions
-
Treatments for multiple body areas
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Real-time temperature monitoring
-
Antifreeze membrane protection
-
Approximately 30–60-minute sessions
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine |
| Core Technologies | 360° cryolipolysis and ultrasonic cavitation |
| Cooling Range | 5°C to −15°C adjustable |
| Cavitation Frequency | 40K–80K |
| Additional Functions | Optional RF and vacuum |
| Treatment Handles | Six |
| Applicator Types | Small, medium, large, chin, arm, and thigh |
| Operation | Simultaneous multi-area treatment |
| Primary Functions | Fat reduction, body contouring, cellulite-appearance care, and skin-firming support |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, waist, arms, thighs, back, buttocks, and double chin |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30–60 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Commonly one to three sessions per area |
| Treatment Interval | Approximately four to six weeks for cryolipolysis |
| Display | 12-inch intelligent touchscreen |
| Temperature Monitoring | Real-time |
| Safety Features | Antifreeze membranes and intelligent monitoring |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
The supplied product information lists potential fat-reduction figures of 20–40% per treated area. These figures should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes because individual results vary.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation main unit
-
6 × Treatment applicators
-
Small, medium, and large applicator configurations
-
Chin applicator
-
Arm applicator
-
Thigh applicator
-
Integrated 40K–80K cavitation function
-
Optional RF and vacuum functions according to configuration
-
Applicator connection hoses and cables
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Real-time temperature-monitoring system
-
Antifreeze membranes and treatment-medium starter supply
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
The final handle allocation and optional RF or vacuum configuration should follow the selected product package.
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Professional video training
-
Cryolipolysis applicator-selection guidance
-
Multi-handle operation guidance
-
Antifreeze membrane guidance
-
Cooling-temperature and suction guidance
-
40K–80K cavitation protocols
-
Optional RF and vacuum protocols
-
Body-area treatment guidance
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Aftercare instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Tissue and treatment-area assessment
-
Cryolipolysis applicator selection
-
Six-handle treatment planning
-
Correct antifreeze membrane placement
-
Cooling-temperature and suction adjustment
-
Cavitation frequency and operation
-
Optional RF and vacuum operation
-
Combined-treatment planning
-
Client monitoring
-
Post-treatment massage
-
Aftercare guidance
-
Equipment cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Antifreeze membranes, treatment gels, applicator seals, hoses, filters, conductive media, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, cold injury caused by incorrect membrane placement, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A detailed consultation and health-history review must be completed before every treatment. The system should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Cryolipolysis may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or breastfeeding
-
Cryoglobulinemia
-
Cold agglutinin disease
-
Paroxysmal cold hemoglobinuria
-
Severe cold sensitivity or cold urticaria
-
Raynaud’s disease or serious circulation disorders
-
Active hernia within or near the treatment area
-
Active infection or open wounds
-
Reduced or impaired sensation
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
Cavitation, RF, or vacuum may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Serious liver or kidney conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Active cancer or tumors
-
Severe skin conditions
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
The system is intended for localized body contouring and should not be presented as a treatment for obesity or a replacement for weight management.
Cryolipolysis carries risks, including cold injury, prolonged numbness, bruising, contour irregularity, pain, and rare paradoxical adipose hyperplasia. Clients must receive appropriate risk information and provide informed consent.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, applicators, hoses, seals, cables, and accessories before use.
-
Screen the client for every selected technology.
-
Select the correct applicator and treatment mode.
-
Use a new approved antifreeze membrane for each cryolipolysis application.
-
Ensure each membrane covers the complete cooling area.
-
Use the correct conductive medium for cavitation or RF.
-
Begin with professionally selected settings.
-
Monitor temperature, applicator contact, suction, skin condition, and comfort.
-
Monitor every active treatment area continuously.
-
Keep cavitation and RF handpieces moving during treatment.
-
Do not treat prohibited or unsuitable anatomical areas.
-
Record applicators, technologies, settings, duration, and treatment areas.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin changes occur.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Premium body-contouring clinics
-
Slimming centers
-
Medical spas
-
Beauty salons
-
Wellness centers
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Professional spas
-
High-volume treatment facilities
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before providing cryolipolysis, cavitation, RF, or vacuum treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine?
Dual Body-Contouring Technologies
The system combines 360° cryolipolysis with 40K–80K ultrasonic cavitation on one professional platform.
Six-Handle Multi-Area Operation
Six specialized applicators support simultaneous treatment across multiple suitable body areas.
Optional RF and Vacuum Functions
Available configurations can add skin-firming, suction massage, and combined body-care services.
Intelligent Monitoring and Controls
The 12-inch touchscreen, real-time temperature monitoring, and antifreeze membrane protocols support professional operation.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes dual-technology training, multi-handle protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine?
It is a professional body-contouring system combining 360° cryolipolysis, 40K–80K ultrasonic cavitation, and six-handle multi-area operation.
What is the difference between cryolipolysis and cavitation?
Cryolipolysis uses controlled cooling on suitable subcutaneous fat tissue. Cavitation delivers ultrasonic energy as part of a professional body-contouring program.
Can cryolipolysis and cavitation be combined?
Yes. Suitable clients may receive both technologies within a professionally designed course or treatment sequence. Compatibility and timing should follow the supplied protocols.
Why does the machine have six handles?
The six-handle configuration provides different applicator sizes and supports simultaneous treatment across multiple suitable body areas.
Can all six handles operate simultaneously?
The supplied product information describes simultaneous multi-area operation. The number and combination of active handles should follow the machine configuration, operating manual, and professional training.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, waist, flanks, upper arms, thighs, back, buttocks, and suitable double-chin areas.
What cooling temperatures are available?
The cryolipolysis function provides adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C.
What cavitation frequencies are available?
The machine provides ultrasonic cavitation within the supplied 40K–80K range.
How long does one treatment take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the selected technology, number of areas, and professional protocol.
How many sessions are recommended?
One to three sessions per area, commonly spaced four to six weeks apart. Cavitation frequency should follow its separate professional protocol.
When may clients notice changes?
The changes may become visible after approximately three to four weeks, with progressive changes over eight to twelve weeks.
Is the treatment painful?
Cryolipolysis commonly produces suction, strong cooling, pulling, and temporary numbness. Cavitation generally produces vibration and may create an audible sensation. Individual comfort varies.
Is there downtime?
Many clients can resume normal activities after treatment. Temporary redness, swelling, bruising, tenderness, tingling, cramping, or numbness may occur.
Are treated fat cells permanently removed?
Fat cells processed after cryolipolysis do not regenerate in the same way. However, remaining fat cells can enlarge with weight gain, and individual contour changes are not guaranteed to be permanent.
Is this a weight-loss machine?
No. The system is intended for localized body contouring and is not a treatment for obesity or a replacement for nutrition, exercise, or medical weight management.
What performance figures are supplied?
The supplied product information lists potential fat-reduction figures of 20–40% per treated area. These figures are not guaranteed and vary by client and protocol.
Are RF and vacuum included?
RF and vacuum are listed as optional functions. Their inclusion should be confirmed when selecting the final machine configuration.
What certificates are included?
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers cryolipolysis, cavitation, multi-handle operation, membrane placement, cooling and suction settings, optional RF and vacuum functions, aftercare, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Dual-Technology Multi-Area Body Contouring to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine enables premium clinics, medical spas, and slimming centers to provide cryolipolysis and cavitation treatments across multiple suitable body areas.
Five key benefits:
-
360° cryolipolysis and 40K–80K ultrasonic cavitation
-
Six specialized handles for multi-area treatments
-
Adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C
-
A 12-inch touchscreen with real-time temperature monitoring
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, handle configuration, optional RF and vacuum functions, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$999.00
Professional RF Microneedling Device
Controlled-Depth Skin Rejuvenation, Collagen Remodeling, and Tightening System
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device is a professional skin-rejuvenation system combining controlled-depth microneedling with radiofrequency energy.
Adjustable microneedles penetrate the skin at depths from 0.5mm to 4.0mm while delivering controlled RF energy into the targeted tissue. This dual action supports the skin’s natural renewal response and stimulates collagen and elastin remodeling.
With four interchangeable cartridge options, adjustable RF intensity, intelligent touchscreen controls, and both facial and body applications, the system is designed for dermatology practices, medical spas, and advanced aesthetic clinics operating within local professional requirements.
Microneedling and RF | 0.5–4.0mm Adjustable Depth | Four Cartridge Options | CE and ISO Certificates | Three-Year Warranty
Three Professional Technologies on One Platform
Controlled-Depth Microneedling
The device creates controlled microchannels at carefully selected depths. This process supports the skin’s natural repair response and encourages collagen and elastin production.
Common applications include:
-
Fine-line and wrinkle treatments
-
Acne-scar improvement
-
Surgical-scar treatments
-
Stretch-mark improvement
-
Enlarged-pore care
-
Skin-texture refinement
Radiofrequency Dermal Heating
RF energy is delivered through the microneedles into the selected tissue depth. This controlled thermal action supports deeper collagen remodeling while limiting unnecessary surface exposure.
Common applications include:
-
Skin-tightening treatments
-
Collagen-remodeling programs
-
Firmness and elasticity support
-
Facial and neck rejuvenation
-
Texture improvement
-
Body skin-firming treatments
Interchangeable Cartridge Technology
Four cartridge configurations allow professionals to adapt treatments to delicate facial zones, complete facial areas, the neck and décolleté, or larger body regions.
Common applications include:
-
Precision under-eye treatments
-
Full-face rejuvenation
-
Face and neck protocols
-
Décolleté treatments
-
Abdominal stretch-mark care
-
Thigh and arm rejuvenation
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Anti-Aging and Skin-Tightening Program
A professional facial-rejuvenation protocol designed to address fine lines, wrinkles, reduced elasticity, and skin laxity.
Recommended applications: Face, jawline, neck, and décolleté.
Recommended for: Suitable clients seeking improved firmness, smoother-looking skin, and progressive collagen remodeling.
Scar and Texture-Refinement Program
A customized microneedling and RF protocol developed to improve the appearance of acne scars, selected surgical scars, and uneven texture.
Recommended applications: Face and compatible body areas containing fully healed scars.
Recommended for: Clients seeking gradual improvement in scar appearance, texture, and overall skin smoothness.
Stretch-Mark and Body-Rejuvenation Program
A larger-area protocol using the appropriate cartridge and needle depth for body skin concerns.
Recommended applications: Abdomen, thighs, and upper arms.
Recommended for: Clients seeking improvement in the appearance of stretch marks, uneven body texture, or reduced skin firmness.
Maintenance and Collagen-Support Program
A follow-up treatment designed to support previously achieved rejuvenation results and continued collagen stimulation.
Recommended applications: Previously treated facial or body areas.
Recommended for: Clients who have completed an initial treatment course and require periodic maintenance based on professional assessment.
Adjustable Needle Depth and RF Treatment Settings
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Needle Depth | Adjustable from 0.5mm to 4.0mm | Adapts penetration to the skin concern, treatment area, and professional protocol |
| RF Intensity | Adjustable energy control | Customizes thermal delivery according to skin condition and tolerance |
| 10-Pin Cartridge | Precision cartridge | Treats small and delicate facial areas |
| 25-Pin Cartridge | Standard facial cartridge | Supports complete facial rejuvenation |
| 36-Pin Cartridge | Extended-coverage cartridge | Treats the face, neck, and décolleté efficiently |
| 49-Pin Cartridge | Large-area body cartridge | Supports stretch-mark and body-rejuvenation treatments |
| Treatment Time | Approximately 20–40 minutes | Allows sessions to be adapted to the treatment area |
| Treatment Course | Approximately 3–6 sessions | Supports progressive collagen remodeling |
| Session Interval | Approximately 4–6 weeks | Allows suitable skin-recovery time between treatments |
| Control Interface | Intelligent touchscreen | Provides convenient depth, intensity, and program control |
| Power Supply | 110V/220V compatibility | Supports use in different international markets |
Needle depth and RF intensity must be selected according to the client’s skin condition, treatment area, sensitivity, medical history, and applicable professional protocol. Deeper settings are not automatically better and should only be used when clinically appropriate.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Facial Areas
The 10-pin and 25-pin cartridges support precision and full-face treatments across suitable facial zones.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Fine-line reduction
-
Wrinkle improvement
-
Acne-scar care
-
Enlarged-pore refinement
-
Skin-texture improvement
-
Firmness and elasticity support
-
More even-looking skin tone
Neck and Décolleté Areas
The 25-pin or 36-pin cartridge can support carefully controlled treatments across suitable neck and upper-chest areas.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Neck-line improvement
-
Skin-firming support
-
Décolleté rejuvenation
-
Texture refinement
-
Collagen stimulation
-
Improved elasticity
Body Areas
The 36-pin and 49-pin cartridges provide wider coverage for compatible body-treatment zones.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Stretch-mark improvement
-
Abdominal skin rejuvenation
-
Thigh-texture refinement
-
Upper-arm firming
-
Selected scar treatments
-
Smoother-looking body skin
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Application | Primary Area | Professional Objective |
|---|---|---|
| Fine-Line Treatment | Face and eye contour | Improve the appearance of superficial lines |
| Wrinkle Reduction | Face and neck | Support collagen remodeling and smoother-looking skin |
| Acne-Scar Care | Face | Improve the appearance of fully healed acne scars |
| Surgical-Scar Care | Suitable healed scars | Support gradual texture remodeling |
| Skin Tightening | Face, neck, abdomen, and arms | Improve the appearance of firmness and elasticity |
| Pore Refinement | Face | Reduce the visible appearance of enlarged pores |
| Texture Improvement | Face and body | Support smoother and more even-looking skin |
| Stretch-Mark Care | Abdomen, thighs, and arms | Improve the appearance of stretch marks |
| Décolleté Rejuvenation | Upper chest | Address texture, lines, and reduced firmness |
| Collagen Maintenance | Previously treated areas | Support ongoing skin-renewal programs |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s skin concerns, medical history, medications, previous procedures, healing response, sun exposure, and possible contraindications.
Step 2: Skin Assessment
Evaluate skin type, treatment area, concern severity, sensitivity, and suitability. Select the appropriate cartridge, needle depth, RF intensity, and treatment pattern.
Step 3: Skin Preparation
Cleanse and disinfect the treatment area according to clinical protocol. Apply a suitable topical anesthetic when professionally indicated and permitted, then remove it completely before treatment.
Step 4: Controlled RF Microneedling Treatment
Install a new sterile cartridge, confirm the selected settings, and perform the treatment using consistent passes and controlled coverage. A typical session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes.
Step 5: Post-Treatment Care
Apply professionally appropriate post-treatment products and provide written aftercare instructions covering sun protection, cleansing, hydration, skincare restrictions, and expected temporary reactions.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device combines adjustable depth, controlled RF intensity, four cartridge options, and intelligent operation for professional skin-rejuvenation services.
Key advantages include:
-
Combined microneedling and RF technology
-
Adjustable 0.5–4.0mm needle depth
-
Adjustable radiofrequency intensity
-
Four interchangeable cartridge configurations
-
Precision facial and larger body applications
-
Approximately 20–40-minute sessions
-
Structured 3–6-session treatment courses
-
Intelligent touchscreen operation
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
Professional training and after-sales support
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device |
| Technology | Controlled-depth microneedling and radiofrequency energy |
| Needle-Depth Range | Adjustable from 0.5mm to 4.0mm |
| RF Energy | Adjustable intensity control |
| Cartridge Options | 10-pin, 25-pin, 36-pin, and 49-pin |
| 10-Pin Application | Under-eye area, nose, mouth area, small scars, and precision treatments |
| 25-Pin Application | Standard full-face rejuvenation and wrinkle treatments |
| 36-Pin Application | Face, neck, décolleté, and extended treatment zones |
| 49-Pin Application | Abdomen, thighs, arms, stretch marks, and larger body areas |
| Treatment Areas | Face, neck, décolleté, abdomen, thighs, and arms |
| Primary Functions | Skin rejuvenation, wrinkle reduction, scar care, stretch-mark improvement, skin tightening, pore refinement, and texture improvement |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–40 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Approximately 3–6 sessions |
| Recommended Interval | Approximately 4–6 weeks |
| Expected Downtime | Commonly 1–2 days of temporary redness or swelling |
| Results Duration | Supplied estimate of approximately 12–18 months with suitable maintenance |
| Display and Controls | Intelligent touchscreen interface |
| Power Supply | 110V/220V dual compatibility |
| Certificates | CE and ISO |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| After-Sales Service | Professional training and technical support |
Treatment response, downtime, improvement timeline, and result duration vary according to skin condition, age, treatment depth, RF intensity, treatment course, healing response, lifestyle, sun exposure, and aftercare compliance. Results should not be presented as guaranteed.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device
-
Compatible professional treatment handpiece
-
Multiple interchangeable needle cartridges
-
10-pin cartridge configuration
-
25-pin cartridge configuration
-
36-pin cartridge configuration
-
49-pin cartridge configuration
-
1 × Compatible power cable
-
Standard operating accessories
-
1 × Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Machine setup guide
-
Touchscreen operating instructions
-
Cartridge-selection guidance
-
Needle-depth guidance
-
RF-setting guidance
-
Treatment-protocol information
-
Contraindication and safety instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Professional operator training
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional operating guidance to help qualified users understand the machine’s setup, treatment settings, cartridge selection, and maintenance requirements.
Training and support cover:
-
Machine installation and initial setup
-
Intelligent touchscreen operation
-
Treatment-handpiece preparation
-
Sterile cartridge installation
-
Cartridge selection by treatment area
-
Needle-depth adjustment
-
RF-intensity selection
-
Treatment-pattern guidance
-
Client consultation and skin assessment
-
Contraindication screening
-
Infection-control procedures
-
Post-treatment care
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Troubleshooting assistance
Training supplied with the machine does not replace any professional license, medical supervision, infection-control qualification, or legal authorization required in the operator’s location.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device includes a three-year professional warranty and after-sales technical support.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty provides support for eligible machine components and manufacturing-related faults arising under normal professional operating conditions. Technical assessment may be required before repair guidance or replacement parts are supplied.
Warranty support includes:
-
Remote technical diagnosis
-
Operating and troubleshooting assistance
-
Support for eligible replacement parts
-
Repair instructions
-
Maintenance recommendations
-
After-sales communication during the warranty period
Technical Support Process
-
Contact Wikbeauty with the machine model and order information.
-
Provide a detailed description of the technical problem.
-
Submit clear photographs or a short video when requested.
-
Allow the technical team to diagnose the issue.
-
Follow the supplied troubleshooting or repair instructions.
-
Receive eligible replacement-part support when required.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by:
-
Incorrect operation or treatment setup
-
Unauthorized modification or repair
-
Accidental impact or physical damage
-
Improper voltage or electrical installation
-
Liquid damage or unsuitable storage
-
Failure to follow cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Use of incompatible cartridges or accessories
-
Normal wear of handpieces, cables, and consumable components
-
Used or disposable needle cartridges
-
Shipping or relocation damage occurring after delivery
Safety and Contraindications
RF microneedling is a professional procedure requiring appropriate training, infection-control practices, and compliance with local licensing or medical-supervision requirements.
Treatment may be unsuitable for clients with:
-
Active skin infection
-
Herpes outbreak
-
Open wounds or sores
-
Active inflammation in the treatment area
-
Recent sunburn or excessive sun exposure
-
Pregnancy or breastfeeding
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Severe keloid-scarring tendency
-
Blood-clotting or bleeding disorders
-
Current anticoagulant treatment without medical clearance
-
Autoimmune conditions affecting healing
-
Uncontrolled diabetes
-
Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment
-
Recent isotretinoin use
-
Reduced skin sensation
-
Poor wound-healing history
-
Recent injectable or surgical treatment in the area
-
Any condition requiring professional medical clearance
A waiting period of approximately 6–12 months after isotretinoin use may be appropriate, but the client must follow the advice of their prescribing healthcare professional.
Operating Precautions
-
Complete a detailed consultation and skin assessment.
-
Confirm the operator is legally permitted to perform RF microneedling.
-
Obtain informed consent before treatment.
-
Document the client’s medical history and current medications.
-
Examine the skin for infection, wounds, irritation, and recent sun exposure.
-
Use a new, sterile, single-use needle cartridge for every client and session.
-
Never reuse disposable needle cartridges.
-
Clean and disinfect the handpiece and treatment environment properly.
-
Select needle depth according to the treatment area and concern.
-
Adjust RF intensity according to skin response and tolerance.
-
Do not assume that deeper penetration produces better results.
-
Monitor the skin continuously during treatment.
-
Stop treatment if an unexpected reaction occurs.
-
Avoid overlapping passes beyond the professional protocol.
-
Follow appropriate sharps-disposal procedures.
-
Provide complete written aftercare guidance.
-
Maintain accurate treatment records.
-
Follow all local infection-control and clinical-waste requirements.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device is intended for appropriately qualified users, which may include:
-
Dermatology practices
-
Medical spas
-
Aesthetic medical clinics
-
Licensed healthcare professionals
-
Physicians
-
Qualified nurses or nurse practitioners
-
Properly trained aesthetic practitioners under required supervision
-
Advanced beauty clinics where legally permitted
Licensing, supervision, insurance, and scope-of-practice requirements vary by location. Buyers and operators are responsible for confirming all applicable local requirements before providing treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device?
1. Combined Microneedling and RF Technology
The system combines controlled micro-injury with targeted RF energy to support both surface renewal and deeper collagen remodeling.
2. Adjustable 0.5–4.0mm Needle Depth
Variable penetration enables qualified professionals to adapt treatments to different skin concerns, areas, and protocols.
3. Four Specialized Cartridge Options
The 10-pin, 25-pin, 36-pin, and 49-pin configurations support precision facial work, full-face rejuvenation, extended areas, and body treatments.
4. Facial and Body Treatment Capability
One platform supports treatments for the face, neck, décolleté, abdomen, thighs, and upper arms.
5. Certified Quality and Professional Support
The device includes CE and ISO certificates, professional operating guidance, technical support, and a three-year warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How does RF microneedling work?
The device inserts microneedles at a controlled depth while delivering RF energy into the targeted tissue. Microneedling supports the skin’s natural repair response, while RF heating promotes deeper collagen and elastin remodeling.
Q: How is RF microneedling different from standard microneedling?
Standard microneedling creates controlled microchannels. RF microneedling adds thermal energy at the selected tissue depth, providing an additional collagen-remodeling and skin-firming action.
Q: What needle depths are available?
The needle depth is adjustable from approximately 0.5mm to 4.0mm.
Q: Is the same needle depth used for every treatment?
No. Depth must be selected according to the treatment area, skin thickness, concern, client sensitivity, and professional protocol.
Q: Which cartridges are included?
The system includes 10-pin, 25-pin, 36-pin, and 49-pin cartridge options.
Q: What is the 10-pin cartridge used for?
The 10-pin cartridge supports precise treatment of small or delicate areas, including selected under-eye, nose, mouth, and small-scar applications.
Q: What is the 25-pin cartridge used for?
The 25-pin cartridge is designed for standard full-face rejuvenation, wrinkle care, skin tightening, and general texture improvement.
Q: What is the 36-pin cartridge used for?
The 36-pin cartridge provides wider coverage for the face, neck, décolleté, and other extended treatment zones.
Q: What is the 49-pin cartridge used for?
The 49-pin cartridge supports larger body areas such as the abdomen, thighs, and upper arms, including stretch-mark treatments.
Q: Which skin concerns can the machine address?
Professional applications include fine lines, wrinkles, acne scars, selected surgical scars, stretch marks, enlarged pores, reduced firmness, and uneven texture.
Q: Which areas can be treated?
Compatible areas include the face, neck, décolleté, abdomen, thighs, and upper arms.
Q: How long does a session take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes, excluding consultation, cleansing, and topical-anesthetic time.
Q: Is topical anesthetic required?
A topical anesthetic may be used when professionally appropriate and legally permitted. The operator must follow the product instructions and local requirements.
Q: Is the treatment painful?
Client experience varies. With suitable preparation and correctly selected settings, most clients describe temporary pressure, warmth, or prickling rather than severe pain.
Q: How many sessions are recommended?
A typical starting course includes approximately 3–6 sessions.
Q: How far apart should treatments be scheduled?
Sessions are commonly spaced approximately 4–6 weeks apart to allow the skin to recover and remodel.
Q: Is there downtime?
Temporary redness, sensitivity, or mild swelling may last approximately 1–2 days. Recovery varies according to the treatment depth, RF intensity, area, and individual response.
Q: When can clients expect visible changes?
Some clients notice early texture improvements after initial sessions. Collagen remodeling develops gradually, with more visible changes commonly appearing over several weeks.
Q: How long can results last?
The supplied estimate is approximately 12–18 months with suitable skincare and maintenance. Individual result duration varies.
Q: Is RF microneedling suitable for every skin tone?
Adjustable settings may allow trained professionals to treat a broad range of skin tones. However, suitability and settings must be determined through an individual assessment.
Q: Can active acne be treated?
Treatment should not be performed over active infection, open lesions, or significant inflammation. The client should be assessed by an appropriately qualified professional.
Q: Can the device be used on scars?
It can support treatments for fully healed acne scars and selected surgical scars. Active wounds and incompletely healed tissue must not be treated.
Q: Are cartridges reusable?
Needle cartridges should be sterile and single-use. A new cartridge must be used for every client and every treatment session.
Q: What aftercare is recommended?
Clients should follow the professional aftercare plan, use broad-spectrum SPF 30 or higher, avoid harsh skincare for approximately 3–5 days, and avoid swimming, saunas, and excessive heat for at least 48 hours.
Q: Who can operate the device?
The operator must have the qualifications, training, licensing, supervision, and insurance required in the location where treatments are provided.
Q: Does training come with the machine?
Yes. Professional machine-operation and treatment guidance are included. This training does not replace legally required clinical qualifications or licenses.
Q: What certificates are included?
The device is supplied with CE and ISO certificates.
Q: What warranty is provided?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with after-sales technical support.
Add Professional RF Microneedling to Your Clinic
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device provides qualified clinics and aesthetic professionals with an adjustable platform for skin rejuvenation, collagen remodeling, wrinkle care, scar improvement, stretch-mark treatments, and skin tightening.
Five key benefits:
-
Combined microneedling and radiofrequency technology
-
Adjustable needle depth from 0.5mm to 4.0mm
-
Four interchangeable cartridge configurations
-
Facial, neck, décolleté, and body applications
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, ordering information, professional training details, and technical support.
Receives in 8 days.
$1,799.00
Professional 4D HIFU Facial and Body Treatment System
Multi-Depth Focused Ultrasound for Skin Tightening, Facial Lifting, and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine is a professional non-invasive aesthetic system developed for facial lifting, wrinkle care, skin tightening, collagen stimulation, and body-contouring treatments.
High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound technology delivers concentrated ultrasound energy at selected tissue depths. Its multi-depth cartridge system supports customized treatments for superficial facial areas, deeper facial structures, and suitable body areas.
With treatment depths from 1.5mm to 13mm, eight treatment cartridges, adjustable energy settings, intelligent touchscreen controls, and dual-voltage compatibility, the system is suitable for beauty salons, aesthetic clinics, and professional wellness centers.
4D HIFU technology | 1.5–13mm treatment depths | Eight cartridges | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
Multi-Depth Focused Ultrasound
The system delivers focused ultrasound energy at selected depths without requiring incisions or injectable products. Different cartridges allow professionals to target superficial, middle, and deeper tissue levels.
Common applications include:
-
Facial skin tightening
-
Fine-line and wrinkle care
-
Jawline contouring
-
Neck and décolletage treatments
-
Body skin-firming programs
-
Professional body-contouring treatments
Facial Lifting and Collagen Stimulation
Facial cartridges are designed to deliver focused ultrasound energy at depths suitable for different layers of facial tissue.
Common applications include:
-
Reduced facial firmness
-
Fine lines and wrinkles
-
Lower-face laxity
-
Jawline definition
-
Double-chin-area treatments
-
Neck skin tightening
Body Contouring and Skin Firming
Deeper cartridge configurations support professional treatments for suitable body areas.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Upper-arm treatments
-
Thigh contouring
-
Buttock-area programs
-
Body skin tightening
-
Cellulite-appearance improvement
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Facial-Rejuvenation Program
Uses suitable facial cartridges and customized energy settings for general facial lifting and skin-rejuvenation treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Fine lines and wrinkles
-
Reduced facial firmness
-
Uneven-looking skin texture
-
Early signs of aging
-
General collagen-stimulation programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking non-invasive facial rejuvenation
-
Clients concerned about visible signs of aging
-
Clients wanting progressive skin-quality improvement
Facial-Lifting and Jawline Program
Uses suitable middle and deeper facial treatment depths to support lower-face tightening and contour definition.
Recommended applications:
-
Lower-face laxity
-
Reduced jawline definition
-
Jowl-area treatments
-
Double-chin concerns
-
Neck skin tightening
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking a firmer-looking lower face
-
Clients concerned about facial contours
-
Clients interested in non-surgical lifting programs
Body-Contouring Program
Uses deeper body cartridges for suitable body areas requiring contouring and skin-firming treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Upper-arm treatments
-
Thigh contouring
-
Buttock-area programs
-
Body skin tightening
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about localized body areas
-
Clients seeking non-invasive body treatments
-
Clients combining treatment with healthy lifestyle habits
Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment following completion of the client’s initial HIFU program.
Recommended applications:
-
Facial-lifting maintenance
-
Skin-firming maintenance
-
Body-contour maintenance
-
Continued collagen-stimulation programs
Recommended for:
-
Returning HIFU clients
-
Clients completing an initial treatment plan
-
Clients seeking periodic professional maintenance
Adjustable Treatment Depths and Energy Settings
The Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine provides multiple treatment depths for different facial and body applications.
| Treatment Depth | General Treatment Level | Possible Applications |
|---|---|---|
| 1.5mm | Superficial facial tissue | Fine lines, texture, and delicate facial areas |
| 3.0mm | Dermal facial layer | Collagen stimulation and skin tightening |
| 4.5mm | Deeper facial layer | Facial lifting, jawline, and lower-face treatments |
| 6.0mm | Shallow body treatment | Small body areas and skin-firming programs |
| 8.0mm | Medium body treatment | Arms and selected body areas |
| 10.0mm | Deeper body treatment | Abdomen, thighs, and body contouring |
| 13.0mm | Maximum listed body depth | Larger body areas and professional contouring protocols |
Energy settings should be selected according to the cartridge, treatment area, tissue condition, client comfort, and professional protocol.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Face, Chin, and Jawline
Facial cartridges support customized treatments across suitable areas of the face.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Facial lifting
-
Fine-line care
-
Wrinkle reduction
-
Jawline definition
-
Double-chin-area treatment
Neck and Décolletage
Suitable cartridge depths and controlled energy settings can support professional tightening and rejuvenation programs.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Neck skin tightening
-
Reduced appearance of neck lines
-
Improved-looking firmness
-
Décolletage rejuvenation
-
Collagen-stimulation support
Arms, Abdomen, Thighs, and Buttocks
Deeper cartridge configurations support selected body-contouring and skin-firming treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Abdomen treatments
-
Thigh contouring
-
Buttock-area programs
-
Body skin firming
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Depth Category |
|---|---|---|
| Face | Lifting, tightening, and wrinkle care | 1.5mm, 3.0mm, or 4.5mm |
| Chin and Jawline | Contour definition and lower-face tightening | Suitable facial depth |
| Neck | Skin tightening and line care | Suitable facial depth |
| Décolletage | Texture and firmness improvement | Professionally selected depth |
| Upper Arms | Skin firming and contouring | Suitable body depth |
| Abdomen | Body contouring and tightening | Suitable deeper body depth |
| Thighs | Contouring and cellulite-appearance care | Suitable body depth |
| Buttocks | Skin-firming and contouring support | Suitable body depth |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, skin condition, previous aesthetic procedures, target areas, treatment objectives, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment process and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Cartridge Selection
Select the appropriate facial or body cartridge according to the treatment area, target depth, tissue condition, and professional protocol.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Clean the treatment area and apply suitable ultrasound gel. Configure the energy level and treatment parameters according to the selected cartridge and client tolerance.
Step 4: HIFU Treatment
Position the handpiece correctly and deliver focused ultrasound energy according to the mapped treatment plan. Monitor client comfort and tissue response throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the ultrasound gel, inspect and clean the treated area, record the cartridge and settings used, and provide appropriate post-treatment skincare guidance.
Designed for Professional Beauty Environments
The Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine combines multi-depth facial and body treatment capability with straightforward professional operation.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional 4D HIFU technology
-
Treatment depths from 1.5mm to 13mm
-
Eight-cartridge package
-
Facial and body treatment capability
-
Adjustable energy settings
-
Intelligent touchscreen controls
-
Approximately 30–60-minute sessions
-
Facial lifting and wrinkle-care programs
-
Jawline and chin contouring
-
Neck and décolletage treatments
-
Body-contouring and skin-firming programs
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine |
| Technology | 4D High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound |
| Treatment Package | Eight multi-depth cartridges |
| Listed Treatment Depths | 1.5mm, 3.0mm, 4.5mm, 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, and 13.0mm |
| Facial Depths | 1.5mm, 3.0mm, and 4.5mm |
| Body Depths | 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, and 13.0mm |
| Primary Functions | Skin tightening, facial lifting, wrinkle care, and body contouring |
| Treatment Areas | Face, neck, chin, jawline, arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30–60 minutes |
| Treatment Frequency | Personalized according to client assessment |
| Energy Settings | Adjustable |
| Display | Intelligent touchscreen |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty 4D HIFU main unit
-
1 × Professional HIFU treatment handpiece
-
8 × Treatment cartridges
-
Facial treatment cartridge configurations
-
Body treatment cartridge configurations
-
Intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Adjustable energy controls
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Professional video training
-
Cartridge-selection guidance
-
Energy-adjustment guidance
-
Facial treatment protocols
-
Jawline and neck protocols
-
Body-contouring protocols
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Facial and body assessment
-
Treatment-area mapping
-
Cartridge selection
-
Energy-level adjustment
-
Handpiece positioning
-
Facial-lifting protocols
-
Jawline and neck protocols
-
Body-contouring protocols
-
Post-treatment care
-
Equipment cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Cartridges and other components subject to normal use or shot limitations are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable cartridges, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation, health-history review, and skin assessment should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or breastfeeding
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within the treatment area
-
Active skin infection
-
Herpes, open wounds, or sores
-
Active eczema, psoriasis, or dermatitis in the area
-
Severe or recent sunburn
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Recent injectable or aggressive skin treatments
-
Serious cardiovascular or medical conditions
-
Reduced or impaired skin sensation
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients who have recently received fillers, botulinum toxin, chemical peels, or other professional aesthetic procedures should be assessed before treatment. An appropriate waiting period should be determined by a qualified practitioner.
HIFU should not be applied over the eyes, thyroid gland, major nerves, bones, reproductive organs, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, handpiece, cartridges, cables, and accessories before use.
-
Confirm the cartridge and treatment depth before beginning.
-
Map the treatment area carefully.
-
Apply sufficient ultrasound gel.
-
Begin with conservative energy settings.
-
Monitor client comfort and tissue response.
-
Do not deliver energy over prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Do not repeatedly treat the same point outside the protocol.
-
Record the cartridge, depth, energy, and treatment area.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin reaction occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Beauty salons
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Skin-rejuvenation studios
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Professional spas
-
Anti-aging treatment centers
-
Wellness facilities
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HIFU treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine?
Multi-Depth HIFU Technology
Treatment depths spanning 1.5mm to 13mm support superficial facial treatments, deeper facial lifting, and selected body applications.
Facial and Body Versatility
One system supports treatments for the face, neck, chin, jawline, arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks.
Eight Treatment Cartridges
The eight-cartridge package supports different treatment depths and allows professionals to select suitable configurations for facial and body areas.
Adjustable Professional Settings
Interchangeable cartridges and adjustable energy controls allow professionals to customize treatments according to the target area and client.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, cartridge guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine?
It is a professional High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound system developed for facial lifting, skin tightening, wrinkle care, collagen stimulation, and selected body-contouring treatments.
What does 4D HIFU mean?
The product uses an advanced multi-depth HIFU cartridge system designed to deliver focused ultrasound energy at different facial and body treatment depths.
Which treatment depths are available?
The supplied information lists 1.5mm, 3.0mm, and 4.5mm facial depths, together with 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, and 13.0mm body depths.
How many cartridges are included?
The supplied product package includes eight treatment cartridges for facial and body applications.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, neck, chin, jawline, upper arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks.
How long does one treatment take?
A standard professional treatment takes approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the treatment area, cartridge, and selected protocol.
How many treatments are recommended?
The supplied information suggests one to three sessions per year. The final treatment schedule should be personalized according to the client’s condition, objectives, and professional assessment.
When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice an initial tightening effect following treatment. Progressive changes may continue as the skin’s natural collagen response develops. Individual outcomes and timing vary.
How long can results last?
The supplied information indicates a possible duration of 12–18 months. Actual longevity varies according to age, skin condition, treatment settings, lifestyle, and individual response.
Is there downtime?
Many clients can continue normal daily activities after a suitable treatment. Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, or sensitivity may occur.
What does HIFU treatment feel like?
Clients may experience warmth, tingling, pressure, or brief sensitivity as ultrasound energy is delivered. Energy should be adjusted according to professional protocol and client tolerance.
Can the machine be used for body treatments?
Yes. The deeper cartridge configurations support selected treatments for the upper arms, abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and other suitable body areas.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to age, tissue condition, treatment area, cartridge selection, energy settings, lifestyle, and individual response.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, treatment mapping, cartridge selection, energy adjustment, facial and body protocols, aftercare, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Professional 4D HIFU Treatments to Your Business
The Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine enables beauty salons, aesthetic clinics, and wellness professionals to provide customizable facial-lifting, skin-tightening, wrinkle-care, and body-contouring services using one professional platform.
Five key benefits:
-
Multi-depth focused ultrasound treatments from 1.5mm to 13mm
-
Professional facial and body treatment capability
-
Eight treatment cartridges with adjustable energy settings
-
Intelligent touchscreen controls with dual-voltage compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, cartridge configuration, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$2,599.00
Professional RF Microneedling and Skin-Remodeling System
Fractional Radiofrequency Technology for Skin Tightening, Collagen Stimulation, and Body Contouring
The Morpheus 8 is a professional fractional radiofrequency microneedling system developed for facial rejuvenation, skin tightening, texture improvement, scar treatments, and body-contouring programs.
The system combines precision microneedling with controlled radiofrequency energy. Microneedles create fractional microchannels while delivering RF energy into selected tissue depths, supporting collagen and elastin remodeling below the skin’s surface.
With a 500W maximum power output, adjustable 0.2–7.0mm needle depth, four cartridge options, and a 10.4-inch control screen, the system can be customized for delicate facial areas, deeper facial treatments, and larger body areas.
Fractional RF microneedling | 0.2–7.0mm adjustable depth | Four cartridge options | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Technologies on One Platform
Fractional Microneedling
Precision-engineered needle cartridges create controlled microchannels within the selected treatment area. This fractional process supports the skin’s natural renewal response while leaving surrounding tissue untreated.
Common applications include:
-
Fine-line treatments
-
Wrinkle-reduction programs
-
Enlarged-pore treatments
-
Uneven skin-texture improvement
-
Acne-scar treatments
-
General facial rejuvenation
-
Body skin-renewal programs
Radiofrequency Energy
The system delivers controlled radiofrequency energy through the microneedles and into the targeted tissue depth. This creates a thermal response designed to support collagen contraction and progressive tissue remodeling.
Common applications include:
-
Skin-tightening treatments
-
Collagen-remodeling programs
-
Facial-laxity improvement
-
Jawline and lower-face contouring
-
Neck rejuvenation
-
Body skin-firming treatments
-
Subdermal tissue-remodeling programs
Subdermal Adipose Remodeling
Adjustable needle penetration allows practitioners to work at different tissue depths according to the treatment area and professional protocol.
Deeper treatments may be incorporated into subdermal adipose remodeling programs for selected areas where clients are concerned about mild localized fullness, reduced definition, or loose-looking skin.
Common applications include:
-
Submental-area contouring
-
Lower-face and jowl definition
-
Abdominal contouring
-
Thigh treatments
-
Buttock skin-firming programs
-
Body texture improvement
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Facial Rejuvenation Program
Designed to address common signs of aging and uneven facial texture with customized needle depth and RF intensity.
Recommended applications:
-
Fine lines and wrinkles
-
Enlarged pores
-
Uneven skin texture
-
Reduced skin firmness
-
General collagen-remodeling treatments
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking non-surgical facial rejuvenation
-
Clients concerned about early signs of aging
-
Clients wanting progressive skin-quality improvement
Skin-Tightening Program
Focuses on areas affected by reduced firmness, laxity, or weakened facial definition.
Recommended applications:
-
Lower-face laxity
-
Jawline definition
-
Neck tightening
-
Jowl-area treatment
-
Mildly loose-looking skin
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking firmer-looking skin
-
Clients concerned about facial contours
-
Clients interested in non-surgical tightening programs
Scar and Texture Program
Combines fractional microneedling and controlled RF energy to support progressive remodeling of uneven or scarred tissue.
Recommended applications:
-
Acne scars
-
Uneven surface texture
-
Enlarged pores
-
Irregular skin appearance
-
Selected body scars
Recommended for:
-
Clients with suitable acne scarring
-
Clients seeking smoother-looking skin
-
Clients requiring a structured multi-session program
Body-Remodeling Program
Uses deeper adjustable settings and suitable cartridges for larger treatment areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal skin tightening
-
Thigh texture improvement
-
Buttock skin-firming treatments
-
Bra-line and décolletage treatments
-
Selected body-contouring programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about loose-looking body skin
-
Clients seeking improved body texture
-
Clients suitable for deeper RF microneedling protocols
Four Interchangeable Cartridge Options
The system includes four cartridge configurations, allowing practitioners to select the appropriate coverage, penetration pattern, and treatment precision.
| Cartridge | Treatment Purpose | Recommended Areas |
|---|---|---|
| 12-Pin Cartridge | Precise, concentrated treatment | Small facial areas, scars, and detailed treatments |
| 24-Pin Cartridge | Balanced facial coverage | Face, jawline, neck, and general rejuvenation |
| 40-Pin Cartridge | Wider treatment coverage | Larger facial zones and body areas |
| Nano Cartridge | Superficial, non-needle skin treatment | Delicate areas and surface-level skin programs |
Cartridge selection should be based on the treatment area, client condition, desired penetration depth, and professional protocol.
Adjustable Needle Depth for Precise Treatment
Needle depth can be adjusted from 0.2mm to 7.0mm, enabling practitioners to tailor treatments for different facial and body areas.
| Depth Range | General Treatment Level | Possible Applications |
|---|---|---|
| 0.2–0.5mm | Superficial | Surface texture and delicate areas |
| 0.5–1.5mm | Light facial treatment | Fine lines, pores, and general rejuvenation |
| 1.5–3.0mm | Medium-depth treatment | Texture, scars, tightening, and collagen remodeling |
| 3.0–4.0mm | Deep facial or body treatment | Lower-face, neck, and selected body applications |
| 4.0–7.0mm | Deeper body treatment | Subdermal and larger body-area protocols |
These ranges are general references only. Actual settings must be selected by a trained professional following client assessment and the supplied operating protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Face and Eye Area
Shallower settings and appropriate cartridges can be selected for delicate or detailed facial treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Fine-line reduction
-
Under-eye skin rejuvenation
-
Pore refinement
-
Texture improvement
-
Facial collagen stimulation
Lower Face, Jawline, and Neck
Customized medium or deeper settings can support tightening and contour-enhancement programs.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Lower-face tightening
-
Jowl-area improvement
-
Jawline definition
-
Submental contouring
-
Neck skin rejuvenation
Abdomen, Thighs, and Buttocks
Deeper settings and wider cartridges can be selected for larger body treatment areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal skin tightening
-
Thigh texture improvement
-
Buttock skin-firming treatments
-
Body collagen remodeling
-
Selected subdermal contouring programs
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Suitable Program |
|---|---|---|
| Under-Eye Area | Delicate texture and fine-line improvement | Facial rejuvenation |
| Face | Collagen stimulation, pore refinement, and wrinkle treatment | Facial rejuvenation |
| Acne Scars | Progressive scar and texture remodeling | Scar and texture |
| Lower Face and Jowls | Tightening and contour improvement | Skin tightening |
| Jawline | Definition and submental-area treatment | Skin tightening |
| Neck and Décolletage | Firming and texture improvement | Facial or body remodeling |
| Abdomen | Skin tightening and subdermal remodeling | Body remodeling |
| Thighs | Texture improvement and firming | Body remodeling |
| Buttocks | Skin-quality and firmness improvement | Body remodeling |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s medical history, skin condition, treatment concerns, previous procedures, medications, and possible contraindications. Establish realistic treatment objectives and obtain informed consent.
Step 2: Skin Preparation
Clean and disinfect the treatment area according to professional hygiene protocols. Apply topical numbing cream when appropriate and remove it completely before beginning treatment.
Step 3: Cartridge and Setting Selection
Choose the correct cartridge, needle depth, RF frequency, energy level, and treatment pattern according to the client’s skin condition and selected treatment area.
Step 4: Fractional RF Microneedling Treatment
Move the handpiece systematically across the selected area. The microneedles create fractional microchannels while delivering controlled RF energy at the chosen depth.
Step 5: Post-Treatment Care
Complete the treatment according to protocol, inspect the treated area, and provide appropriate aftercare instructions. Recommend gentle skincare and suitable sun protection during recovery.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Morpheus 8 combines customizable treatment settings with professional facial and body applications.
Key advantages include:
-
Fractional microneedling and RF energy on one platform
-
Adjustable 0.2–7.0mm needle depth
-
Four interchangeable cartridge options
-
500W maximum output power
-
Adjustable 1–15MHz RF frequency
-
Dedicated 6MHz Thermagica mode
-
10.4-inch control screen
-
Facial and body treatment capability
-
Multiple treatment-area sizes
-
Compact 13.3kg professional system
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year parts warranty
-
Professional training and lifetime technical support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Morpheus 8 RF Microneedling Machine |
| Technology | Fractional radiofrequency microneedling |
| Maximum Output Power | 500W |
| RF Frequency—Microneedling | 1–15MHz adjustable |
| RF Frequency—Thermagica | 6MHz |
| Needle Cartridges | 12-pin, 24-pin, 40-pin, and Nano |
| Adjustable Needle Depth | 0.2–7.0mm |
| Treatment-Area Sizes | 1.1 × 1.1cm, 1.6 × 1.6cm, 1.6 × 1.5cm, and 2 × 2cm |
| Display | 10.4-inch control screen |
| Input Voltage | 100V, 110V, or 220V |
| Machine Dimensions | 40 × 36 × 81cm |
| Machine Weight | 13.3kg |
| Package Dimensions | 49 × 46 × 102cm |
| Package Weight | 28.4kg |
| Treatment Areas | Face, eyes, jawline, neck, abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and décolletage |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and lifetime technical support |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Morpheus 8 main machine
-
1 × RF microneedling treatment handpiece
-
1 × Thermagica treatment handpiece or applicable system attachment
-
12-pin cartridge configuration
-
24-pin cartridge configuration
-
40-pin cartridge configuration
-
Nano cartridge configuration
-
1 × Universal or region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
The final cartridge quantities and package configuration should follow the selected order.
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Professional video training
-
Cartridge-selection guidance
-
Needle-depth protocol guidance
-
Facial treatment protocols
-
Body treatment protocols
-
Client consultation materials
-
Aftercare guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Morpheus 8 system includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the machine safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Control-screen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Skin assessment
-
Cartridge selection
-
Needle-depth adjustment
-
RF frequency and energy selection
-
Facial treatment protocols
-
Body treatment protocols
-
Treatment hygiene and cartridge handling
-
Post-treatment care
-
Machine cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Morpheus 8 includes a three-year professional parts warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Consumable cartridges and components subject to normal wear are not included unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover consumable cartridges, normal wear, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A detailed consultation, health-history assessment, and skin evaluation should be completed before treatment. The system should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals according to the supplied manual and local regulations.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Active infection in the treatment area
-
Open wounds or active skin lesions
-
Uncontrolled medical or autoimmune conditions
-
Recent isotretinoin use
-
Active herpes simplex in the treatment area
-
Significant keloid tendency
-
Recent surgery or injectable treatment in the area
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Medications that affect healing or bleeding
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Individual risks and suitability should be assessed professionally. Medical clearance should be obtained whenever required.
Pre-Treatment and Aftercare Guidance
Before Treatment
-
Complete a professional skin consultation.
-
Review medications and previous procedures.
-
Avoid treating active infections or damaged skin.
-
Remove makeup and disinfect the area.
-
Apply topical numbing cream when appropriate.
-
Obtain documented informed consent.
After Treatment
-
Use gentle skincare during the initial recovery period.
-
Avoid aggressive exfoliation and strong active ingredients.
-
Avoid unnecessary heat and intense exercise as professionally advised.
-
Protect the treated area from excessive sun exposure.
-
Apply suitable broad-spectrum sunscreen.
-
Do not scratch, pick, or irritate the treated skin.
-
Follow all individualized practitioner instructions.
Temporary redness, swelling, sensitivity, pinpoint marks, or mild crusting may occur. Recovery experience varies according to treatment depth, energy, area, and individual skin response.
Intended Professional Users
The Morpheus 8 RF Microneedling Machine is suitable for appropriately qualified and trained operators working in:
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Dermatology practices
-
Skin-rejuvenation centers
-
Cosmetic treatment clinics
-
Professional beauty centers
-
Body-contouring facilities
Practitioners should review local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before providing RF microneedling treatments.
Why Choose the Morpheus 8?
Dual-Action RF Microneedling
The system combines fractional microneedling and radiofrequency energy, allowing practitioners to create controlled microchannels and deliver RF energy at selected tissue depths.
Adjustable 0.2–7.0mm Depth
A wide needle-depth range supports superficial facial rejuvenation, deeper scar treatments, skin tightening, and selected body-remodeling programs.
Four Cartridge Configurations
The 12-pin, 24-pin, 40-pin, and Nano options provide different levels of precision and treatment coverage for facial and body applications.
Face and Body Versatility
One professional platform can support treatments for the face, eye area, jawline, neck, abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and décolletage.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes training, operating documentation, treatment guidance, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year parts warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Morpheus 8?
The Morpheus 8 is a professional fractional RF microneedling system that combines controlled microneedling with radiofrequency energy for skin rejuvenation, tightening, texture improvement, and selected body treatments.
How is RF microneedling different from conventional microneedling?
Conventional microneedling creates controlled microchannels. RF microneedling also delivers radiofrequency energy at a selected depth, providing an additional thermal response within the targeted tissue.
What needle depths are available?
The machine provides an adjustable needle-depth range from 0.2mm to 7.0mm. The appropriate setting depends on the treatment area, skin condition, selected cartridge, and professional protocol.
Which cartridges are included?
The available configurations are 12-pin, 24-pin, 40-pin, and Nano. Final quantities should be confirmed according to the selected package.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, under-eye region, lower face, jawline, neck, décolletage, abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and other suitable body areas.
How long does one session take?
A typical session takes approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the size of the treatment area, selected protocol, and preparation time.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied treatment information indicates that one to four sessions may be used, commonly spaced approximately four to six weeks apart. The final course should be personalized following professional assessment.
Is there recovery time?
Temporary redness, swelling, sensitivity, or pinpoint marks may occur. The source information indicates approximately one to three days of visible downtime, although deeper treatments may require a longer recovery period.
Can the system be used for acne scars?
Yes. Suitable clients may receive fractional RF microneedling treatments designed to support progressive collagen remodeling and improve the appearance of acne scars and uneven texture.
Can it be used for body treatments?
Yes. Its adjustable depth and different cartridge configurations support selected treatments for the abdomen, thighs, buttocks, décolletage, and other suitable areas.
Are results identical for every client?
No. Results and recovery vary according to age, skin condition, treatment depth, energy level, number of sessions, aftercare, and individual biological response.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional parts warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Machine operation, cartridge selection, needle-depth guidance, treatment protocols, safety procedures, cleaning, maintenance, and ongoing technical support are included.
Add Professional RF Microneedling to Your Business
The Morpheus 8 enables aesthetic clinics, medical spas, and skin professionals to provide customizable facial rejuvenation, collagen-remodeling, skin-tightening, scar, and body-treatment programs.
Five key benefits:
-
Fractional microneedling and RF energy on one platform
-
Adjustable needle depth from 0.2mm to 7.0mm
-
Four cartridge options for precise facial and body treatments
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$2,699.00
Professional Pelvic Floor Strengthening System
Non-Invasive HIFEM Technology for Pelvic Wellness and Bladder-Control Programs
The Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair is a professional HIFEM system developed for pelvic floor strengthening, postpartum wellness, bladder-control support, and intimate wellness programs.
High-intensity focused electromagnetic energy stimulates deep pelvic floor muscles and produces approximately 12,000 muscle contractions during a 28–30-minute session. Clients remain comfortably seated and fully clothed throughout the treatment.
With adjustable power, customizable frequency settings, intelligent touchscreen controls, and pre-programmed protocols, the system enables professionals to personalize every session according to the client’s comfort level and treatment objectives.
12,000 contractions per session | 28–30-minute treatment | Fully clothed | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Advanced HIFEM Technology on One Professional Platform
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology
The system generates focused electromagnetic energy that penetrates the pelvic floor area and stimulates powerful involuntary muscle contractions. These contractions engage muscles more intensively and consistently than conventional voluntary exercises.
Common applications include:
-
Pelvic floor muscle strengthening
-
Bladder-control support
-
Postpartum wellness programs
-
Intimate wellness treatments
-
Core stability support
-
Age-related pelvic muscle conditioning
Supramaximal Muscle Contractions
Each session produces approximately 12,000 supramaximal contractions. The client does not need to perform manual exercises, allowing the system to provide consistent muscle activation throughout the treatment.
Common benefits include:
-
Consistent pelvic muscle engagement
-
Improved muscle strength and endurance
-
Convenient treatment without manual exercise
-
Personalized intensity according to client comfort
-
Structured treatment programs with repeatable settings
Fully Clothed, Non-Invasive Treatment
Clients remain seated and fully clothed during the entire session. No applicators are inserted into the body, and the procedure requires no injections, incisions, anesthesia, or complicated preparation.
This discreet treatment experience is suitable for professional environments where client privacy, comfort, and convenience are essential.
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Postpartum Wellness Program
Designed to support pelvic floor conditioning following pregnancy and childbirth, subject to professional assessment and appropriate medical clearance.
Recommended applications:
-
Postpartum pelvic muscle weakness
-
Reduced pelvic floor tone
-
Bladder leakage concerns
-
Core stability support
Recommended for:
-
Postpartum clients
-
Women seeking non-invasive pelvic wellness support
-
Clients who find manual pelvic floor exercises difficult
Bladder-Control Support Program
Provides targeted pelvic floor muscle stimulation for clients experiencing weakness associated with bladder-control concerns.
Recommended applications:
-
Stress-related urinary leakage
-
Leakage during coughing or sneezing
-
Leakage during physical activity
-
Reduced bladder-support muscle strength
Recommended for:
-
Women and men with pelvic floor weakness
-
Mature clients
-
Clients seeking a non-surgical support program
Intimate Wellness Program
Focuses on improving pelvic muscle tone, awareness, endurance, and control as part of a professional intimate wellness service.
Recommended applications:
-
Reduced pelvic muscle tone
-
Pelvic floor conditioning
-
Intimate wellness support
-
Confidence and body-awareness programs
Recommended for:
-
Women’s wellness centers
-
Intimate wellness clinics
-
Clients seeking discreet, non-invasive treatment
Pelvic Strength and Maintenance Program
Created for clients who want ongoing pelvic floor conditioning after completing an initial treatment course.
Recommended applications:
-
Pelvic muscle maintenance
-
Core foundation support
-
Age-related muscle conditioning
-
Long-term wellness programs
Recommended for:
-
Existing pelvic floor clients
-
Mature women and men
-
Clients completing a structured treatment course
Customizable Power and Frequency Settings
The system allows professionals to adjust treatment intensity according to the client’s needs, tolerance, and program objectives.
| Setting | Available Range | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Power Output | 300W–5000W | Adjustable treatment intensity |
| Frequency Range | 3–200Hz | Customizable muscle-stimulation patterns |
| Session Duration | 28–30 minutes | Efficient professional treatment |
| Treatment Frequency | Commonly twice weekly | Structured pelvic wellness programs |
| Treatment Position | Seated and fully clothed | Discreet, convenient client experience |
| Control System | Intelligent touchscreen | Protocol and intensity management |
Treatment settings and session frequency should always be selected following professional consultation and client screening.
Professional Pelvic Wellness Applications
| Treatment Category | Primary Objective | Suitable Clients |
|---|---|---|
| Postpartum Wellness | Support pelvic floor muscle recovery and conditioning | Postpartum clients with appropriate clearance |
| Bladder-Control Support | Strengthen muscles associated with bladder support | Women and men with pelvic floor weakness |
| Intimate Wellness | Improve pelvic muscle tone, control, and awareness | Adult wellness clients |
| Menopause Support | Support pelvic muscle conditioning during age-related changes | Menopausal and postmenopausal clients |
| Core Stability | Strengthen the pelvic foundation supporting the core | Clients seeking posture and stability support |
| Maintenance Programs | Help maintain pelvic muscle strength after a treatment course | Returning wellness clients |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, pelvic wellness concerns, treatment objectives, and possible contraindications. Determine whether professional or medical clearance is required.
Step 2: Comfortable Positioning
The client sits comfortably in the treatment chair while remaining fully clothed. Correct seating alignment helps position the pelvic floor area over the electromagnetic treatment zone.
Step 3: Personalized Settings
Select the appropriate program, power level, frequency, and treatment duration. Begin at a comfortable intensity and adjust progressively according to the client’s response.
Step 4: HIFEM Treatment
The system generates repeated electromagnetic pulses for approximately 28–30 minutes. The client experiences strong, rhythmic pelvic muscle contractions while remaining comfortably seated.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
The system completes the selected program automatically. The client can leave the treatment area immediately unless the practitioner provides individual aftercare recommendations.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair combines professional performance with a discreet, comfortable client experience.
Key advantages include:
-
Approximately 12,000 contractions per session
-
Fully clothed and non-invasive treatment
-
Adjustable 300W–5000W power output
-
Customizable 3–200Hz frequency range
-
Intelligent digital touchscreen
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
Automatic shut-off and intensity controls
-
Multiple professional color options
-
Universal 110V–240V power compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing technical support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair |
| Technology | HIFEM High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology |
| Primary Application | Pelvic floor strengthening and intimate wellness |
| Power Output | 300W–5000W adjustable |
| Frequency Range | 3–200Hz |
| Session Duration | Approximately 28–30 minutes |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 12,000 |
| Treatment Position | Seated and fully clothed |
| Control System | Intelligent digital touchscreen |
| Treatment Programs | Pre-programmed and customizable protocols |
| Safety Features | Automatic shut-off, temperature control, and intensity limits |
| Available Colors | Orange, pink, blue, and white |
| Power Supply | 110V–240V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Training and ongoing technical assistance |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair
-
1 × Integrated intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
Adjustable power and frequency controls
-
1 × Universal 110V–240V power cable
-
Selected professional chair color
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Operating and safety guide
-
Professional video training
-
Standard treatment protocol templates
-
Postpartum wellness protocol guidance
-
Bladder-control support protocol guidance
-
Intimate wellness protocol guidance
-
Client consultation and education materials
-
Service-menu and treatment-package guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair includes professional operating guidance to help your team use the system confidently and responsibly.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen and program operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Correct client positioning
-
Power and frequency adjustment
-
Treatment protocol selection
-
Safety procedures and contraindications
-
Machine cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
-
Service planning and client communication
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and share photographs or video when required.
-
A technician will assess the machine remotely.
-
Operating guidance or replacement parts will be arranged when applicable.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before treatment. This system must be operated according to the supplied manual and applicable local requirements.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Recent surgery in the treatment area
-
Unexplained pelvic pain or bleeding
-
Epilepsy or conditions affected by electromagnetic stimulation
-
Serious medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients with medical concerns should consult an appropriate healthcare professional before beginning a pelvic floor treatment program.
Intended Professional Users
The EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Women’s wellness centers
-
Gynecology and pelvic wellness practices
-
Medical spas
-
Physiotherapy and rehabilitation centers
-
Postpartum wellness centers
-
Intimate wellness clinics
-
Professional beauty and wellness facilities
Local licensing and operating requirements should be reviewed before offering treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair?
Approximately 12,000 Contractions per Session
Advanced HIFEM technology provides intensive pelvic floor muscle stimulation during a convenient 28–30-minute session.
Discreet Client Experience
Clients remain fully clothed and comfortably seated, creating a private and convenient treatment experience without invasive applicators.
Personalized Professional Programs
Adjustable power, frequency, and protocol settings allow practitioners to tailor sessions according to client comfort and treatment objectives.
Multiple Wellness Applications
One system supports postpartum wellness, bladder-control programs, intimate wellness, core conditioning, and pelvic floor maintenance services.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes training, operating documentation, protocol guidance, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair?
The EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair is a professional HIFEM system that uses focused electromagnetic energy to stimulate repeated pelvic floor muscle contractions while the client remains comfortably seated.
How long does one session take?
A standard session takes approximately 28–30 minutes, depending on the selected protocol and the client’s individual treatment plan.
Does the client remain fully clothed?
Yes. Clients can remain fully clothed throughout the session. Lightweight clothing that does not contain metal is generally the most appropriate.
How many contractions occur during one session?
The system is designed to generate approximately 12,000 pelvic floor muscle contractions during a complete session.
Is the treatment invasive?
No. The treatment does not require surgery, injections, internal applicators, or anesthesia.
What does the treatment feel like?
Clients typically experience strong, rhythmic pelvic muscle contractions. Intensity can be adjusted progressively to maintain an appropriate comfort level.
How many sessions are recommended?
The source protocol recommends two sessions per week over an 8–12-week program. The final schedule should be personalized following professional consultation.
When may clients notice changes?
Individual experiences vary. Some clients may notice increased pelvic muscle awareness during the early stages of a program, while strength and functional changes generally require a consistent series of sessions.
Can the chair be used for postpartum clients?
It can be incorporated into postpartum wellness programs after an appropriate professional assessment and medical clearance when necessary.
Is the system suitable for men?
The technology may also support pelvic floor conditioning programs for suitable male clients, subject to professional screening and an appropriate treatment plan.
Does the machine have adjustable intensity?
Yes. The power output and frequency can be adjusted according to the selected protocol, treatment objective, and client comfort.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Operating guidance, safety training, treatment protocol instruction, and ongoing technical support are included.
Add Professional Pelvic Wellness to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair enables clinics and wellness centers to introduce a discreet, non-invasive pelvic floor service supported by advanced HIFEM technology.
Five key benefits:
-
Approximately 12,000 contractions in a 28–30-minute session
-
Fully clothed and non-invasive client experience
-
Adjustable power, frequency, and treatment protocols
-
Multiple pelvic wellness applications on one platform
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$3,999.00
Professional Four-Handle NEO EMShape Body-Sculpting System
Straight and Curved Electromagnetic Applicators for Muscle Conditioning and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine is a professional body-sculpting system developed for electromagnetic muscle conditioning, fat-reduction support, and improved definition across multiple body areas.
The system combines EMShape electromagnetic technology with four ergonomic applicators: two straight handles for conventional placement and two curved handles designed for improved contact across contoured anatomical areas.
With approximately 20,000 contractions per session, adjustable treatment settings, a 12-inch intelligent touchscreen, air-and-water cooling, and a professional vertical design, the machine is suitable for body-sculpting clinics, medical spas, slimming centers, fitness facilities, and wellness studios.
EMShape technology | Two straight and two curved handles | Vertical design | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
EMShape Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
EMShape technology delivers high-intensity electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing repeated involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Thigh muscle conditioning
-
Upper-arm toning
-
Waistline definition
-
Calf muscle stimulation
Straight and Curved Applicator Treatment
The system includes two straight and two curved handles for different body shapes and placement requirements.
Common benefits include:
-
Conventional straight-handle placement
-
Improved contact on curved body areas
-
Focused muscle stimulation
-
Bilateral treatment capability
-
Multi-area treatment flexibility
-
Customized applicator positioning
Multi-Area Body Contouring
Four applicators can be positioned across suitable muscle groups according to the client’s anatomy and treatment objectives.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen and thigh treatments
-
Arms and abdomen
-
Buttocks and thighs
-
Waistline and love-handle areas
-
Bilateral calf treatments
-
Customized multi-area programs
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Abdominal and Waistline Program
Uses suitable straight or curved applicators to stimulate abdominal muscles and support midsection definition.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Core-area stimulation
-
Waistline sculpting
-
Love-handle-area programs
-
General midsection definition
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved abdominal tone
-
Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation
-
Clients following healthy lifestyle programs
Buttock and Thigh Program
Positions multiple applicators over suitable buttock and thigh muscle areas for lower-body treatment.
Recommended applications:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatments
-
Shape-enhancement programs
-
Lower-body definition
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved buttock or thigh tone
-
Clients combining treatment with exercise
-
Clients receiving comprehensive lower-body programs
Arm and Calf Program
Uses the available applicators for suitable upper-arm and calf muscle-conditioning programs.
Recommended applications:
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Biceps and triceps conditioning
-
Calf muscle stimulation
-
Bilateral limb treatments
-
Improved-looking muscle definition
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved arm or calf tone
-
Fitness and body-contouring clients
-
Clients requiring smaller-area placement
Multi-Area Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment after completion of the client’s initial NEO EMSlim course.
Recommended applications:
-
Muscle-tone maintenance
-
Body-contour maintenance
-
Multi-area conditioning
-
Fitness-program support
-
Seasonal body-sculpting treatments
Recommended for:
-
Returning NEO EMSlim clients
-
Clients completing six to eight initial sessions
-
Clients combining treatment with regular exercise
Adjustable Energy and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine allows practitioners to customize treatments according to applicator type, body area, client tolerance, and professional protocol.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Technology | EMShape electromagnetic stimulation | Muscle-conditioning treatments |
| Treatment Handles | Four | Multi-area treatment capability |
| Straight Handles | Two | Conventional and precise placement |
| Curved Handles | Two | Contoured and ergonomic placement |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 20,000 | Intensive muscle activation |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes | Efficient treatment scheduling |
| Treatment Course | Six to eight sessions | Structured body-sculpting program |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable | Personalized client comfort |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation | Supports continuous operation |
Settings should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen and Waistline
Straight or curved handles can be positioned over suitable abdominal and waist muscle groups for focused or combined treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle activation
-
Core-area conditioning
-
Waistline definition
-
Love-handle-area treatment
-
Multi-zone midsection sculpting
Buttocks and Thighs
Curved and straight applicators support customized placement across suitable lower-body areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatment
-
Improved-looking definition
-
Lower-body sculpting
Arms and Calves
The applicator selection supports suitable upper-arm and lower-leg treatment programs.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Arm definition
-
Calf muscle conditioning
-
Bilateral limb treatment
-
Customized smaller-area programs
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Applicator Configuration |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Muscle conditioning and midsection definition | Straight or curved handles |
| Waistline | Contouring and core-area stimulation | Curved-handle placement |
| Love Handles | Side-body conditioning | Curved-handle placement |
| Buttocks | Toning and shape-enhancement support | Bilateral curved or straight handles |
| Inner and Outer Thighs | Lower-body conditioning | Suitable bilateral placement |
| Upper Arms | Arm muscle stimulation and definition | Straight handles |
| Calves | Lower-leg muscle conditioning | Suitable straight or curved handles |
| Multiple Areas | Comprehensive body-sculpting program | Up to four handles |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Applicator Selection and Placement
Select straight or curved handles according to the treatment area and client anatomy. Position and secure the applicators over suitable muscle groups.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate program and begin with conservative energy settings. Adjust the intensity according to the body area, client comfort, and muscle response.
Step 4: EMShape Treatment
The system delivers electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor the client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine combines EMShape technology with straight and curved applicator options.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional EMShape technology
-
Four ergonomic treatment handles
-
Two straight applicators
-
Two curved applicators
-
Approximately 20,000 contractions per session
-
Focused, bilateral, and multi-area configurations
-
Treatments for the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, and calves
-
Vertical professional design
-
Adjustable energy intensity
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling
-
Approximately 20–30-minute sessions
-
Six- to eight-session treatment programs
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine |
| Technology | HI-EMT with EMShape technology |
| Design | Vertical tower |
| Treatment Handles | Four ergonomic applicators |
| Straight Handles | Two |
| Curved Handles | Two |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 20,000 |
| Primary Functions | Muscle conditioning and body contouring |
| Supplied Performance Figures | Up to 30% increased muscle definition and 20% fat reduction |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves |
| Treatment Configuration | Focused, bilateral, or multi-area |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Six to eight sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | Commonly twice weekly |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation |
| Display | 12-inch intelligent touchscreen |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
Performance figures are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim main unit
-
2 × Straight EMShape treatment applicators
-
2 × Curved EMShape treatment applicators
-
Applicator connection cables
-
Applicator-positioning accessories
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Adjustable energy controls
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling system
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Professional video training
-
Straight-handle placement guidance
-
Curved-handle placement guidance
-
Energy-adjustment guidance
-
Abdominal and waistline protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Calf-treatment protocols
-
Multi-area treatment guidance
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Treatment-area assessment
-
Straight-handle placement
-
Curved-handle placement
-
Applicator selection by body area
-
Energy-level adjustment
-
Abdominal and waistline protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Calf-treatment protocols
-
Multi-area treatment planning
-
Client monitoring
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Cooling-system maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within or near the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Cardiac rhythm disorders
-
Epilepsy or seizure disorders
-
Active muscle injury
-
Severe inflammation
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Serious neurological or muscular conditions
-
Reduced or impaired sensation
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment.
Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use.
-
Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation.
-
Remove metal objects from each treatment area.
-
Select the correct straight or curved applicator.
-
Confirm correct applicator placement before activation.
-
Secure all handles according to the supplied instructions.
-
Begin with conservative energy levels.
-
Increase intensity progressively according to client comfort.
-
Monitor muscle response and client condition throughout treatment.
-
Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Record applicator type, treatment area, duration, and energy settings.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Premium body-sculpting clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Slimming centers
-
Aesthetic salons
-
Fitness facilities
-
Gyms
-
Wellness centers
-
Professional body-contouring studios
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering EMShape or HI-EMT treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine?
Straight and Curved Applicators
Two straight and two curved handles support customized placement across different body shapes and treatment areas.
Professional EMShape Technology
The system provides approximately 20,000 electromagnetic muscle contractions during a professional treatment session.
Multiple Treatment Areas
One machine supports customized programs for the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves.
Professional Cooling and Controls
The 12-inch touchscreen and combined air-and-water cooling system support efficient professional operation.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, straight- and curved-handle guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine?
It is a professional electromagnetic body-sculpting system with two straight and two curved applicators.
What is EMShape technology?
EMShape is the supplied electromagnetic muscle-stimulation technology used by this system to produce repeated involuntary muscle contractions.
What is different about the curved handles?
The curved applicators are designed to improve placement and contact across suitable contoured body areas. Correct selection depends on the client’s anatomy and treatment area.
Do curved handles guarantee deeper muscle engagement?
No. Treatment depth and response depend on the electromagnetic output, applicator position, client anatomy, settings, and individual response.
How many applicators are included?
The package includes four handles: two straight applicators and two curved applicators.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves.
Can all four handles be used simultaneously?
The four-handle system supports suitable multi-area operation according to the selected protocol and machine configuration.
How long does one session take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 20–30 minutes.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends six to eight sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments.
What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy levels can be increased progressively according to individual comfort and muscle response.
Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced after exercise may occur.
Can EMShape replace regular exercise?
EMShape treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits.
When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice increased muscle activation during the initial sessions. Visible changes vary and may develop progressively during and after the treatment course.
What performance figures are supplied?
The muscle-definition improvement of up to 30% and fat reduction of up to 20%. These figures are not guaranteed outcomes.
How long can results last?
A possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, applicator selection, treatment consistency, energy settings, diet, exercise, and individual response.
What cooling system does the machine use?
The machine uses combined air-and-water circulation cooling to support continuous professional operation.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, straight- and curved-handle placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, safety, cooling-system maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Curved-Handle EMShape Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine enables body-sculpting clinics, medical spas, and wellness professionals to provide customized electromagnetic muscle-conditioning treatments using straight and curved applicators.
Five key benefits:
-
Professional EMShape electromagnetic technology
-
Two straight and two curved ergonomic applicators
-
Approximately 20,000 contractions per session
-
A 12-inch touchscreen with air-and-water cooling
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, applicator details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$2,299.00
Professional 14 Tesla HI-EMT Body-Sculpting System
High-Power Electromagnetic Technology for Muscle Conditioning and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine is a professional non-invasive body-sculpting system developed for muscle conditioning, body contouring, and improved definition across multiple treatment areas.
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology delivers a maximum magnetic intensity of 14 Tesla, producing approximately 20,000 supramaximal muscle contractions during a 20–30-minute treatment session.
Available with two or four ergonomic applicators, the machine supports focused, bilateral, multi-area, and optional dual-client treatments. Its 12-inch intelligent touchscreen, adjustable energy controls, and combined air-and-water cooling system support continuous professional operation.
14 Tesla HI-EMT | Two- or four-handle options | Multi-area treatment | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
14 Tesla HI-EMT Muscle Stimulation
The system delivers high-intensity electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing repeated involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Thigh muscle conditioning
-
Upper-arm toning
-
Waistline definition
-
Professional fitness treatments
Multi-Area Body Contouring
The available two- or four-handle configuration supports different applicator-placement strategies according to the client’s anatomy and treatment objectives.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen and waist treatments
-
Buttock and thigh programs
-
Upper-arm conditioning
-
Bilateral muscle stimulation
-
Single-area focused treatment
-
Customized multi-area programs
Optional Dual-Client Operation
The four-handle configuration can divide applicators between two appropriately screened clients.
Common benefits include:
-
Simultaneous two-client treatments
-
Flexible applicator allocation
-
Independent treatment planning
-
Improved clinic scheduling
-
High-volume professional operation
-
Customized client programs
Each client requires an individual consultation, screening, settings, applicator placement, documentation, and continuous monitoring.
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Abdominal-Conditioning Program
Uses suitable applicator placement to stimulate the abdominal muscles and support improved midsection definition.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Core-area stimulation
-
Midsection definition
-
Waistline sculpting
-
General abdominal programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved abdominal tone
-
Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation
-
Clients following healthy lifestyle programs
Buttock-Toning Program
Positions the applicators over suitable buttock muscle areas to support bilateral conditioning and shape-enhancement programs.
Recommended applications:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Toning and firmness support
-
Bilateral buttock treatments
-
Shape-enhancement programs
-
Lower-body conditioning
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved buttock tone
-
Clients combining treatment with exercise
-
Clients receiving lower-body programs
Thigh and Arm Program
Uses the available applicators sequentially or bilaterally across suitable thigh or upper-arm muscle groups.
Recommended applications:
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Bilateral limb treatments
-
Arm and thigh definition
-
Multi-area muscle conditioning
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved arm or thigh tone
-
Fitness and body-contouring clients
-
Clients requiring several treatment areas
Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment after completion of the client’s initial EMSlim course.
Recommended applications:
-
Muscle-tone maintenance
-
Body-contour maintenance
-
Fitness-program support
-
Seasonal body-sculpting treatments
-
Continued core conditioning
Recommended for:
-
Returning EMSlim clients
-
Clients completing four to six initial sessions
-
Clients combining treatment with regular exercise
Adjustable Power and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine allows practitioners to customize treatment according to the model configuration, body area, client tolerance, and professional protocol.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Technology | HI-EMT | Electromagnetic muscle stimulation |
| Maximum Magnetic Intensity | 14 Tesla | Professional high-power output |
| Treatment Handles | Two or four, model-dependent | Focused, bilateral, or multi-area treatment |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 20,000 | Intensive muscle activation |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes | Efficient treatment scheduling |
| Treatment Course | Four to six sessions | Structured body-sculpting program |
| Treatment Frequency | Commonly twice weekly | Progressive muscle conditioning |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation | Supports continuous operation |
Energy should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen and Waistline
One or more applicators can be positioned over suitable abdominal and waist muscle groups for focused or combined midsection treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle activation
-
Core-area conditioning
-
Waistline definition
-
Improved abdominal tone
-
Multi-zone midsection treatment
Buttocks and Thighs
The applicators support focused or bilateral lower-body treatments across suitable muscle groups.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatments
-
Improved-looking definition
-
Lower-body sculpting
Upper Arms
Suitable applicator placement supports focused or bilateral upper-arm conditioning.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Biceps conditioning
-
Triceps conditioning
-
Bilateral arm treatments
-
Improved-looking arm definition
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Configuration |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Muscle conditioning and midsection definition | One or two handles |
| Waistline | Contouring and core-area stimulation | Targeted or combined placement |
| Buttocks | Toning and shape-enhancement support | Bilateral handle placement |
| Inner Thighs | Lower-body conditioning | Sequential or bilateral treatment |
| Outer Thighs | Thigh definition and muscle stimulation | Sequential or bilateral treatment |
| Upper Arms | Arm muscle stimulation and definition | Sequential or bilateral treatment |
| Multiple Areas | Comprehensive body-sculpting program | Four-handle model |
| Dual Clients | Simultaneous independent programs | Four-handle configuration |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Applicator Placement
Select the treatment areas and position the applicators securely over suitable muscle groups. Correct placement is essential for balanced muscle stimulation.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate treatment program and begin with a conservative energy level. Increase the intensity gradually according to the client’s comfort and muscle response.
Step 4: HI-EMT Treatment
The system delivers electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor the client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine combines high-power electromagnetic technology with flexible handle configurations and professional controls.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional 14 Tesla HI-EMT technology
-
Choice of two or four ergonomic applicators
-
Approximately 20,000 contractions per session
-
Focused, bilateral, and multi-area treatments
-
Optional dual-client operation
-
Treatments for the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline
-
Adjustable energy intensity
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling
-
Approximately 20–30-minute sessions
-
Four- to six-session treatment programs
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine |
| Technology | High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology |
| Maximum Magnetic Intensity | 14 Tesla |
| Treatment Handles | Two or four ergonomic applicators, model-dependent |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 20,000 |
| Primary Functions | Muscle conditioning, body contouring, and fat-reduction support |
| Supplied Performance Figures | Up to 15–20% muscle growth and 20–25% fat reduction |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline |
| Treatment Configuration | Focused, bilateral, multi-area, or optional dual-client |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Four to six sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | Commonly twice weekly |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation |
| Display | 12-inch intelligent touchscreen |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
Performance figures are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim main unit
-
2 or 4 × Ergonomic HI-EMT treatment applicators
-
Applicator connection cables
-
Applicator-positioning accessories
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Adjustable energy controls
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling system
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
The selected two- or four-handle configuration should be confirmed when placing the order.
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Professional video training
-
Applicator-placement guidance
-
Energy-adjustment guidance
-
Abdominal treatment protocols
-
Waistline treatment protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Multi-area and dual-client guidance
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Treatment-area assessment
-
Correct applicator placement
-
Two- and four-handle configurations
-
Multi-area treatment planning
-
Optional dual-client operation
-
Energy-level adjustment
-
Abdominal and waistline protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Client monitoring
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Cooling-system maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within or near the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Cardiac rhythm disorders
-
Epilepsy or seizure disorders
-
Active muscle injury
-
Severe inflammation
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Serious neurological or muscular conditions
-
Reduced or impaired sensation
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment.
Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use.
-
Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation.
-
Complete a separate consultation for every client.
-
Remove metal objects from each treatment area.
-
Confirm correct applicator placement before activation.
-
Secure all handles according to the supplied instructions.
-
Begin with a conservative energy level.
-
Increase intensity progressively according to client comfort.
-
Monitor muscle response and client condition throughout treatment.
-
Continuously monitor both clients during dual-client operation.
-
Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Record treatment areas, duration, and energy settings.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Slimming clinics
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Medical spas
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Fitness centers
-
Gyms
-
Physiotherapy facilities
-
Wellness centers
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, staffing, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HI-EMT or dual-client treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine?
14 Tesla Magnetic Intensity
The machine provides a listed maximum magnetic output of 14 Tesla for professional electromagnetic muscle-stimulation programs.
Flexible Applicator Options
Two- and four-handle configurations support focused, bilateral, multi-area, and optional dual-client treatments.
Multiple Body Areas
One system supports customized programs for the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline.
Professional Cooling and Controls
The 12-inch intelligent touchscreen and combined air-and-water cooling system support continuous professional operation.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, applicator-placement guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine?
It is a professional HI-EMT system developed for electromagnetic muscle stimulation, body conditioning, and body-contouring programs.
What does 14 Tesla mean?
Tesla is a unit used to describe magnetic-field strength. The machine’s supplied maximum magnetic intensity is 14 Tesla.
Does a higher Tesla rating guarantee better results?
No. Treatment outcomes also depend on applicator design, positioning, pulse parameters, selected settings, treatment consistency, and individual response.
How many applicators are included?
The machine is available with two or four ergonomic applicators, depending on the selected model.
Which handle configuration should I choose?
A two-handle configuration is suitable for focused or bilateral treatments. A four-handle configuration supports greater multi-area flexibility and optional dual-client operation.
Can two clients be treated simultaneously?
Yes, with the suitable four-handle configuration. Each client requires separate screening, settings, applicator placement, documentation, and continuous monitoring.
Which areas can be treated?
Common treatment areas include the abdomen, upper arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline.
How long does one session take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 20–30 minutes.
How many sessions are recommended?
We recommends four to six sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments.
What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy should be increased progressively according to individual comfort and muscle response.
Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced after exercise may occur.
Can HI-EMT replace regular exercise?
HI-EMT treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits.
When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice increased muscle activation during the initial sessions. Visible changes vary and may develop progressively during and after the treatment course.
What performance figures are supplied?
Muscle-growth figures of 15–20% and fat-reduction figures of 20–25%. These figures are not guaranteed outcomes.
How long can results last?
A possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, treatment consistency, applicator placement, settings, diet, exercise, and individual response.
What cooling system does the machine use?
The system uses combined air-and-water circulation cooling to support continuous professional operation.
What certificates are included?
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, applicator placement, energy adjustment, two- and four-handle configurations, dual-client protocols, cooling-system maintenance, safety, and troubleshooting.
Add 14 Tesla HI-EMT Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine enables slimming clinics, fitness centers, medical spas, and body-contouring professionals to provide focused or multi-area electromagnetic muscle-conditioning treatments.
Five key benefits:
-
Professional HI-EMT technology with a listed 14 Tesla maximum output
-
Flexible two- or four-handle configurations
-
Approximately 20,000 contractions per session
-
A 12-inch touchscreen with air-and-water cooling
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for model selection, product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$2,699.00
Professional 7D HIFU Facial and Body Treatment System
Eight-Cartridge Focused Ultrasound Technology for Facial Lifting and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine is a professional aesthetic system developed for facial lifting, wrinkle care, skin tightening, collagen stimulation, and body-contouring treatments.
High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound technology delivers concentrated ultrasound energy at selected tissue depths. Eight cartridges covering depths from 1.5mm to 16mm support customized treatments for superficial facial areas, deeper facial structures, and suitable body areas.
With adjustable energy settings, intelligent touchscreen controls, facial and body treatment capability, and dual-voltage compatibility, the system is suitable for aesthetic clinics, beauty salons, slimming centers, and professional skincare facilities.
7D HIFU technology | Eight cartridges | 1.5–16mm treatment depths | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
Multi-Depth Focused Ultrasound
The system delivers focused ultrasound energy at selected depths without requiring incisions or injectable products.
Common applications include:
-
Facial skin tightening
-
Fine-line and wrinkle care
-
Jawline contouring
-
Neck and décolletage treatments
-
Body skin-firming programs
-
Professional body-contouring treatments
Facial Lifting and Collagen Stimulation
The 1.5mm, 3.0mm, and 4.5mm cartridges are designed for treatments across different facial tissue depths.
Common applications include:
-
Reduced facial firmness
-
Fine lines and wrinkles
-
Lower-face laxity
-
Jawline definition
-
Double-chin-area treatment
-
Neck skin tightening
Body Contouring and Skin Firming
The 6mm, 8mm, 10mm, 13mm, and 16mm cartridges support professional treatments for suitable body areas.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Upper-arm treatments
-
Thigh contouring
-
Buttock-area programs
-
Body skin tightening
-
Cellulite-appearance improvement
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Facial-Rejuvenation Program
Uses suitable facial cartridges and customized energy settings for general facial lifting and skin-rejuvenation treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Fine lines and wrinkles
-
Reduced facial firmness
-
Uneven-looking skin texture
-
Early signs of aging
-
General collagen-stimulation programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking non-invasive facial rejuvenation
-
Clients concerned about visible signs of aging
-
Clients wanting progressive skin-quality improvement
Facial-Lifting and Jawline Program
Uses suitable middle and deeper facial treatment depths to support lower-face tightening and contour definition.
Recommended applications:
-
Lower-face laxity
-
Reduced jawline definition
-
Jowl-area treatments
-
Double-chin concerns
-
Neck skin tightening
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking a firmer-looking lower face
-
Clients concerned about facial contours
-
Clients interested in non-surgical lifting programs
Body-Contouring Program
Uses deeper body cartridges for suitable body areas requiring contouring and skin-firming treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Upper-arm treatments
-
Thigh contouring
-
Buttock-area programs
-
Body skin tightening
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about localized body areas
-
Clients seeking non-invasive body treatments
-
Clients combining treatment with healthy lifestyle habits
Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment following completion of the client’s initial HIFU program.
Recommended applications:
-
Facial-lifting maintenance
-
Skin-firming maintenance
-
Body-contour maintenance
-
Continued collagen-stimulation programs
Recommended for:
-
Returning HIFU clients
-
Clients completing an initial treatment plan
-
Clients seeking periodic professional maintenance
Adjustable Treatment Depths and Energy Settings
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine provides eight cartridge depths for different facial and body applications.
| Treatment Depth | General Treatment Level | Possible Applications |
|---|---|---|
| 1.5mm | Superficial facial tissue | Fine lines, texture, and delicate facial areas |
| 3.0mm | Dermal facial layer | Collagen stimulation and skin tightening |
| 4.5mm | Deeper facial layer | Facial lifting, jawline, and lower-face treatments |
| 6.0mm | Shallow body treatment | Arms and smaller body areas |
| 8.0mm | Medium body treatment | Abdomen, waist, and thigh programs |
| 10.0mm | Deeper body treatment | Body contouring and suitable buttock areas |
| 13.0mm | Deep body treatment | Larger body areas and thicker tissue |
| 16.0mm | Maximum listed body depth | Professional deep body-contouring protocols |
Energy settings should be selected according to the cartridge, treatment area, tissue condition, client comfort, and professional protocol.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Face, Chin, and Jawline
The three facial cartridges support customized treatments across suitable facial areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Facial lifting
-
Fine-line care
-
Wrinkle reduction
-
Jawline definition
-
Double-chin-area treatment
Neck and Décolletage
Suitable facial depths and controlled energy settings can support professional tightening and rejuvenation programs.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Neck skin tightening
-
Reduced appearance of neck lines
-
Improved-looking firmness
-
Décolletage rejuvenation
-
Collagen-stimulation support
Arms, Abdomen, Thighs, and Buttocks
The deeper cartridge configurations support selected body-contouring and skin-firming treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Abdomen treatments
-
Thigh contouring
-
Buttock-area programs
-
Body skin firming
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Depth Category |
|---|---|---|
| Face | Lifting, tightening, and wrinkle care | 1.5mm, 3.0mm, or 4.5mm |
| Chin and Jawline | Contour definition and lower-face tightening | Suitable facial depth |
| Neck | Skin tightening and line care | Suitable facial depth |
| Décolletage | Texture and firmness improvement | Professionally selected facial depth |
| Upper Arms | Skin firming and contouring | Suitable body depth |
| Abdomen | Body contouring and tightening | Suitable deeper body depth |
| Thighs | Contouring and cellulite-appearance care | Suitable body depth |
| Buttocks | Skin-firming and contouring support | Suitable body depth |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, skin condition, previous aesthetic procedures, target areas, treatment objectives, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment process and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Cartridge Selection
Select the appropriate facial or body cartridge according to the treatment area, target depth, tissue condition, and professional protocol.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Clean the treatment area and apply suitable ultrasound gel. Configure the energy level and treatment parameters according to the selected cartridge and client tolerance.
Step 4: HIFU Treatment
Position the handpiece correctly and deliver focused ultrasound energy according to the mapped treatment plan. Monitor client comfort and tissue response throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the ultrasound gel, inspect and clean the treated area, record the cartridge and settings used, and provide appropriate post-treatment skincare guidance.
Designed for Professional Beauty Environments
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine combines multi-depth facial and body treatment capability with straightforward professional operation.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional 7D HIFU technology
-
Eight treatment cartridges
-
Treatment depths from 1.5mm to 16mm
-
Three facial cartridges
-
Five body cartridges
-
Facial and body treatment capability
-
Adjustable energy settings
-
Intelligent touchscreen controls
-
Approximately 30–60-minute sessions
-
Facial lifting and wrinkle-care programs
-
Jawline and neck treatments
-
Body-contouring and skin-firming programs
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine |
| Technology | 7D High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound |
| Treatment Cartridges | Eight |
| Treatment Depths | 1.5mm, 3.0mm, 4.5mm, 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm |
| Facial Cartridges | 1.5mm, 3.0mm, and 4.5mm |
| Body Cartridges | 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm |
| Primary Functions | Skin tightening, facial lifting, wrinkle care, and body contouring |
| Treatment Areas | Face, neck, jawline, arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30–60 minutes |
| Treatment Frequency | Personalized according to client assessment |
| Supplied Results Timeline | Initial changes may be visible after one session, with progressive improvement over two to three months |
| Supplied Results Duration | Approximately 12–18 months |
| Energy Output | Adjustable |
| Display | Intelligent touchscreen with cartridge selection |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
Results timelines and duration are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty 7D HIFU main unit
-
1 × Professional HIFU treatment handpiece
-
1 × 1.5mm cartridge
-
1 × 3.0mm cartridge
-
1 × 4.5mm cartridge
-
1 × 6.0mm cartridge
-
1 × 8.0mm cartridge
-
1 × 10.0mm cartridge
-
1 × 13.0mm cartridge
-
1 × 16.0mm cartridge
-
Intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Adjustable energy controls
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Professional video training
-
Cartridge-selection guidance
-
Energy-adjustment guidance
-
Facial treatment protocols
-
Jawline and neck protocols
-
Body-contouring protocols
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Facial and body assessment
-
Treatment-area mapping
-
Cartridge selection
-
Energy-level adjustment
-
Handpiece positioning
-
Facial-lifting protocols
-
Jawline and neck protocols
-
Body-contouring protocols
-
Post-treatment care
-
Equipment cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Cartridges and other components subject to normal use or shot limitations are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable cartridges, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation, health-history review, and skin assessment should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or breastfeeding
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within the treatment area
-
Active skin infection
-
Open wounds or severe inflammation
-
Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment
-
Keloid tendency or significant scarring
-
Severe vascular conditions
-
Poor wound healing
-
Severe or recent sunburn
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Recent injectable or aggressive skin treatments
-
Reduced or impaired skin sensation
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients who have recently received fillers, botulinum toxin, chemical peels, or other professional aesthetic procedures should be assessed before treatment.
HIFU should not be applied over the eyes, thyroid gland, major nerves, bones, reproductive organs, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, handpiece, cartridges, cables, and accessories before use.
-
Confirm the cartridge and treatment depth before beginning.
-
Map the treatment area carefully.
-
Apply sufficient ultrasound gel.
-
Begin with conservative energy settings.
-
Monitor client comfort and tissue response.
-
Do not deliver energy over prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Do not repeatedly treat the same point outside the protocol.
-
Record the cartridge, depth, energy, and treatment area.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin reaction occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Beauty salons
-
Medical spas
-
Skin-rejuvenation studios
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Professional spas
-
Slimming centers
-
Wellness facilities
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HIFU treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine?
Eight Multi-Depth Cartridges
Eight cartridges covering depths from 1.5mm to 16mm support customized facial and body treatments.
Facial and Body Versatility
One system supports treatments for the face, neck, jawline, arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks.
Adjustable Professional Settings
Interchangeable cartridges and adjustable energy controls allow professionals to customize treatments according to the target area and client.
Intelligent Touchscreen Operation
The touchscreen interface supports cartridge selection, parameter adjustment, and professional treatment management.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, cartridge guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine?
It is a professional High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound system developed for facial lifting, skin tightening, wrinkle care, collagen stimulation, and selected body-contouring treatments.
What does 7D HIFU mean?
The product uses a multi-depth HIFU cartridge system designed to deliver focused ultrasound energy at different facial and body treatment depths.
How many cartridges are included?
The package includes eight cartridges covering treatment depths from 1.5mm to 16mm.
Which cartridges are used for facial treatments?
The 1.5mm, 3.0mm, and 4.5mm cartridges are supplied for professional facial and neck treatment protocols.
Which cartridges are used for body treatments?
The 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm cartridges are supplied for suitable body treatment areas.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, neck, jawline, upper arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks.
How long does one treatment take?
A standard professional treatment takes approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the treatment area, cartridge, and selected protocol.
How many treatments are recommended?
One to three sessions per year. The final treatment schedule should be personalized according to the client’s condition and objectives.
When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice an initial tightening effect after one session, with progressive changes continuing over two to three months.
How long can results last?
The supplied information indicates a possible duration of 12–18 months. Actual longevity varies according to age, skin condition, treatment settings, lifestyle, and individual response.
Is there downtime?
Many clients can continue normal daily activities after a suitable treatment. Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, or sensitivity may occur.
What does HIFU treatment feel like?
Clients may experience warmth, tingling, pressure, or brief sensitivity as focused ultrasound energy is delivered.
Can the machine be used for body treatments?
Yes. The deeper cartridge configurations support selected treatments for the upper arms, abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and other suitable body areas.
Are results guaranteed?
Results vary according to age, tissue condition, treatment area, cartridge selection, energy settings, lifestyle, and individual response.
What certificates are included?
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, treatment mapping, cartridge selection, energy adjustment, facial and body protocols, aftercare, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Professional 7D HIFU Treatments to Your Business
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine enables aesthetic clinics, beauty salons, and wellness professionals to provide customizable facial-lifting, skin-tightening, wrinkle-care, and body-contouring services.
Five key benefits:
-
Eight professional cartridges from 1.5mm to 16mm
-
Facial and body treatment capability
-
Adjustable energy settings for customized protocols
-
Intelligent touchscreen with cartridge selection
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, cartridge details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$1,999.00
Professional 360-Degree Cryolipolysis System
Multiple Applicators for Non-Invasive Body Contouring Treatments
The Wikbeauty 360 Cryolipolysis Machine is a professional controlled-cooling system developed for medical spas, body-contouring studios, aesthetic clinics and professional beauty centers.
Its 360-degree applicator design provides consistent cooling coverage across the selected treatment area. Multiple applicator sizes allow trained operators to create customized protocols for the abdomen, waist, flanks, back, thighs and upper arms.
The system is designed for non-invasive treatment of suitable localized fat deposits without surgery, needles or anesthesia.
360-degree cooling | Multiple applicator sizes | Adjustable temperature | Three-year warranty
Four Body-Contouring Applications on One Professional Platform
Abdomen Treatments
Cryolipolysis applicators can be positioned over suitable localized fat deposits on the abdomen.
An appropriately sized applicator should be selected according to the dimensions, thickness and shape of the treatment area.
Common applications include:
-
Upper-abdomen contouring
-
Lower-abdomen contouring
-
Localized abdominal fat
-
Central body-contouring programs
-
Multi-session abdominal protocols
-
Customized abdomen treatments
Waist and Flank Treatments
The system supports professional contouring treatments for suitable localized fat deposits around the waist and flanks.
Common applications include:
-
Waist-contour refinement
-
Love-handle treatments
-
Side-body contouring
-
Lower-back treatments
-
Flank-reduction programs
-
Customized waist protocols
Thigh Treatments
Multiple applicator sizes support professional treatments for suitable areas of the inner and outer thighs.
Common applications include:
-
Inner-thigh contouring
-
Outer-thigh contouring
-
Upper-thigh treatments
-
Localized thigh areas
-
Lower-body contouring
-
Multi-area thigh protocols
Upper-Arm and Back Treatments
Smaller applicators may be selected for suitable localized fat deposits on the upper arms, back and bra-line areas.
Common applications include:
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Upper-back treatments
-
Lower-back treatments
-
Bra-line areas
-
Small localized fat deposits
-
Customized body-contouring programs
The appropriate applicator should be selected according to the treatment area, tissue thickness, client suitability and professional protocol.
Select the Right Applicator for Each Treatment Area
The system supports multiple applicator sizes. The appropriate applicator should be selected according to the size, shape and thickness of the intended treatment area.
Application 1: Abdomen
A body-contouring application for suitable localized abdominal fat deposits.
Recommended applications:
-
Upper abdomen
-
Lower abdomen
-
Central abdominal areas
-
Broader treatment zones
Recommended for:
-
Abdominal-contouring programs
-
Multi-session body treatments
-
Clients with suitable localized fat
-
Clinics offering focused abdomen services
Application 2: Waist and Flanks
A targeted application for localized fat deposits around the sides of the body.
Recommended applications:
-
Waist
-
Love handles
-
Flanks
-
Lower back
Recommended for:
-
Waist-contouring treatments
-
Side-body refinement
-
Multi-area body packages
-
Clinics offering torso-contouring services
Application 3: Thighs
A lower-body application for suitable inner- and outer-thigh areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Inner thighs
-
Outer thighs
-
Upper thighs
-
Localized lower-body areas
Recommended for:
-
Thigh-contouring programs
-
Lower-body packages
-
Multi-area treatments
-
Body-contouring clinics
Application 4: Upper Arms and Back
A targeted application for smaller localized fat deposits.
Recommended applications:
-
Upper arms
-
Upper back
-
Lower back
-
Bra-line areas
Recommended for:
-
Smaller treatment zones
-
Targeted contouring services
-
Customized treatment packages
-
Clinics expanding their body-treatment menu
Precision Cooling for Customized Cryolipolysis Treatments
The 360 Cryolipolysis Machine provides an adjustable cooling range from 5°C to −11°C. Each setting should be selected according to the applicator, treatment area, tissue condition and professional protocol.
| Cooling Level | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Mild Cooling | Initial assessment and comfort-focused protocols |
| Moderate Cooling | General professional body-contouring treatments |
| Lower Temperature | Appropriately selected protocols for suitable tissue |
| Customized Cooling | Treatment-specific settings based on professional assessment |
The adjustable cooling system gives trained operators greater control over treatment temperature and client comfort.
The correct temperature, suction level and treatment duration must be selected following consultation and assessment of the intended treatment area.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Different applicators support different body areas and professional contouring protocols.
Torso Treatments
-
Upper abdomen
-
Lower abdomen
-
Waist
-
Flanks
-
Upper back
-
Lower back
Lower-Body Treatments
-
Inner thighs
-
Outer thighs
-
Upper thighs
-
Other suitable localized areas
-
Multi-area lower-body programs
Smaller Treatment Areas
-
Upper arms
-
Bra-line areas
-
Small back areas
-
Other appropriately selected localized fat deposits
Professional Body-Contouring Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected applicator, cooling temperature, suction setting and professional protocol.
| Treatment Area | Applicable Applicator | Intended Aesthetic Application |
|---|---|---|
| Upper abdomen | Suitable large applicator | Abdominal-contour refinement |
| Lower abdomen | Suitable large applicator | Localized body contouring |
| Waist and flanks | Medium or contoured applicator | Side-body contour refinement |
| Inner thighs | Suitable medium applicator | Lower-body contouring |
| Outer thighs | Suitable medium or large applicator | Thigh-contour refinement |
| Upper arms | Suitable small applicator | Targeted arm contouring |
| Upper and lower back | Suitable applicator | Localized back treatment |
| Bra-line area | Suitable small applicator | Targeted contour refinement |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment.
How a Professional Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s medical history, treatment goals, tissue condition and suitability. The intended areas are measured and an appropriate treatment plan is created.
2. Skin and Applicator Preparation
The selected area is exposed and prepared according to the operating protocol. A protective antifreeze membrane is placed correctly over the skin before applicator attachment.
3. Parameter Selection
The operator selects the applicator, cooling temperature, suction level, session duration and other available settings according to the treatment area and professional protocol.
4. Controlled Cooling Treatment
The applicator is positioned securely over the localized fat deposit. The system applies controlled cooling for approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the selected area and protocol.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
The applicator and protective membrane are removed. The operator inspects the treated area and performs the recommended post-treatment procedure.
Temporary redness, firmness, bruising, tenderness, tingling, numbness or sensitivity may occur following treatment.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines digital controls with adjustable 360-degree cooling technology for streamlined use in professional body-contouring settings.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Digital control display
-
Adjustable 5°C to −11°C cooling range
-
360-degree applicator coverage
-
Multiple applicator sizes
-
Adjustable treatment parameters
-
Automatic temperature control
-
Protective skin membranes
-
110V–240V power compatibility
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty 360 Cryolipolysis Machine |
| Product Type | Professional non-invasive body-contouring system |
| Technology | Controlled cryolipolysis cooling |
| Cooling Range | 5°C to −11°C |
| Coverage Design | 360-degree applicator cooling |
| Applicator Options | Multiple sizes for different body areas |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30–60 minutes per treatment area |
| Recommended Protocol | Commonly 1–3 sessions per area, depending on assessment |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, waist, flanks, back, thighs and upper arms |
| Safety Features | Automatic temperature control, protective membranes and safety monitoring |
| Control Interface | Digital display with preset cryolipolysis programs |
| Power Supply | 110V–240V |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and lifetime technical support |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main cryolipolysis system, treatment applicators and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One 360 Cryolipolysis control system
-
Multiple treatment applicators
-
Applicator connection components
-
Protective antifreeze membranes
-
Required treatment accessories
-
Power cable
-
English user manual
-
Operating guidance
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Remote professional training
-
Machine setup guidance
-
Applicator installation instructions
-
Treatment-area assessment guidance
-
Cooling and suction parameter guidance
-
Protective-membrane instructions
-
Safety and contraindication information
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Applicator installation
-
Digital-control operation
-
Applicator-size selection
-
Cooling-temperature adjustment
-
Suction-level selection
-
Treatment-area assessment
-
Protective-membrane application
-
Basic body-contouring protocols
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
A professional training certificate is provided after completion.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 360 Cryolipolysis Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Digital display and control system
-
Internal cooling components
-
Original treatment applicators
-
Applicator connection components
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect applicator operation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of membranes and consumable items
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional cryolipolysis equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete consultation, tissue assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Cryoglobulinemia
-
Cold agglutinin disease
-
Paroxysmal cold hemoglobinuria
-
Severe cold sensitivity
-
Raynaud’s disease
-
Uncontrolled cardiovascular conditions
-
Severe circulation disorders
-
Open wounds or active infections
-
Severe skin conditions in the treatment area
-
Impaired sensation
-
Bleeding disorders
-
Recent surgery
-
Hernia in or near the treatment area
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
The protective antifreeze membrane must be positioned correctly before cooling begins. The skin and applicator contact must be monitored throughout the session.
Possible treatment responses include temporary redness, bruising, swelling, firmness, tenderness, cramping, tingling, numbness and changes in skin sensitivity.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Medical spas
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Professional beauty centers
-
Wellness clinics
-
Trained body-contouring practitioners
-
Qualified healthcare professionals
-
Businesses expanding their non-invasive body services
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty 360 Cryolipolysis Machine?
Treat Multiple Body Areas
Multiple applicator sizes support professional treatments for the abdomen, waist, flanks, back, thighs and upper arms.
Provide Consistent Cooling Coverage
The 360-degree applicator design distributes cooling across the selected treatment area for consistent professional application.
Customize Every Treatment
Adjustable cooling, suction, duration and applicator selection allow treatments to be adapted to tissue condition and professional objectives.
Expand Your Service Menu
The system allows clinics to add non-invasive body-contouring treatments, multi-area packages and customized treatment programs.
Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, professional training, a training certificate and lifetime technical support.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is cryolipolysis?
Cryolipolysis is a non-invasive body-contouring treatment that applies controlled cooling to suitable localized fat tissue. The body gradually processes affected cells following treatment.
What does 360-degree cooling mean?
The applicator distributes cooling around the treatment surface, providing consistent coverage across the selected localized area.
Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable areas may include the abdomen, waist, flanks, upper and lower back, inner and outer thighs and upper arms.
How long does a treatment take?
A typical session lasts approximately 30–60 minutes per treatment area. The exact duration depends on the applicator, treatment zone and professional protocol.
How many sessions are recommended?
A professional treatment course may include approximately 1–3 sessions per area, commonly spaced several weeks apart. The final protocol depends on tissue condition, treatment goals and individual response.
When may clients notice changes?
Changes may develop gradually over several weeks as the body processes the affected cells. The result and timeline vary according to the treatment area, tissue thickness and individual response.
Is cryolipolysis uncomfortable?
Clients commonly feel cold, pulling or pressure when treatment begins, followed by temporary numbness. Tenderness, bruising or sensitivity may occur after treatment.
Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary redness, swelling, bruising, tenderness or numbness may occur.
Are results permanent?
Affected fat cells processed by the body do not regenerate in the same way. However, remaining fat cells can enlarge with future weight gain, so stable weight and healthy lifestyle habits remain important.
Is professional training included?
Remote professional training and operating guidance are included. A professional training certificate is provided after completion.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included.
Add Professional Cryolipolysis to Your Business
The Wikbeauty 360 Cryolipolysis Machine combines:
-
360-degree controlled cooling
-
Multiple professional applicator sizes
-
Adjustable 5°C to −11°C temperature settings
-
Professional multi-area body-contouring applications
-
Three-year parts warranty and lifetime support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its applicators, treatment protocols and professional training.
Order Your 360 Cryolipolysis Machine and Request a Quote
Receives in 8 days.
$560.00
Professional Lipo Laser Slimming Machine
Non-Invasive Fat Reduction, Body Slimming, and Contouring System
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine is a professional body-contouring system designed to support targeted fat reduction, inch loss, and improved body shape without surgery or downtime.
Using 650nm low-level laser therapy, the system delivers controlled red-light energy through multiple laser pads positioned over selected treatment areas. This energy supports the release of stored triglycerides from fat cells as free fatty acids and glycerol, which are then processed naturally by the body.
With an intelligent touchscreen, multiple body applicators, and universal 110V/220V compatibility, the machine is suitable for slimming salons, spas, wellness centers, fitness clinics, and professional aesthetic practices.
650nm Lipo Laser | Multiple Treatment Pads | 20–40-Minute Sessions | CE and ISO Certificates | Three-Year Warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
Lipo Laser Fat-Reduction Technology
The machine uses 650nm low-level laser therapy to target localized fat deposits without surgery, needles, or anesthesia. Multiple laser pads deliver controlled energy across the selected treatment area.
Common applications include:
-
Localized fat-reduction treatments
-
Waist and abdominal contouring
-
Arm and thigh slimming
-
Hip, flank, and back shaping
-
Buttock contour refinement
Body Sculpting and Inch-Loss Treatments
The flexible laser-pad system allows operators to position applicators around different body zones. This supports customized slimming programs based on the client’s proportions and treatment objectives.
Common applications include:
-
Waistline definition
-
Abdominal contour improvement
-
Arm and thigh reshaping
-
Hip and flank contouring
-
Multi-area body-sculpting programs
Cellulite and Skin-Quality Support
Lipo laser treatments can be incorporated into professional programs designed to improve the appearance of uneven skin texture while supporting smoother and firmer-looking skin.
Common applications include:
-
Cellulite-appearance reduction
-
Skin-texture improvement
-
Firmness and elasticity support
-
Post-slimming skin conditioning
-
Body-smoothing treatments
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Targeted Fat-Reduction Program
Designed for clients with localized areas of stubborn fat that may be resistant to regular diet and exercise.
Recommended applications: Abdomen, waist, hips, thighs, arms, back, and flanks.
Recommended for: Clients seeking focused treatment of one or two specific body areas.
Complete Body-Contouring Program
A multi-area protocol that uses several laser pads to support balanced body shaping and improved proportions.
Recommended applications: Abdomen and waist, thighs and hips, arms and back, or other compatible area combinations.
Recommended for: Clients seeking a more comprehensive body-sculpting course.
Cellulite and Skin-Smoothing Program
A treatment program focused on the appearance of uneven texture, cellulite, and reduced skin firmness.
Recommended applications: Thighs, hips, buttocks, abdomen, and upper arms.
Recommended for: Clients who want smoother-looking skin alongside body-contouring benefits.
Maintenance and Shape-Management Program
A flexible follow-up program designed to support previously achieved contouring results.
Recommended applications: Previously treated body areas requiring periodic maintenance.
Recommended for: Clients who have completed an initial treatment course and want ongoing body-contouring support.
Adjustable Laser and Treatment Settings
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Laser Wavelength | 650nm red light | Supports professional low-level laser body-contouring treatments |
| Treatment Time | Adjustable within the recommended 20–40-minute range | Allows sessions to be adapted to the selected area and protocol |
| Laser Pads | Multiple body applicators | Supports simultaneous treatment of compatible body areas |
| Treatment Area | Single-area or multi-area positioning | Enables targeted and comprehensive body-contouring programs |
| Treatment Course | Approximately 8–12 sessions recommended | Supports progressive results through a structured treatment plan |
| Control Interface | Intelligent touchscreen | Provides convenient treatment selection and operating control |
Treatment settings, session frequency, and pad positioning should be selected according to the client’s assessment, treatment area, comfort, and professional operating protocol.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Upper-Body Areas
Treatment pads can be positioned on suitable upper-body zones where localized fat deposits or reduced definition are present.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Back-fat reduction support
-
Flank shaping
-
Waistline definition
-
Improved upper-body proportions
Abdominal and Waist Areas
The abdomen and waist are common areas for professional lipo laser body-contouring programs.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal contouring
-
Waistline slimming
-
Localized inch-loss support
-
Flank and side shaping
-
Improved midsection definition
Lower-Body Areas
Multiple pads can be arranged across compatible lower-body treatment zones.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Inner- and outer-thigh contouring
-
Hip shaping
-
Buttock contour refinement
-
Cellulite-appearance improvement
-
Smoother-looking lower-body contours
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Application | Primary Area | Professional Objective |
|---|---|---|
| Abdominal Slimming | Abdomen | Support localized fat reduction and improved abdominal contour |
| Waistline Contouring | Waist and flanks | Create a more defined waistline |
| Arm Slimming | Upper arms | Improve arm shape and reduce the appearance of localized fullness |
| Thigh Contouring | Inner and outer thighs | Support smoother and more balanced leg contours |
| Hip Shaping | Hips | Improve overall body proportions |
| Back Contouring | Upper and lower back | Target localized fat deposits and improve back definition |
| Buttock Contouring | Buttocks | Refine shape and improve surrounding contours |
| Cellulite Care | Thighs, hips, and buttocks | Improve the appearance of uneven skin texture |
| Skin-Firming Support | Multiple body areas | Support smoother and firmer-looking skin |
| Multi-Area Sculpting | Combined body zones | Deliver a customized body-contouring program |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s treatment goals, medical history, lifestyle, current body condition, and potential contraindications.
Step 2: Body Assessment
Identify suitable treatment areas, document measurements when required, and create a personalized treatment plan.
Step 3: Laser-Pad Placement
Position the laser pads securely over the selected treatment areas according to the operating protocol.
Step 4: Treatment Configuration
Select the appropriate treatment time and operating settings using the intelligent touchscreen interface. A typical session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes.
Step 5: Aftercare Guidance
Remove the applicators, inspect the treated area, and provide suitable hydration, nutrition, activity, and treatment-course guidance.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine combines a straightforward operating system with flexible applicator placement, making it suitable for a variety of professional body-contouring businesses.
Key advantages include:
-
Non-invasive treatment technology
-
Multiple laser pads for flexible positioning
-
Intelligent touchscreen operation
-
Single-area and multi-area treatment capability
-
Approximately 20–40-minute sessions
-
No surgical recovery period
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
Professional training and after-sales support
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year warranty
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine |
| Technology | Low-Level Laser Therapy |
| Laser Wavelength | 650nm red light |
| Primary Functions | Fat reduction, body slimming, body contouring, cellulite care, and skin-tightening support |
| Applicators | Multiple laser pads for different body areas |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, waist, arms, thighs, hips, back, flanks, and buttocks |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–40 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Approximately 8–12 sessions |
| Display and Controls | Intelligent touchscreen interface |
| Power Supply | 110V/220V dual compatibility |
| Certificates | CE and ISO |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| After-Sales Service | Professional training and technical support |
Treatment experiences and visible outcomes may vary according to the client’s body composition, lifestyle, treatment area, treatment frequency, and adherence to the recommended course. Results should not be presented as guaranteed.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine
-
Multiple laser-pad body applicators
-
1 × Compatible power cable
-
1 × Warranty card
-
Standard accessories required for machine operation
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Machine setup guidance
-
Operating instructions
-
Laser-pad placement guidance
-
Treatment protocol training
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
After-sales technical support
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional operating guidance to help owners and treatment providers use the machine confidently and consistently.
Training and support cover:
-
Machine installation and initial setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Laser-pad positioning
-
Treatment-area selection
-
Session configuration
-
Client assessment procedures
-
Safety and contraindication screening
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Troubleshooting assistance
-
Treatment-protocol guidance
Ongoing after-sales support is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine includes a three-year professional warranty and after-sales technical support.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty provides support for eligible machine components and manufacturing-related faults under normal operating conditions. Technical assessment may be required before replacement parts or repair instructions are issued.
Warranty support includes:
-
Remote technical diagnosis
-
Operating and troubleshooting assistance
-
Support for eligible replacement parts
-
Repair guidance
-
Maintenance recommendations
-
After-sales communication throughout the warranty period
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty support team with the machine model and order information.
-
Provide a clear description of the issue.
-
Submit photos or a short video when requested.
-
Allow the technical team to diagnose the machine.
-
Follow the provided troubleshooting or repair instructions.
-
Receive eligible replacement-part support when required.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by:
-
Incorrect operation
-
Unauthorized modification or repair
-
Accidental impact or physical damage
-
Improper voltage or electrical installation
-
Water damage or unsuitable storage conditions
-
Failure to follow maintenance instructions
-
Normal wear of consumable components
-
Shipping or relocation damage occurring after delivery
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and contraindication screening should be completed before treatment. The machine should be operated only by trained users following the supplied instructions and applicable local requirements.
Treatment may be unsuitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or breastfeeding
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment
-
Severe liver or kidney conditions
-
Uncontrolled diabetes
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds or damaged skin in the treatment area
-
Recent surgery in the intended treatment area
-
Photosensitivity or use of photosensitizing medication
-
Any medical condition requiring professional clearance
Clients with medical concerns should consult a qualified healthcare professional before treatment.
Operating Precautions
-
Complete a client consultation before every initial treatment.
-
Inspect the machine, cables, and laser pads before use.
-
Clean and disinfect applicators according to the manual.
-
Position laser pads securely without excessive pressure.
-
Do not apply pads over open wounds or inflamed skin.
-
Do not exceed the recommended treatment time.
-
Monitor client comfort throughout the session.
-
Stop treatment if the client experiences an unexpected reaction.
-
Keep the machine away from excessive moisture and heat.
-
Use a stable and correctly grounded power supply.
-
Follow the recommended cleaning and maintenance schedule.
-
Keep accurate treatment records when required.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine is suitable for:
-
Body-slimming salons
-
Beauty salons
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Wellness centers
-
Day spas and medical spas
-
Fitness and body-transformation centers
-
Weight-management businesses
-
Professional body-contouring providers
Users must follow the supplied operating instructions, complete appropriate training, and comply with local regulations governing aesthetic equipment.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine?
1. Professional 650nm Lipo Laser Technology
The system uses 650nm low-level laser therapy to support non-invasive fat-reduction and body-contouring treatments.
2. Multiple Laser-Pad Applicators
Flexible pad placement allows professionals to target different body areas and create customized treatment programs.
3. Non-Invasive Client Experience
Treatments require no surgery, needles, anesthesia, or extended recovery period, making the service convenient for suitable clients.
4. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating guidance, treatment training, technical assistance, and after-sales support.
5. Three-Year Warranty and Certified Quality
The system includes a three-year professional warranty and is supplied with CE and ISO certificates.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How does the Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine work?
The system uses 650nm low-level laser energy delivered through body applicators. The treatment supports the release of stored triglycerides from fat cells into free fatty acids and glycerol, which are processed naturally by the body.
Q: Is the treatment invasive?
No. Lipo laser is a non-invasive body-contouring treatment that does not require surgery, injections, or anesthesia.
Q: Is the treatment painful?
Most clients describe the treatment as comfortable and relaxing. Individual sensitivity can vary, so client comfort should be monitored throughout every session.
Q: How long does one session take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes, depending on the treatment area and selected protocol.
Q: How many sessions are recommended?
A complete course generally includes approximately 8–12 sessions. The final recommendation should be based on the client’s assessment and treatment objectives.
Q: When can clients expect visible changes?
Some clients may notice changes after the first few sessions, while more developed results usually require completion of the recommended treatment course. Individual outcomes vary.
Q: Which body areas can be treated?
Compatible areas include the abdomen, waist, arms, thighs, hips, back, flanks, and buttocks.
Q: Can multiple areas be treated during one session?
The multiple-pad system supports simultaneous placement across compatible treatment zones. Operators must follow the recommended pad arrangement and treatment protocol.
Q: Is there any downtime?
Lipo laser treatments generally do not require a surgical recovery period. Suitable clients can normally return to their usual activities after treatment.
Q: Can the machine help improve the appearance of cellulite?
The system can be incorporated into professional programs designed to improve body contours and the appearance of uneven skin texture.
Q: Does the machine provide skin-tightening benefits?
Treatments can support smoother and firmer-looking skin as part of a structured body-contouring program.
Q: Are lipo laser results permanent?
Results depend on the client’s lifestyle, nutrition, physical activity, treatment course, and weight stability. The service should not be marketed as guaranteeing permanent fat loss.
Q: What should clients do after treatment?
Clients are generally advised to remain hydrated, maintain balanced nutrition, and follow appropriate activity and aftercare guidance provided by the treatment professional.
Q: Is the machine suitable for every client?
No. Every client should complete a consultation and contraindication screening before treatment.
Q: Can the machine be used on all skin types?
Low-level laser therapy may be suitable for a broad range of skin types, but individual assessment and contraindication screening remain necessary.
Q: Does the machine support 110V and 220V power?
Yes. The supplied specifications include 110V and 220V dual-voltage compatibility.
Q: What certificates are included?
The machine is supplied with CE and ISO certificates.
Q: Is professional training included?
Yes. Professional setup, operating, treatment-protocol, safety, and maintenance guidance are included.
Q: What warranty is provided?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with after-sales technical support.
Q: What is included with the machine?
The package includes the main machine, multiple laser-pad applicators, a compatible power cable, a user manual and training guide, a warranty card, and standard operating accessories.
Add Professional Lipo Laser Slimming to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine gives salons, spas, wellness centers, and aesthetic clinics a versatile solution for non-invasive fat reduction, body contouring, cellulite care, and skin-quality treatments.
Five key benefits:
-
Professional 650nm low-level laser technology
-
Multiple pads for flexible body-area treatment
-
Non-invasive 20–40-minute sessions
-
Intelligent touchscreen operation
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, ordering information, training details, and professional support.
Receives in 8 days.
Professional 15-in-1 Hydra Facial and Skin-Care System
Fifteen Treatment Technologies for Professional Facial Rejuvenation
The WikBeauty 15-in-1 Hydra Beauty Skin System is a multifunctional facial platform developed for beauty salons, professional spas, aesthetic clinics and skin-care studios.
The system combines 15 treatment technologies for deep cleansing, exfoliation, hydration, product infusion, skin firming, acne-care support, pore refinement, brightening and facial rejuvenation.
Its 500W maximum power, 14-inch touchscreen, adjustable vacuum pressure and intelligent software controls provide treatment flexibility for different skin concerns and professional facial protocols.
Fifteen treatment technologies | 14-inch touchscreen | Adjustable vacuum control | Three-year warranty
Fifteen Treatment Technologies on One Professional Platform
Hydro Dermabrasion
Hydro dermabrasion combines controlled suction, liquid flow and treatment solutions for professional cleansing and exfoliation.
Common applications include:
-
Deep facial cleansing
-
Surface exfoliation
-
Oil and debris removal
-
Skin hydration
-
Pore-care treatments
-
General facial rejuvenation
Bubble Pen
The Bubble Pen is designed for purifying and cleansing-focused skin-care protocols.
Common applications include:
-
Surface cleansing
-
Congested-looking skin
-
Oily-skin programs
-
Pore-care treatments
-
Facial preparation
-
General skin refinement
Bio RF Handle
The Bio RF handle delivers controlled radiofrequency energy for professional firming and rejuvenation programs.
Common applications include:
-
Skin-firming support
-
Fine-line appearance
-
Facial rejuvenation
-
Elasticity-focused treatments
-
Mature-skin programs
-
General anti-aging services
Three-Pole Bio-Electric Handle
The three-pole bio-electric handle provides controlled stimulation for suitable facial treatment programs.
Common applications include:
-
Facial-toning support
-
Skin-conditioning programs
-
Mature-looking skin
-
General rejuvenation
-
Professional facial services
-
Customized beauty protocols
Water Oxygen Spray
The Water Oxygen Spray provides a fine liquid mist for hydration and skin-care product application.
Common applications include:
-
Skin hydration
-
Cooling and refreshing
-
Facial solution application
-
Post-cleansing care
-
Dull-looking skin
-
General facial wellness
PDT Handle
The PDT handle uses selected LED light programs for professional skin-care applications.
Common applications include:
-
Anti-aging programs
-
Acne-prone skin care
-
Brightening treatments
-
Calming protocols
-
General skin rejuvenation
-
Post-facial support
High-Frequency Handle
The high-frequency handle is designed for suitable professional skin-care and acne-focused protocols.
Common applications include:
-
Oily-skin programs
-
Acne-prone skin care
-
Post-extraction support
-
Clarifying treatments
-
Facial skin conditioning
-
General spa services
Ultrasonic Skin Scrubber
The ultrasonic scrubber supports professional surface cleansing and exfoliation.
Common applications include:
-
Surface exfoliation
-
Pore cleansing
-
Removal of loosened debris
-
Skin-care preparation
-
Texture-refinement programs
-
General facial cleansing
Facial Ultrasound
The Facial Ultrasound handle supports professional facial massage and cosmetic-product application.
Common applications include:
-
Facial massage
-
Product-application support
-
General rejuvenation
-
Skin-conditioning programs
-
Hydration treatments
-
Professional facial packages
Eye Ultrasound
The Eye Ultrasound handle is designed for appropriate professional treatments around suitable eye-area zones.
Common applications include:
-
Under-eye skin care
-
Eye-area massage
-
Puffiness-focused programs
-
Fine-line appearance
-
Product-application support
-
Delicate-area facial treatments
Exfoliation Handle
The exfoliation handle provides controlled surface polishing for professional skin-refinement services.
Common applications include:
-
Gentle exfoliation
-
Uneven-looking texture
-
Surface skin polishing
-
Facial preparation
-
General skin refinement
-
Brightening programs
Microneedling Pen
The microneedling pen creates controlled microchannels for professional skin-remodeling programs.
Common applications include:
-
Uneven skin texture
-
Fine-line appearance
-
Acne-scar appearance
-
Collagen-remodeling programs
-
Professional rejuvenation
-
Customized facial treatments
Diamond Microdermabrasion
The diamond microdermabrasion handle provides controlled mechanical exfoliation using interchangeable diamond tips.
Common applications include:
-
Surface exfoliation
-
Rough-looking skin
-
Uneven-looking texture
-
Dull complexion
-
Skin-care preparation
-
Professional polishing treatments
Ice Hammer
The Ice Hammer provides controlled cooling for calming and post-treatment comfort.
Common applications include:
-
Cooling after facial treatments
-
Temporary redness
-
Skin-comfort programs
-
Pore-care finishing steps
-
Post-extraction support
-
Facial-treatment completion
WikBeauty Nutrient Solutions
The system supports compatible WikBeauty solutions for cleansing, moisturizing and revitalizing professional facial protocols.
Available solution functions include:
-
Purifying
-
Moisturizing
-
Revitalizing
-
Hydro dermabrasion support
-
Customized facial protocols
-
Professional maintenance care
The appropriate technology, settings, products and treatment duration should be selected according to the client’s skin condition, sensitivity and professional protocol.
Select the Right Facial Program for Each Client
The system supports customizable facial programs using one or more of its 15 technologies.
Program 1: Deep Cleansing and Pore Care
A cleansing-focused program for congested, oily or dull-looking skin.
Recommended technologies:
-
Hydro dermabrasion
-
Bubble Pen
-
Ultrasonic scrubber
-
High-frequency handle
-
Ice Hammer
Recommended for:
-
Congested-looking skin
-
Oily-skin programs
-
Pore-care treatments
-
General facial cleansing
Program 2: Hydration and Brightening
A moisture-focused program designed to support refreshed and radiant-looking skin.
Recommended technologies:
-
Hydro dermabrasion
-
Water Oxygen Spray
-
Facial Ultrasound
-
PDT Handle
-
WikBeauty nutrient solutions
Recommended for:
-
Dry-looking skin
-
Dull complexion
-
Skin-brightening services
-
Hydration-focused facials
Program 3: Anti-Aging and Firming
A rejuvenation program for mature-looking skin, fine lines and firmness concerns.
Recommended technologies:
-
Bio RF Handle
-
Three-Pole Bio-Electric Handle
-
Facial Ultrasound
-
Microneedling Pen
-
PDT Handle
Recommended for:
-
Mature-looking skin
-
Fine-line appearance
-
Skin-firming programs
-
Professional anti-aging services
Program 4: Texture and Skin Renewal
A customized program for uneven-looking texture, surface refinement and suitable scar concerns.
Recommended technologies:
-
Diamond Microdermabrasion
-
Exfoliation Handle
-
Microneedling Pen
-
Ultrasonic Scrubber
-
Ice Hammer
Recommended for:
-
Uneven-looking texture
-
Rough-looking skin
-
Acne-scar appearance
-
Professional renewal programs
Precision Vacuum Control for Customized Facial Treatments
The Hydra Beauty Skin System provides adjustable vacuum pressure from 0 to 100KPa. Each setting should be selected according to the treatment handle, skin condition, treatment area and client comfort.
| Vacuum Setting | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Lower Vacuum | Sensitive skin and delicate facial areas |
| Moderate Vacuum | General hydro dermabrasion and cleansing |
| Higher Vacuum | Appropriately selected congested or thicker skin areas |
| Customized Vacuum | Treatment-specific professional facial protocols |
The intelligent software control provides greater flexibility over suction strength, liquid flow and treatment comfort.
New clients should begin with lower vacuum and energy settings before treatment intensity is increased gradually.
Adjustable Facial Treatment Areas
The 15 treatment technologies support professional treatments for multiple facial and skin areas.
Full-Face Treatments
-
Forehead
-
Cheeks
-
Nose
-
Chin
-
Jawline
-
General facial skin
Delicate-Area Treatments
-
Suitable under-eye areas
-
Outer eye area
-
Upper cheeks
-
Lip-contour area
-
Other professionally assessed zones
Neck and Upper-Body Treatments
-
Neck
-
Décolletage
-
Upper chest
-
Suitable hand areas
-
Other appropriate skin zones
Professional Facial and Skin-Care Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected handle, products, vacuum pressure, energy settings and professional protocol.
| Skin Concern | Applicable Technology | Intended Skin-Care Application |
|---|---|---|
| Congested-looking skin | Hydro dermabrasion and scrubber | Deep-cleansing support |
| Dry or dehydrated-looking skin | Hydro dermabrasion and oxygen spray | Hydration-focused care |
| Fine-line appearance | RF, ultrasound or microneedling | Anti-aging support |
| Uneven-looking texture | Microdermabrasion or microneedling | Texture-refinement programs |
| Acne-prone skin | Bubble Pen, PDT or high frequency | Clarifying skin care |
| Dull-looking complexion | PDT, oxygen spray or solutions | Brightening programs |
| Eye-area concerns | Eye Ultrasound | Delicate-area skin care |
| Temporary post-treatment redness | Ice Hammer | Cooling and comfort support |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete skin consultation should be performed before every treatment.
How a Professional Facial Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s skin concerns, treatment history, current products, sensitivities and contraindications. The appropriate facial program is then selected.
2. System Preparation
The required treatment handles, tips, bottles and nutrient solutions are installed according to the operating manual. The operator confirms that all connections are secure.
3. Parameter Selection
Vacuum pressure, RF energy, ultrasound settings, light mode, treatment duration and other available parameters are selected according to the client’s skin condition and professional protocol.
4. Facial Treatment
The operator performs the selected facial steps in the appropriate sequence. A complete professional session generally takes approximately 30–60 minutes.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the skin is assessed and suitable moisturizer and sunscreen are applied where appropriate. The client receives customized aftercare instructions.
Temporary redness, dryness, sensitivity, tingling or mild swelling may occur, particularly after exfoliation or microneedling treatments.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines 15 facial technologies with intelligent touchscreen controls for streamlined professional operation.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Fifteen professional treatment technologies
-
14-inch touchscreen control
-
Adjustable 0–100KPa vacuum
-
Intelligent suction software
-
Maximum 500W power
-
Multiple treatment handles
-
Four solution bottles
-
Modern floor-standing design
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | WikBeauty 15-in-1 Hydra Beauty Skin System |
| Product Type | Professional multifunctional facial system |
| Number of Technologies | 15 |
| Maximum Power | 500W |
| Display | 14-inch touchscreen |
| Vacuum Pressure | 0–100KPa adjustable |
| Vacuum Control | Intelligent software-controlled suction |
| Voltage Options | 110V and 220V |
| Electrical Frequency | 50Hz and 60Hz |
| Machine Dimensions | 42 × 52 × 98cm |
| Machine Weight | 40kg |
| Package Dimensions | 110 × 56 × 56cm |
| Package Weight | 45kg |
| Treatment Handles | 15 professional technologies |
| Solution Bottles | Four |
| Components | Imported parts from the USA, Germany and Japan |
| Warranty | 36-month main-machine warranty |
| Parts Warranty | 12 months |
| Support | Lifetime technical support |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, 15 treatment technologies and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One 15-in-1 Hydra Beauty main unit
-
Hydro Dermabrasion handle
-
Bubble Pen
-
Bio RF Handle
-
Three-Pole Bio-Electric Handle
-
Water Oxygen Spray
-
PDT Handle
-
High-Frequency Handle
-
Ultrasonic Scrubber
-
Facial Ultrasound Handle
-
Eye Ultrasound Handle
-
Exfoliation Handle
-
Microneedling Pen
-
Diamond Microdermabrasion Handle
-
Ice Hammer
-
Four solution bottles
-
Compatible WikBeauty nutrient solutions
-
Power cable
-
English user manual
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Personal Zoom or FaceTime training
-
Machine installation guidance
-
Treatment-handle setup instructions
-
Facial-protocol training
-
Vacuum and energy-setting guidance
-
Product and solution guidance
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Professional training certificate
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides personal professional training to help buyers understand:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen navigation
-
Operation of all 15 technologies
-
Treatment-handle installation
-
Hydro dermabrasion protocols
-
Vacuum-pressure adjustment
-
RF and ultrasound settings
-
PDT color selection
-
Microneedling operation
-
Client consultation
-
Facial-program creation
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
Personal training is available through Zoom or FaceTime.
A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion.
Lifetime technical support is included for machine-operation questions and troubleshooting assistance.
Three-Year Warranty
The WikBeauty 15-in-1 Hydra Beauty Skin System is supported by a 36-month main-machine warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
14-inch touchscreen
-
Intelligent vacuum-control system
-
Internal pumps and control components
-
Other eligible main-machine components
Individual parts and treatment handles are covered by a 12-month parts warranty.
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Warranty-eligibility review
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect treatment-handle operation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of tips, filters and consumables
-
Damage caused by incompatible liquids or products
-
Blockages caused by incorrect cleaning
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images, unboxing video and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional facial equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete skin consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment.
Treatment suitability depends on the selected technology. Some functions may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Active cancer
-
Active skin infections
-
Open wounds in the treatment area
-
Severe inflammatory skin conditions
-
Recent surgery
-
Recent injectable treatments
-
Photosensitivity or photosensitizing medication
-
Recent isotretinoin use
-
Bleeding disorders
-
A history of abnormal or keloid scarring
-
Reduced skin sensation
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
Microneedling cartridges must be handled according to professional hygiene and infection-control requirements.
RF energy, ultrasound, vacuum pressure, light intensity and exfoliation strength must be selected according to the client’s skin condition and tolerance.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Beauty salons
-
Professional spas
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Skin-care studios
-
Estheticians
-
Facial specialists
-
Trained independent practitioners
-
Businesses expanding their facial services
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose the WikBeauty 15-in-1 Hydra Beauty System?
Access Fifteen Facial Technologies
One professional platform supports cleansing, exfoliation, hydration, infusion, RF, ultrasound, LED, microneedling and cooling treatments.
Create Customized Facial Programs
Practitioners can combine selected technologies to create cleansing, hydration, anti-aging, acne-care, brightening and texture-refinement packages.
Receive Professional Training
Personal Zoom or FaceTime training covers machine setup, all 15 technologies, treatment protocols, safety, cleaning and maintenance.
Build Professional Credibility
A complimentary professional training certificate is provided after successful completion and can be displayed in the treatment environment.
Protect Your Investment
The system includes a 36-month main-machine warranty, 12-month parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates and lifetime technical support.
Frequently Asked Questions
What technologies are included?
The system includes Hydro Dermabrasion, Bubble Pen, Bio RF, Three-Pole Bio-Electric, Water Oxygen Spray, PDT, High Frequency, Ultrasonic Scrubber, Facial Ultrasound, Eye Ultrasound, Exfoliation, Microneedling, Diamond Microdermabrasion, Ice Hammer and WikBeauty nutrient solutions.
How long does a professional facial take?
A typical session lasts approximately 30–60 minutes. Treatment duration depends on the selected technologies, skin concern and customized facial protocol.
Can treatments be customized?
Yes. Practitioners can combine suitable technologies to create cleansing, hydration, anti-aging, acne-care, brightening and texture-refinement programs.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Personal Zoom or FaceTime training covers machine setup, touchscreen operation, all 15 technologies, treatment protocols, cleaning, maintenance and safety.
Is a training certificate included?
Yes. A complimentary professional training certificate is provided after successful completion of the training program.
What is the adjustable vacuum range?
The Hydro Dermabrasion system provides adjustable vacuum pressure from 0 to 100KPa.
Which skin concerns can be addressed?
The available technologies support professional programs for congestion, dehydration, fine lines, uneven-looking texture, acne-prone skin, dullness, eye-area concerns and general facial rejuvenation.
Is the system suitable for sensitive skin?
Protocols can be customized using lower vacuum, energy and exfoliation settings. Every client still requires a professional skin assessment before treatment.
What does the warranty cover?
The main machine includes a 36-month warranty. Individual treatment handles and eligible parts include 12-month coverage, subject to the official warranty policy.
Is lifetime technical support included?
Yes. Lifetime technical support is included for operating questions, troubleshooting and equipment guidance.
Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included.
Add a Complete Hydra Facial System to Your Business
The WikBeauty 15-in-1 Hydra Beauty Skin System combines:
-
Fifteen professional treatment technologies
-
A 14-inch touchscreen and adjustable vacuum control
-
Personal professional training and certification
-
Customizable facial and skin-care programs
-
Three-year main-machine warranty and lifetime support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its treatment technologies, training program and package contents.
Order Your 15-in-1 Hydra Beauty Skin System and Request Pricing
Receives in 8 days.
Professional Elite Hydrodermabrasion Facial System
Twelve Programs and Six Specialized Tips for Customized Skin Care
The WikBeauty Elite Hydrodermabrasion Facial System is a professional facial platform developed for premium skin-care studios, medical spas, dermatology clinics and luxury beauty centers.
The system combines water-based hydrodermabrasion, booster-serum infusion and facial lymphatic-drainage support. Twelve customizable treatment programs and six interchangeable tips allow practitioners to create personalized protocols for different skin concerns.
Its gesture-control functionality, premium glass components, adjustable treatment settings and compatible booster solutions support efficient professional operation and a premium client experience.
Hydrodermabrasion | Twelve treatment programs | Six specialized tips | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Functions on One Elite Facial Platform
Hydrodermabrasion
The Hydrodermabrasion function combines controlled liquid flow, suction and gentle exfoliation for professional cleansing and hydration.
Common applications include:
-
Deep facial cleansing
-
Surface exfoliation
-
Skin hydration
-
Pore-care programs
-
Removal of loosened debris
-
General facial rejuvenation
Booster Serum Infusion
The system supports compatible booster serums for customized professional skin-care programs.
Common applications include:
-
Hydration treatments
-
Brightening programs
-
Anti-aging skin care
-
Acne-prone skin care
-
Soothing treatments
-
Firming support
Facial Lymphatic-Drainage Support
The facial massage and drainage function supports professionally planned treatments for temporary puffiness and facial contour refinement.
Common applications include:
-
Facial massage
-
Puffiness-focused treatments
-
Circulation-support programs
-
Facial-contour care
-
Relaxation services
-
Post-cleansing facial protocols
Gesture-Control Operation
The smart operating interface includes gesture-control functionality for convenient hands-free adjustment during suitable treatment steps.
Common operating applications include:
-
Treatment-program selection
-
Intensity adjustment
-
Improved workflow
-
Reduced contact with controls
-
Efficient treatment transitions
-
Greater focus on the client
The appropriate program, treatment tip, booster serum, pressure and session duration should be selected according to the client’s skin condition, sensitivity and professional protocol.
Select the Right Facial Program for Each Client
The system provides 12 customizable programs. Practitioners can select an appropriate pathway according to the client’s skin condition and treatment objective.
Program 1: Deep Cleansing and Clarity
A cleansing-focused pathway for congested, oily or dull-looking skin.
Recommended applications:
-
Deep facial cleansing
-
Surface exfoliation
-
Pore-care programs
-
Removal of excess oil and debris
Recommended for:
-
Congested-looking skin
-
Oily-skin programs
-
Dull complexion
-
Professional cleansing facials
Program 2: Hydration and Glow
A moisture-focused pathway designed to support refreshed and radiant-looking skin.
Recommended applications:
-
Deep hydration
-
Dry-looking skin
-
Dull complexion
-
General skin conditioning
Recommended for:
-
Dehydrated-looking skin
-
Hydration facial packages
-
Brightening services
-
Maintenance-oriented treatments
Program 3: Anti-Aging and Firming
A rejuvenation pathway for mature-looking skin, fine lines and elasticity concerns.
Recommended applications:
-
Fine-line appearance
-
Firming support
-
Mature-looking skin
-
Facial-contour care
Recommended for:
-
Professional anti-aging services
-
Mature-skin programs
-
Firming treatments
-
Premium rejuvenation packages
Program 4: Sensitive and Soothing Care
A gentler pathway for suitable sensitive-looking or temporarily reactive skin.
Recommended applications:
-
Gentle cleansing
-
Skin-comfort treatments
-
Temporary redness
-
Soothing hydration
Recommended for:
-
Sensitive-looking skin
-
First-time clients
-
Comfort-focused facials
-
Gentle maintenance programs
Twelve Programs for Customized Facial Treatments
The Elite Hydrodermabrasion System provides 12 customizable programs for different professional skin-care objectives.
| Program Category | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Cleansing Programs | Surface cleansing, exfoliation and pore-care support |
| Hydration Programs | Moisture-focused treatments and skin conditioning |
| Brightening Programs | Dull-looking skin and complexion enhancement |
| Anti-Aging Programs | Fine-line appearance and firming support |
| Acne-Care Programs | Suitable congested and acne-prone skin |
| Sensitive-Skin Programs | Gentle cleansing, hydration and comfort-focused care |
| Lymphatic Programs | Facial massage and temporary puffiness support |
| Customized Programs | Treatment-specific settings selected by the practitioner |
The available settings give trained operators greater flexibility over treatment intensity, pressure, solution selection and treatment duration.
New clients should begin with gentler settings before treatment intensity is increased gradually.
Six Specialized Treatment Tips
Six interchangeable tips support different facial zones and professional treatment objectives.
Cleansing Tips
-
General facial cleansing
-
Surface exfoliation
-
Pore-care treatments
-
Removal of loosened debris
-
Facial-treatment preparation
Hydration Tips
-
Moisture-focused facials
-
Booster-serum application
-
Dry-looking skin
-
General skin conditioning
-
Brightening protocols
Targeted Treatment Tips
-
Nose and T-zone
-
Chin and jawline
-
Cheeks
-
Forehead
-
Other professionally assessed facial zones
Professional Facial and Skin-Care Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected program, tip, solution, booster serum and professional protocol.
| Skin Concern | Applicable Program | Intended Skin-Care Application |
|---|---|---|
| Congested-looking skin | Cleansing program | Deep-cleansing and pore-care support |
| Dry or dehydrated-looking skin | Hydration program | Moisture-focused facial care |
| Fine-line appearance | Anti-aging program | Rejuvenation and firming support |
| Dull-looking complexion | Brightening program | Complexion-enhancement treatments |
| Uneven-looking tone | Brightening booster program | Tone-refinement support |
| Acne-prone skin | Acne-care program | Clarifying skin-care services |
| Sensitive-looking skin | Gentle program | Soothing and comfort-focused care |
| Temporary facial puffiness | Lymphatic program | Facial massage and contour support |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete skin consultation should be performed before every treatment.
How a Professional Facial Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s skin concerns, treatment history, current products, allergies, sensitivity and contraindications.
2. System Preparation
The appropriate treatment tip, cleansing solution and booster serum are selected. Bottles, tubing and treatment components are connected according to the operating manual.
3. Program Selection
The practitioner selects one of the 12 programs and adjusts the available pressure, intensity and treatment-duration settings.
4. Hydrodermabrasion Treatment
The selected tip is moved across the treatment area using the recommended technique. Booster infusion and facial drainage steps are incorporated according to the customized protocol.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the skin is assessed and suitable moisturizer and sunscreen are applied where appropriate. The client receives customized aftercare instructions.
A typical professional session lasts approximately 30–50 minutes. Temporary redness, dryness or sensitivity may occur.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines advanced hydrodermabrasion, booster infusion and gesture-control functionality for streamlined professional operation.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Twelve customizable treatment programs
-
Six interchangeable treatment tips
-
Four included cleansing solutions
-
Multiple booster-serum options
-
Gesture-control functionality
-
Facial lymphatic-drainage support
-
Premium glass components
-
Modern professional design
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | WikBeauty Elite Hydrodermabrasion Facial System |
| Product Type | Professional hydrodermabrasion and booster-infusion system |
| Primary Technologies | Hydrodermabrasion, booster infusion and lymphatic-drainage support |
| Treatment Programs | 12 customizable programs |
| Specialized Tips | Six interchangeable tips |
| Control System | Smart operating system with gesture control |
| Included Solutions | Four professional cleansing and treatment solutions |
| Booster Options | Brightening, anti-aging, hydration, acne care, soothing and firming |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30–50 minutes |
| Construction | Premium glass and durable professional materials |
| Display Features | Illuminated waste bottle and treatment interface |
| Power Supply | Regional professional AC power configuration |
| Safety Features | Automatic shut-off, pressure regulation and temperature monitoring |
| Research and Development | More than 15 years of WikBeauty development experience |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and technical assistance |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main hydrodermabrasion system, six treatment tips, four cleansing solutions and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One Elite Hydrodermabrasion main unit
-
Six interchangeable treatment tips
-
Hydrodermabrasion handpiece
-
Facial massage and drainage components
-
Solution and booster containers
-
Illuminated waste bottle
-
Required tubing and connection components
-
Power cable
-
English user manual
-
Operating guidance
Included Cleansing Solutions
-
Essence Foam
-
WikBeauty Cleansing Solution
-
Softening, Hydrate and Glow Serum
-
Rejuvenating Extract
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Remote professional training
-
Machine setup guidance
-
Treatment-tip installation
-
Program-selection guidance
-
Pressure and intensity adjustment
-
Cleansing-solution guidance
-
Booster-serum selection
-
Gesture-control operation
-
Facial-treatment protocols
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional guidance to help buyers understand:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Treatment-handpiece operation
-
Tip selection and installation
-
Operation of all 12 programs
-
Pressure and intensity adjustment
-
Cleansing-solution selection
-
Booster-serum selection
-
Gesture-control functionality
-
Facial lymphatic-drainage protocols
-
Client consultation
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion.
Three-Year Warranty
The WikBeauty Elite Hydrodermabrasion Facial System is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Smart control system
-
Gesture-control components
-
Internal pumps
-
Original treatment handpiece
-
Handle and tubing connections
-
Other eligible components supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Warranty-eligibility review
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect treatment-tip operation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of tips, tubing, filters and consumables
-
Damage caused by incompatible solutions
-
Blockages caused by incorrect cleaning
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional facial equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete skin consultation, allergy review and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Active herpes simplex
-
Open wounds or active skin infections
-
Severe inflammatory acne
-
Severe rosacea aggravated by treatment
-
Recent surgery
-
Recent laser treatment or chemical peel
-
Active skin cancer or suspicious lesions
-
Known allergy to selected solutions or boosters
-
Severe sensitivity
-
Reduced skin sensation
-
Pregnancy without appropriate professional guidance
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
A patch test should be performed before using a new booster serum when appropriate.
Pressure, exfoliation intensity, booster selection and treatment duration must be adjusted according to the client’s skin condition and tolerance.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Premium skin-care studios
-
Medical spas
-
Dermatology clinics
-
Luxury beauty centers
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Professional facial specialists
-
Estheticians
-
Trained independent practitioners
-
Businesses expanding their hydrodermabrasion services
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose the WikBeauty Elite Hydrodermabrasion System?
Combine Three Professional Functions
The system combines hydrodermabrasion, booster-serum infusion and facial lymphatic-drainage support in one professional platform.
Create Customized Facial Treatments
Twelve programs, six specialized tips and multiple booster-serum options support individualized facial protocols.
Improve Professional Workflow
Gesture-control functionality allows practitioners to adjust suitable settings while maintaining focus on the client and treatment process.
Expand Your Service Menu
The system supports cleansing, hydration, anti-aging, brightening, acne-care, sensitive-skin and facial-contour programs.
Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and technical support.
Frequently Asked Questions
How does hydrodermabrasion work?
Hydrodermabrasion combines controlled liquid flow, suction and gentle exfoliation to cleanse the skin and support hydration.
How is this system different from basic hydrodermabrasion machines?
The Elite system combines hydrodermabrasion with customizable booster-serum infusion, facial lymphatic-drainage support, 12 treatment programs, six specialized tips and gesture-control functionality.
What solutions are included?
The system includes Essence Foam, WikBeauty Cleansing Solution, Softening, Hydrate and Glow Serum and Rejuvenating Extract.
What booster options are available?
Available booster categories include brightening, anti-aging, hydration, acne care, soothing and firming.
How long does a professional treatment take?
A typical session lasts approximately 30–50 minutes. Duration depends on the selected program, booster and customized protocol.
Can treatments be customized?
Yes. Practitioners can select from 12 programs, six tips and multiple booster options according to the client’s skin condition and goals.
Is the system suitable for sensitive skin?
Gentler programs, appropriate tips and suitable soothing products can be selected for some sensitive-skin clients. A professional assessment is still required.
What is gesture control?
Gesture control allows practitioners to perform certain program or setting adjustments without directly touching the control interface.
Is professional training included?
Remote professional training covers machine setup, program selection, treatment-tip use, booster selection, gesture control, facial protocols, cleaning and safety. A training certificate is provided.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included.
Add Elite Hydrodermabrasion to Your Facial Business
The WikBeauty Elite Hydrodermabrasion Facial System combines:
-
Advanced water-based hydrodermabrasion
-
Twelve customizable treatment programs
-
Six specialized treatment tips
-
Booster infusion and lymphatic-drainage support
-
Three-year parts warranty and professional training
Contact Wikbeauty to order the Elite system or receive more information about its treatment programs, booster solutions and package contents.
Order Your Elite Hydrodermabrasion System and Request Pricing
Receives in 8 days.
$1,399.00
Professional Pressotherapy and Lymphatic Massage System
Sequential Air Compression for Professional Wellness and Recovery Treatments
The Wikbeauty Pressotherapy Lymphatic Massage Device is a professional air-compression therapy system developed for beauty salons, wellness centers, physiotherapy clinics, medical spas and body-contouring studios.
Its digital touchscreen provides adjustable pressure, intensity, treatment duration and program selection. Multiple overlapping air chambers inflate and deflate sequentially to create a rhythmic compression massage across the selected treatment areas.
The system can be used as a standalone wellness service or combined with suitable body-contouring and recovery programs.
Sequential air compression | Full-body garment | Adjustable treatment programs | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Applications on One Pressotherapy Platform
Lymphatic Drainage
The sequential compression system supports natural lymphatic movement by applying controlled pressure through multiple overlapping air chambers.
Common treatment applications include:
-
Lymphatic drainage programs
-
Fluid-movement support
-
Leg-heaviness treatments
-
General wellness sessions
-
Post-treatment drainage support
-
Maintenance-oriented wellness programs
Water-Retention Support
The pressotherapy garment applies rhythmic compression to the selected body areas, supporting professional programs for clients concerned about temporary water retention or feelings of heaviness.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Legs
-
Thighs
-
Waist
-
Abdomen
-
Arms
-
Full body
Circulation and Recovery
Sequential compression may support circulation and recovery-oriented wellness programs.
Common applications include:
-
Post-workout recovery
-
Tired-leg treatments
-
Muscle-relaxation programs
-
General circulation support
-
Wellness and recovery sessions
-
Suitable post-procedure support programs
Relaxation and Wellness
The rhythmic inflation and deflation of the garment creates a comfortable compression-massage experience.
Common applications include:
-
Relaxation treatments
-
Spa wellness programs
-
Body-care packages
-
Stress-reduction services
-
Maintenance treatments
-
Membership-based wellness programs
The appropriate pressure, intensity, duration and program should be selected according to the client’s condition, comfort level and professional protocol.
Select the Right Treatment Program for Your Clients
The system supports adjustable programs for different treatment objectives. The appropriate program should be selected following consultation and client assessment.
Program 1: Lymphatic Drainage
A structured sequential-compression program designed to support natural lymphatic movement.
Recommended applications:
-
General lymphatic-drainage sessions
-
Fluid-movement support
-
Tired or heavy legs
-
Wellness maintenance
Recommended for:
-
Wellness centers
-
Beauty salons
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Businesses adding lymphatic-massage services
Program 2: Water-Retention Support
A customizable compression program for clients concerned about temporary water retention and feelings of heaviness.
Recommended applications:
-
Leg and thigh treatments
-
Waist and abdomen programs
-
Full-body compression sessions
-
General body-wellness services
Recommended for:
-
Spa treatment packages
-
Body-care programs
-
Wellness memberships
-
Clients seeking a lighter, refreshed feeling
Program 3: Recovery and Circulation
A rhythmic compression program designed to support circulation and recovery-focused services.
Recommended applications:
-
Post-workout recovery
-
Tired-leg programs
-
Muscle-relaxation sessions
-
Suitable professional recovery protocols
Recommended for:
-
Physiotherapy clinics
-
Fitness and recovery centers
-
Sports-wellness businesses
-
Medical spas offering recovery services
Program 4: Body-Contouring Add-On
A complementary program for suitable clients receiving body-contouring treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Cryolipolysis treatment courses
-
Cavitation programs
-
Radiofrequency body treatments
-
Other suitable contouring services
Recommended for:
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Aesthetic centers
-
Medical spas
-
Businesses creating combination treatment packages
Adjustable Compression for Customized Treatments
The Pressotherapy Machine provides adjustable pressure, intensity, duration and program selection. Each setting should be selected according to the treatment area, client comfort and professional objective.
| Treatment Program | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Gentle Compression | Relaxation, first-time clients and comfort-focused treatments |
| Standard Compression | General lymphatic-drainage and wellness programs |
| Targeted Compression | Selected legs, arms, waist or abdomen treatments |
| Full-Body Program | Comprehensive wellness and compression-massage sessions |
The adjustable settings give trained operators greater control over treatment intensity and client comfort.
The correct program must be selected following consultation and assessment of the intended treatment areas.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
The supplied full-body garment supports targeted and comprehensive compression programs.
Leg Treatments
-
Thighs
-
Lower legs
-
Tired-leg programs
-
Leg-heaviness treatments
-
Recovery-oriented sessions
Arm Treatments
-
Upper arms
-
Lower arms
-
General circulation support
-
Relaxation programs
-
Suitable recovery treatments
Waist and Abdomen Treatments
-
Waist
-
Abdomen
-
General body-wellness programs
-
Water-retention support
-
Body-contouring add-on services
Professional Wellness and Recovery Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected pressure, intensity, duration and compression program.
| Treatment Area | Applicable Program | Intended Wellness Application |
|---|---|---|
| Legs and thighs | Sequential compression | Lymphatic-drainage and tired-leg support |
| Arms | Targeted compression | General circulation and recovery support |
| Waist and abdomen | Targeted compression | Body wellness and water-retention support |
| Full body | Full-body compression | Comprehensive relaxation and wellness |
| Lower body | Recovery program | Post-workout and muscle-recovery support |
| Body-contouring areas | Add-on program | Complementary treatment-course support |
| Tired or heavy legs | Gentle or standard compression | Comfort and relaxation |
| General wellness | Customized program | Maintenance-oriented compression massage |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment.
How a Professional Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, medical history, treatment goals and suitability. Target areas, pressure level, treatment duration and program are then selected.
2. Garment Preparation
The client is positioned comfortably, and the appropriate garment sections are fitted over the selected treatment areas. The operator confirms that all air-hose connections are secure.
3. Parameter Selection
Pressure, intensity, duration and treatment program are selected according to the client’s comfort, treatment area and professional protocol.
4. Treatment Application
The machine sequentially inflates and deflates the overlapping air chambers, producing rhythmic waves of compression across the selected areas. A typical session lasts approximately 20–45 minutes.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After the session, the garment is removed and the client receives appropriate wellness and aftercare guidance.
Some clients may return to normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary pressure marks, mild tenderness, increased urination or other short-term responses may occur.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines digital touchscreen control with adjustable air-compression programs for streamlined use in professional settings.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Digital touchscreen control
-
Multiple overlapping air chambers
-
Sequential compression technology
-
Adjustable pressure and intensity
-
Customizable treatment duration
-
Preset wellness programs
-
Full-body treatment garment
-
Face-to-face and add-on service flexibility
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Pressotherapy Lymphatic Massage Device |
| Product Type | Professional air-compression therapy system |
| Technology | Sequential air-pressure compression |
| Functions | Lymphatic drainage, wellness, recovery and body-care support |
| Treatment Areas | Legs, arms, waist, abdomen and full body |
| Compression System | Multiple overlapping air chambers |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–45 minutes |
| Recommended Protocol | Commonly 6–12 sessions, depending on client assessment |
| Customization | Adjustable pressure, intensity, duration and program selection |
| Treatment Application | Fully clothed, non-invasive compression massage |
| Safety Features | Pressure-limit controls, automatic shut-off and protective sensors |
| Control Interface | Digital touchscreen with preset wellness programs |
| Power Supply | 110V–240V |
| Package Contents | Machine, full-body garment, power cable and manual |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and lifetime technical support |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, full-body compression garment and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One Pressotherapy control system
-
Full-body compression garment
-
Leg garment sections
-
Arm garment sections
-
Waist and abdomen garment sections
-
Multiple overlapping air chambers
-
Air-hose connection components
-
Power cable
-
English user manual
-
Operating guidance
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Remote professional training
-
Machine setup guidance
-
Garment-fitting instructions
-
Air-hose connection guidance
-
Pressure and intensity selection
-
Treatment-program guidance
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Garment fitting
-
Air-hose connections
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Pressure and intensity adjustment
-
Treatment-duration selection
-
Program selection
-
Client positioning
-
Basic treatment protocols
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
A professional training certificate is provided after completion.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Pressotherapy Lymphatic Massage Device is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen and control system
-
Air compressor and internal pressure components
-
Original connection hoses
-
Garment connection components
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect pressure or program selection
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of garments, hoses and consumable items
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional wellness equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Active deep-vein thrombosis or suspected blood clots
-
Severe peripheral vascular disease
-
Uncontrolled cardiovascular conditions
-
Severe heart failure
-
Acute infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds in the treatment area
-
Severe skin conditions
-
Unexplained swelling
-
Severe kidney disease
-
Severe liver disease
-
Untreated hypertension
-
Impaired sensation
-
Recent surgery without appropriate clearance
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
The compression garment must be fitted correctly, and the selected pressure must remain comfortable throughout treatment.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Beauty salons
-
Wellness centers
-
Medical spas
-
Physiotherapy clinics
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Fitness and recovery centers
-
Professional massage providers
-
Trained independent practitioners
-
Businesses expanding their wellness services
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose This Pressotherapy System?
Offer a Comfortable Wellness Service
Sequential air compression provides a rhythmic and relaxing treatment experience that can be added to professional wellness menus.
Treat Multiple Body Areas
The supplied garment supports treatments for the legs, arms, waist, abdomen and full body.
Customize Every Session
Adjustable pressure, intensity, duration and program selection allow treatments to be adapted to client comfort and professional objectives.
Expand Your Service Menu
The system can support standalone lymphatic-massage services, recovery programs, wellness packages and suitable body-contouring add-ons.
Protect Your Investment
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty, professional training, a training certificate and lifetime technical support.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is pressotherapy?
Pressotherapy is a compression-massage treatment that uses multiple air chambers to apply rhythmic pressure to selected body areas. The chambers inflate and deflate sequentially to support lymphatic movement, circulation and relaxation.
How does sequential air compression work?
The garment contains overlapping air chambers that inflate and deflate in a controlled sequence. This creates a wave-like compression massage across the selected treatment areas.
Which areas can be treated?
The supplied garment supports professional treatments for the legs, thighs, arms, waist, abdomen and full body.
How long does a treatment take?
A typical session lasts approximately 20–45 minutes. Treatment time can be adjusted according to the selected program, treatment area and client comfort.
How many sessions are recommended?
A typical professional program may include 6–12 sessions. The final number and frequency should be selected according to the client’s condition, objectives and response.
Is pressotherapy uncomfortable?
The treatment is designed to provide rhythmic compression. Pressure and intensity can be adjusted according to client comfort. The treatment should not cause pain.
Can pressotherapy be combined with other treatments?
It may be offered as a complementary service alongside suitable cryolipolysis, cavitation, radiofrequency and other body-contouring programs following professional assessment.
Is there downtime?
Most suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Individual responses may vary.
Is training included?
Remote professional training and operating guidance are included. A professional training certificate is provided after completion.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Normal garment wear, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included.
Add Professional Pressotherapy to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Pressotherapy Lymphatic Massage Device combines:
-
Sequential air-compression technology
-
Adjustable pressure and treatment programs
-
Full-body garment coverage
-
Professional wellness and recovery applications
-
Three-year parts warranty and lifetime support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its treatment programs, package contents and professional training.
Order Your Pressotherapy Machine and Request a Quote
Receives in 8 days.
From $2,599.00
Professional 5D Lipo Laser System
Five-Wavelength Technology for Non-Invasive Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty 5D Lipo Laser Machine is a professional body-contouring system developed for beauty studios, wellness centers and qualified independent practitioners.
Combining five laser wavelengths with an adjustable multi-pad design, the system enables trained operators to create customized treatments for the abdomen, waist, thighs, arms, back and other commonly requested body areas.
Available in vertical and portable configurations, the machine provides a practical balance of treatment flexibility, operator control and client comfort.
Five wavelengths | Up to 14 pads | 15 energy levels | Vertical or portable
Advanced Five-Wavelength Technology
The system integrates five laser wavelengths within one professional platform:
-
650 nm
-
780 nm
-
808 nm
-
940 nm
-
980 nm
This multi-wavelength configuration provides greater versatility than a conventional single-wavelength system. Treatment parameters can be adjusted according to the selected area, professional protocol and individual client requirements.
Each treatment pad contains either 20 or 28 diode lasers, depending on the configuration selected, with an output of up to 209 mW per diode.
Key Product Advantages
Multi-Wavelength System
Five available wavelengths provide greater flexibility when developing professional body-contouring protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Parameters
Fifteen energy levels, adjustable pulse timing and continuous or pulsed modes allow the operator to customize each session.
Flexible Pad Configuration
The standard system includes six large pads and two small pads. Compatible configurations can be expanded to a maximum of 14 treatment pads.
Independent Pad Cooling
Each treatment pad features an independent wind-cooling system to support stable performance during operation.
Multiple Equipment Formats
Choose a vertical unit for a permanent treatment room or a portable unit for smaller spaces and more flexible working arrangements.
International Compatibility
The system is available in 110 V and 220 V versions, with US, UK, EU and AU plug options.
Professional Body-Contouring Applications
The 5D Lipo Laser Machine is designed for non-invasive aesthetic treatments focused on improving the appearance of body contours.
Common treatment areas include:
| Treatment area | Typical application |
|---|---|
| Abdomen | Abdominal contouring |
| Waist and flanks | Waistline definition |
| Upper and lower back | Localized body contouring |
| Upper arms | Arm-contouring treatments |
| Inner and outer thighs | Thigh shaping |
| Buttocks | Contour-focused treatments |
| Legs and calves | Localized lower-body treatments |
Treatment suitability, pad placement and operating parameters should be determined by a trained operator following a complete client consultation.
How the System Works
The treatment pads are positioned securely over the selected body area using adjustable straps. The operator then selects the treatment duration, energy level and pulse mode according to the recommended protocol.
The pads deliver controlled low-level laser energy to the treatment area without surgical incisions, injections or anesthesia. Sessions are designed to be comfortable and generally do not require a surgical recovery period.
The system should be used as part of a structured body-contouring program. Individual outcomes vary according to body composition, lifestyle, treatment frequency and the protocol applied.
Configurable Treatment-Pad System
Large Treatment Pads
The six large pads provide wider coverage for areas such as the abdomen, waist, back, thighs and buttocks.
Small Treatment Pads
The two small pads are designed for more targeted placement on areas such as the upper arms and smaller localized zones.
Optional Expansion
Selected machine configurations can support up to 14 pads. This provides additional flexibility when covering larger areas or developing multi-pad protocols.
Additional treatment pads are sold separately. Compatibility should be confirmed before purchase.
Vertical and Portable Options
Vertical Configuration
The vertical model provides a refined, professional presentation for dedicated treatment rooms. Its mobile base allows the equipment to be repositioned within the working area when necessary.
Recommended for:
-
Beauty studios
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Permanent treatment rooms
-
Higher-volume treatment environments
Portable Configuration
The portable model offers a more compact footprint while retaining the core multi-pad functionality of the system.
Recommended for:
-
Independent practitioners
-
Smaller studios
-
Limited treatment spaces
-
Professionals requiring easier storage or transportation
Controlled, Client-Focused Operation
The system offers adjustable parameters to support professional operation and individual client comfort.
-
Energy adjustment from level 1 to 15
-
Pulse-time adjustment from 0.1 to 5 seconds
-
Continuous and pulsed operating modes
-
Adjustable session duration
-
Touchscreen control interface
-
Independent cooling for each pad
-
Secure pad-positioning straps
-
IC-card control system
Treatment duration may range from approximately 15 to 60 minutes, depending on the selected area and treatment protocol.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product type | Professional 5D lipo laser machine |
| Technology | Low-level diode laser |
| Laser wavelengths | 650 nm, 780 nm, 808 nm, 940 nm and 980 nm |
| Diode output | Up to 209 mW per diode |
| Diodes per pad | 28 on big and 3 on a small pad |
| Standard configuration | 6 large pads and 2 small pads |
| Maximum configuration | Up to 14 treatment pads |
| Energy adjustment | Levels 1–15 |
| Pulse-time range | 0.1–5 seconds |
| Operating modes | Continuous and pulsed |
| Treatment duration | Approximately 15–60 minutes |
| Cooling system | Independent wind cooling for each pad |
| Control interface | Touchscreen |
| Additional control | IC-card system |
| Equipment options | Vertical or portable |
| Voltage options | 110 V or 220 V |
| Plug options | US, UK, EU and AU |
Product specifications may vary according to the selected configuration. Confirm the final specification sheet with Wikbeauty before ordering.
Standard Package Contents
The standard package includes:
-
One 5D Lipo Laser main unit
-
Six large treatment pads
-
Two small treatment pads
-
Treatment-pad connection cables
-
Adjustable securing straps
-
Protective eyewear
-
Power cable with selected plug
-
English user manual
-
Setup and operating guidance
Optional pads and accessories can be added according to the selected system configuration.
Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides guidance to help buyers understand:
-
Equipment installation
-
Basic system operation
-
Treatment-parameter selection
-
Pad positioning
-
Routine cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
-
Recommended safety procedures
Intended Users
This system is designed for professional use by:
-
Aesthetic practitioners
-
Body-contouring specialists
-
Beauty-studio owners
-
Wellness professionals
-
Trained independent operators
-
Qualified entrepreneurs establishing a treatment business
- Home Use
Safety and Contraindications
A complete consultation and suitability assessment should be performed before every treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Implanted electronic devices
-
Active cancer
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Active skin infections
-
Open wounds in the treatment area
-
Photosensitivity or the use of photosensitizing medication
-
Other conditions identified in the operating manual
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the supplied user manual, relevant professional standards and applicable local regulations. Clients should seek medical advice when treatment suitability is uncertain.
Why Professionals Choose Wikbeauty
Specialized Beauty-Equipment Supply
Wikbeauty provides professional aesthetic and body-contouring equipment to international buyers.
Configurable Equipment
Select the machine format, voltage, plug and number of treatment pads according to your operating requirements.
International Electrical Options
The system can be prepared for different markets with 110 V or 220 V operation and the appropriate regional plug.
Operating Assistance
Support is available for installation, initial setup, routine operation and basic troubleshooting.
Direct Purchasing
Buy directly from the equipment supplier and receive assistance when confirming the most appropriate configuration.
Frequently Asked Questions
Is this a professional or home-use machine?
This is professional beauty equipment. It should be operated by a trained individual who understands consultation procedures, contraindications, treatment parameters and equipment safety.
What is the standard pad configuration?
The standard system includes six large pads and two small pads. Compatible configurations can be expanded to a maximum of 14 pads.
What is the difference between the large and small pads?
Large pads provide broader coverage for areas such as the abdomen, back and thighs. Small pads enable more targeted placement on the arms and other localized areas.
Should I choose the vertical or portable version?
The vertical model is suitable for a dedicated professional treatment room. The portable model is better suited to smaller spaces or operators who require easier storage and transportation.
How long does a session take?
A session may last approximately 15–60 minutes. Duration varies according to the treatment area, pad configuration, operating parameters and professional protocol.
Is there a recovery period?
The treatment is non-invasive and does not involve surgical incisions. Clients can generally resume normal daily activities after a session, subject to individual circumstances and professional guidance.
Are results guaranteed?
No aesthetic treatment can guarantee identical results for every person. Outcomes may vary depending on the client’s body composition, lifestyle, treatment schedule and the protocol used.
Can I order additional treatment pads?
Additional pads may be purchased for compatible configurations. Confirm the maximum number of supported pads before ordering.
Which voltage should I select?
Select the voltage that matches the electrical standard in your country. If uncertain, contact Wikbeauty before completing your purchase.
Configure Your 5D Lipo Laser System
Select the machine format, voltage, plug and treatment-pad configuration that best suits your professional requirements.
For assistance choosing between the vertical and portable models, contact Wikbeauty before placing your order.
Three-Year Warranty
Your Wikbeauty 5D Lipo Laser Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing additional confidence in your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the warranty terms, coverage includes manufacturing defects and eligible failures involving:
-
Main machine components
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen and control system
-
Treatment-pad connections
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the original machine
Technical Support
If a covered technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty’s support team will help you:
-
Identify the issue through remote technical assessment
-
Complete basic troubleshooting
-
Determine whether a replacement part or repair is required
-
Receive guidance for installing eligible replacement components
Warranty Conditions
The warranty applies to defects arising under normal and proper use. It does not cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse or incorrect operation
-
Unauthorized modification or repair
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of consumable parts and accessories
-
Damage caused during unauthorized transportation
-
Failure to follow the supplied operating instructions
The original order information and machine serial number may be required when requesting warranty service. Full coverage is subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty terms.
Three years of warranty coverage. Professional technical assistance. Long-term confidence in your purchase.
Select Your Configuration and Add to Cart
Explore the complete range of professional lipo laser machines.
Receives in 8 days.
Elevate Your Practice
Shop by Treatment
Explore professional-grade machines crafted for every aesthetic and wellness need.
Top Sellers You Can't Miss
From $2,599.00
Receives in 8 days.
From $2,599.00
Receives in 8 days.
$560.00
Receives in 8 days.
$2,169.00
Receives in 8 days.
From $499.00
Receives in 8 days.
$2,299.00
Receives in 8 days.
$3,999.00
Receives in 8 days.
Wait — here's $50 off your order
Looks like you left something behind. Complete your order now and take $50 off with code COMEBACK50 — no minimum purchase required.
- Choosing a selection results in a full page refresh.
- Opens in a new window.